NetEngine 8000 X Hardware Guide PDF

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 X Series
V800R012C10 and Later Versions
Hardware Guide
Issue 06
Date 2023-10-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Security Declaration
Vulnerability
Huawei's regulations on product vulnerability management are subject to “Vul. Response Process”.
For details about the policy, see the following website:https://www.huawei.com/en/psirt/vul-
response-process
For enterprise customers who need to obtain vulnerability information, visit:https://
securitybulletin.huawei.com/enterprise/en/security-advisory
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Hardware Guide Contents
Contents
1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool....................................................................................................... 4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 Chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 X4.............................................................................................................................................................. 5
3.1.2 NetEngine 8000 X8........................................................................................................................................................... 28
3.1.3 NetEngine 8000 X16......................................................................................................................................................... 48
3.2 Power Supply.......................................................................................................................................................................... 71
3.2.1 X4 device Power Supply System................................................................................................................................... 71
3.2.2 X4 device AC&High-Voltage DC PEM......................................................................................................................... 78
3.2.3 X4 device DC PEM............................................................................................................................................................. 80
3.2.4 X8 device Power Supply System................................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.5 X8 device AC&High-Voltage DC PEM......................................................................................................................... 89
3.2.6 X8 device DC PEM............................................................................................................................................................. 91
3.2.7 NetEngine 8000 X16 Power Supply System............................................................................................................. 93
3.2.8 NetEngine 8000 X16 AC&High-Voltage DC PEM................................................................................................. 103
3.2.9 NetEngine 8000 X16 DC PEM..................................................................................................................................... 104
3.2.10 Power Switch.................................................................................................................................................................. 106
3.2.11 PAH-3000WA (3000W Dual Inputs AC&HVDC Power Module)...................................................................107
3.2.12 PDC-2200WC (PSU-PDC-2200WC-PM2200W DC Power Supply)............................................................... 112
3.2.13 PDC-3000WA (PSU-PDC3000WA-PM3000W DC Power Supply)................................................................. 115
3.2.14 PDC-4000WA (PSU-PDC-PM4000W DC Power Supply)..................................................................................119
3.3 Heat System......................................................................................................................................................................... 122
3.3.1 Overview of the Heat Dissipation System..............................................................................................................122
3.3.2 X4 device Chassis Door................................................................................................................................................. 124
3.3.3 X8 device Chassis Door................................................................................................................................................. 126
3.3.4 FAN-240SB-B (FAN-240SB-B Fan Tray Assembly)............................................................................................... 129
3.3.6 FAN-480SE-B (FAN-480SE-B Fan Tray Assembly)............................................................................................... 140
3.3.8 FAN-960SE-B (FAN-960SE-B Fan Tray Assembly)............................................................................................... 152
3.4 Noise Reduction Module..................................................................................................................................................159
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

3.4.1 X4 Noise Reduction Module........................................................................................................................................ 159

3.4.2 X8 Noise Reduction Module........................................................................................................................................ 161
3.4.3 X16 Cabinet Door with Noise Reduction Module................................................................................................ 163
3.5 Board....................................................................................................................................................................................... 166
3.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................ 166
3.5.1.1 Card Classification....................................................................................................................................................... 166
3.5.1.2 Card Structure and Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 167
3.5.1.3 Port Numbering of Boards....................................................................................................................................... 168
3.5.1.4 Port Rate Description................................................................................................................................................. 169
3.5.1.5 CM..................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
3.5.2 MPU..................................................................................................................................................................................... 172
3.5.2.1 CR8D0MPUA1C0 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A1(MPUA1))................................................. 172
3.5.2.4 CR8D0MPUA6C0 (03050EYK: NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A6(MPUA6))........................... 192
3.5.2.5 CR8D0MPUA6C0 (03050EYK-001: NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A6(MPUA6))...................199
3.5.2.6 CR8D0MPUAXC0 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A10(MPUA10))............................................ 205
3.5.2.7 CR8D0MPUAXC1 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A11(MPUA11))............................................ 212
3.5.3 SFU....................................................................................................................................................................................... 218
3.5.3.1 CR8DSFU14TC0 (NetEngine 8000 X16 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-C))...........................219
3.5.3.2 CR8DSFU14TC8 (NetEngine 8000 X8 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-A))............................. 222
3.5.3.3 CR8DSFU14TCA (NetEngine 8000 X4 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-B)).............................226
3.5.3.4 CR8DSFU14TD1 (NetEngine 8000 X4 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-D))............................ 230
3.5.3.5 CR8DSFU14TDE (NetEngine 8000 X8 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-E)).............................234
3.5.3.6 CR8DSFUI2TC1 (NetEngine 8000 X16 2Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-C))....................................... 236
3.5.3.7 CR8DSFUI2TDA (NetEngine 8000 X4 2Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-A))........................................ 239
3.5.3.8 CR8DSFUI2TDB (NetEngine 8000 X8 2Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-B)).........................................244
3.5.3.9 CR8DSFUI4TC0 (NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-A))......................................... 248
3.5.3.10 CR8DSFUI4TC1 (NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-B))....................................... 252
3.5.3.11 CR8DSFUI4TC4 (03050BEA: NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-C)).................256
3.5.3.12 CR8DSFUI4TC4 (03050BEA-001: NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-C))........260
3.5.3.13 CR8DSFUI4TC6 (03050BEC: NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-D)).................265
3.5.3.14 CR8DSFUI4TC6 (03050BEC-001: NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-D))........269
3.5.3.15 CR8DSFUI4TDE (NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-F)).......................................273
3.5.3.16 CR8DSFUI4TDF (NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-G))...................................... 277
3.5.4 VSUI-400............................................................................................................................................................................ 280
3.5.4.1 CR8DVSUIK0C3 (Integrated Service Unit 400(VSUI-400-E))........................................................................ 281
3.5.5 LPUF-1T.............................................................................................................................................................................. 284
3.5.5.1 CR8DLPUFT171 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit (LPUF-1T))............................................................... 284
3.5.5.2 CR8DLPUFT181 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit E(LPUF-1T-E))......................................................... 288
3.5.6 LPUI-1T3............................................................................................................................................................................. 291
3.5.6.1 CR8DEANEJXD1 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM))................................................................................................................................... 291
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

3.5.6.2 CR8DEANEJXD9 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM))................................................................................................................................... 301
3.5.6.3 CR8DEANEJXDM (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)).................................................................................................... 311
3.5.6.4 CR8DEANEJXDQ (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)).................................................................................................... 321
3.5.7 LPUF-2T.............................................................................................................................................................................. 331
3.5.7.1 CR8DLPUFT0D1 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit (LPUF-2T))...............................................................331
3.5.8 LPUI-2T............................................................................................................................................................................... 334
3.5.8.1 CR8D00EENBC1 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 334
3.5.8.2 CR8D00EENBC3 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 343
3.5.8.3 CR8D00EENBC7 (03050DFL: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................351
3.5.8.4 CR8D00EENBC7 (03050DFL-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................359
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................367
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................375
3.5.8.7 CR8D00EENBC9 (03050DFQ: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 383
3.5.8.8 CR8D00EENBC9 (03050DFQ-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 391
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 399
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 407
3.5.8.11 CR8D00EENBCF (03050DRX: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................415
3.5.8.12 CR8D00EENBCF (03050DRX-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec Integrated Line Processing
Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))............................................................................................................................................................ 422
3.5.8.13 CR8D00EENBCG (03050DRY: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec Integrated Line Processing Unit
L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).............................................................................................................................................................. 429
3.5.8.14 CR8D00EENBCG (03050DRY-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec Integrated Line Processing
Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).....................................................................................................................................................436
3.5.8.15 CR8D00EENBD7 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 443
3.5.8.16 CR8D00EENBD9 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-
CM))............................................................................................................................................................................................... 451
3.5.8.17 CR8D00LRXFC6 (03050DMG: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))...................................................................................................................................... 459
3.5.8.18 CR8D00LRXFC6 (03050DMG-001: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v


3.5.8.21 CR8D00LRXFC8 (03050DMJ: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))....................................................................................................................................... 484
3.5.8.22 CR8D00LRXFC8 (03050DMJ-001: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))............................................................................................................................... 490
Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))...............................................................................................................................496
Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))...............................................................................................................................502
3.5.8.25 CR8D00LRXFCP (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................509
3.5.8.26 CR8D00LRXFCQ (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))...................................................................................................................................................................... 516
3.5.8.27 CR8D00LRXFCT (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................522
3.5.8.28 CR8D00LRXFCV (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))...................................................................................................................................................................... 529
3.5.8.29 CR8D00LRXFD6 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................535
3.5.8.30 CR8D00LRXFD8 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 542
3.5.8.31 CR8DEANCJXCB (03050HGV: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/
GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))..................................................................................... 549
3.5.8.32 CR8DEANCJXCB (03050HGV-001: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP
+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))............................................................................... 559
3.5.8.33 CR8DEANCJXCC (03050HTA: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/
GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)).............................................................................. 569
3.5.8.34 CR8DEANCJXCC (03050HTA-001: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP
+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))........................................................................ 579
3.5.8.35 CR8DEANCJXDB (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)).......................................................................................................589
3.5.8.36 CR8DEANCJXDC (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))............................................................................................... 599
3.5.8.37 CR8DEANEJYD1 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))...................................................................................................609
3.5.8.38 CR8DEANEJYD9 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))...................................................................................................619
3.5.8.39 CR8DEENBFED1 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 629
3.5.8.40 CR8DEENBFED9 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 637
3.5.8.41 CR8DERYBFED1 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))................................................................................................................................................................. 645
3.5.8.42 CR8DERYBFED9 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))................................................................................................................................................................. 650
3.5.9 LPUI-4T............................................................................................................................................................................... 657
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

3.5.9.1 CR8D00EKNBC1 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM))

......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 657
3.5.9.2 CR8D00EKNBC2 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 666
3.5.9.3 CR8D00EKNBC6 (03050DFJ: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-4T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................675
3.5.9.4 CR8D00EKNBC6 (03050DFJ-001: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-4T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................684
CM(LPUI-4T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................693
CM(LPUI-4T-CM))......................................................................................................................................................................702
3.5.9.7 CR8D00EKNBC8 (03050DFN: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 710
3.5.9.8 CR8D00EKNBC8 (03050DFN-001: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 719
CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 728
CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM)).................................................................................................................................................................. 737
3.5.9.11 CR8D00EKNBCP (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 745
3.5.9.12 CR8D00EKNBCQ (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L(LPUI-4T-L-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 754
3.5.9.13 CR8D00EKNBD6 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 763
3.5.9.14 CR8D00EKNBD8 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-
CM))............................................................................................................................................................................................... 771
3.5.9.15 CR8DE4KEFNC0 (03050HGX: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated
Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM))........................................................................................................................... 779
3.5.9.16 CR8DE4KEFNC0 (03050HGX-001: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM))..................................................................................................... 788
3.5.9.17 CR8DE4KEFND0 (4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM)).....................................................................................................................................797
Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM))................................................................................................................................ 806
Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM))................................................................................................................................ 815
3.5.9.20 CR8DE4KFBNC2 (03050JFR: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated
Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))....................................................................................................................... 824
3.5.9.21 CR8DE4KFBNC2 (03050JFR-001: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))..................................................................................................833
3.5.9.22 CR8DE4KFBND2 (4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))................................................................................................................................. 842
3.5.9.23 CR8DE8KE8NCP (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM,Enable 8*100GE by default))................................................................................ 851
3.5.9.24 CR8DE8KE8NCQ (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM,Enable 8*100GE by default))......................................................................... 860
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

3.5.9.25 CR8DE8KE8NCU (03050CMD: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default)).................................................................... 869
3.5.9.26 CR8DE8KE8NCU (03050CMD-001: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28
Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default)).............................................. 878
3.5.9.27 CR8DE8KE8NCW (03050CME: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated
Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default))............................................................. 887
3.5.9.28 CR8DE8KE8NCW (03050CME-001: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28
Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default))....................................... 896
3.5.9.29 CR8DE8KE8ND1 (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default))..........................................................................905
3.5.9.30 CR8DE8KE8ND9 (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM,Enable 16*100GE by default))..........................................................................914
3.5.9.31 CR8DEKNBFED1 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 923
3.5.9.32 CR8DEKNBFED9 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM))
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 931
3.5.10 LPUI-14.4T....................................................................................................................................................................... 939
3.5.10.1 CR8D00EJKBCP (36-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-14T4-
CM,Enable 36*100GE by default))....................................................................................................................................... 939
3.5.11 LPUI-7.2T......................................................................................................................................................................... 944
3.5.11.1 CR8D0E18KBCP (18-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-7T2-
CM,Enable 18*100GE by default))....................................................................................................................................... 944
3.5.12 P1T..................................................................................................................................................................................... 950
3.5.12.1 CR8D0E5NBCCP (5-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible Card CM(P1T-CM))................950
3.5.12.2 CR8D0E5NBCDP (5-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible Card E CM(P1T-E-CM))....... 958
3.5.12.3 CR8D0LJXXCCP (36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+ MACsec Flexible Card CM(P1T-CM))............. 966
3.5.12.4 CR8D0LJXXCDP (36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+ MACsec Flexible Card E CM(P1T-E-CM)).....972
3.5.13 P2T..................................................................................................................................................................................... 979
3.5.13.1 CR8DE2KE2NCP (2-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD FlexE + 2-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Flexible Card
CM(P2T-CM)).............................................................................................................................................................................. 979
3.5.13.2 CR8DEANBFECP (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible Card CM(P2T-CM))............. 987
3.6 Optical.................................................................................................................................................................................... 995
3.6.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules........................................................................................................... 995
3.6.1.1 Appearance and structure........................................................................................................................................ 995
3.6.1.2 Types of Optical Modules......................................................................................................................................... 995
3.6.1.3 Instruction...................................................................................................................................................................... 997
3.6.1.4 Instructions on How to Use an Optical Module.............................................................................................1002
3.6.1.5 Configuring an Optical Attenuator..................................................................................................................... 1013
3.6.2 Optical Amplifier........................................................................................................................................................... 1014
3.6.3 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...................................................................................................................... 1016
3.6.3.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial.......................................................... 1016
3.6.3.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial.......................................................... 1017
3.6.4 1Gbps Electrical Module............................................................................................................................................ 1018
3.6.4.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry..................................................................................................................................... 1019
3.6.5 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 1019
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

3.6.5.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended............................................................................................... 1019

3.6.5.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360)..................................................................1021
3.6.5.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial.......................................................................................... 1022
3.6.5.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4017310).................................................................. 1024
3.6.6 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module...................................................................................................................... 1026
3.6.6.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-commercial(34060470)................................. 1026
3.6.6.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial........................................................ 1027
3.6.6.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial................................................1034
3.6.6.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial................................................1035
3.6.6.10 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-80km-commercial......................................................1038
3.6.7 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................ 1039
3.6.8 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module..................................................................................................1050
3.6.8.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 1050
3.6.8.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial..................................................................1061
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

3.6.9 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module...................................................................................................................................1100
3.6.9.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVT).................................................................... 1100
3.6.9.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVU).................................................................... 1101
3.6.9.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (S4017405)..................................................................... 1103
3.6.9.5 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................................................. 1105
3.6.10 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module............................................................................................... 1109
3.6.10.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial.......................................................... 1109
3.6.10.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial.......................................................... 1111
3.6.11 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................. 1112
3.6.11.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial........................................................................................... 1112
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x


3.6.12 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module.......................................................................................................................1122
3.6.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.........................................................1123
3.6.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial.........................................................1124
3.6.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry................................................................ 1125
3.6.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry................................................................ 1127
3.6.13 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module...................................................................................................................... 1128
3.6.13.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial........................................................................ 1128
3.6.14 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................ 1129
3.6.15 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module.............................................................................................................................. 1132
3.6.15.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial........................................................................................ 1133
3.6.15.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry................................................................................................1134
3.6.15.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended............................................................................................. 1135
3.6.15.4 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry...............................................................................................1137
3.6.15.5 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial........................................................................................ 1138
3.6.16 25Gbps SFP28 BIDI Optical Module.................................................................................................................... 1139
3.6.16.1 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial...................................................... 1139
3.6.16.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial...................................................... 1141
3.6.17 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module............................................................................................................................. 1142
3.6.17.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial........................................................... 1142
3.6.17.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial....................................................................... 1144
3.6.17.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial........................................................................1145
3.6.18 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module.......................................................................................................................... 1146
3.6.18.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial..................................................................................... 1147
3.6.18.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial..................................................................................... 1148
3.6.18.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial............................................................. 1150
3.6.19 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module................................................................................................................. 1151
3.6.19.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial................................................... 1151
3.6.20 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module........................................................................................................................ 1158
3.6.20.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial.................................................................. 1158
3.6.20.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial......................................................... 1160
3.6.20.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial........................ 1161
3.6.20.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02312BSS).................. 1163
3.6.20.5 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-commercial...........................................1165
3.6.20.6 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-commercial...........................................1166
3.6.20.7 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02313SWA)................ 1168
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

3.6.20.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................. 1170

3.6.21 200Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module..................................................................................................................... 1171
3.6.21.1 200Gbps(2*100Gb/s NRZ)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial..............................................1171
3.6.22 400Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module..................................................................................................................... 1173
3.6.22.1 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................. 1173
3.6.22.3 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial (02313GRH)..................................................... 1177
3.6.22.4 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial............................................................... 1179
3.6.22.6 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial.............................................1183
3.6.22.7 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial (02313LHH)......................................................1185
3.6.22.8 400Gbps(4*100)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial....................................................................1187
3.6.22.10 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/
s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF...................................................................................................................................... 1191
3.6.22.11 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/s,0dBm,
4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF)................................................................................................................................ 1193
3.7 DPD125-12-24 DC Power Distribution Box.............................................................................................................1196
3.7.1 DPD125-12-24 Product Description....................................................................................................................... 1196
3.8 Cables................................................................................................................................................................................... 1200
3.8.1 AC&240 V/380 V High-Voltage DC Power Cables............................................................................................. 1201
3.8.2 DC Power Cables........................................................................................................................................................... 1210
3.8.3 Console Port Cable....................................................................................................................................................... 1212
3.8.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................. 1212
3.8.3.2 Structure....................................................................................................................................................................... 1212
3.8.3.3 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1214
3.8.4 Clock Cable..................................................................................................................................................................... 1214
3.8.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................. 1214
3.8.4.2 Structure....................................................................................................................................................................... 1215
3.8.5 Ethernet Cable............................................................................................................................................................... 1217
3.8.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................. 1217
3.8.5.2 Structure....................................................................................................................................................................... 1218
3.8.6 Serial Cable (RS232/RS485)...................................................................................................................................... 1220
3.8.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................... 1220
3.8.6.2 Structure....................................................................................................................................................................... 1221
3.8.7 USB-to-Ethernet serial Cable.................................................................................................................................... 1222
3.8.8 Clock Transfer Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 1224
3.8.9 Fiber Jumpers................................................................................................................................................................. 1225
3.8.10 Ground Cable............................................................................................................................................................... 1236
3.9 Fiber Breakout................................................................................................................................................................... 1238
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

3.9.1 Breakout Fibers..............................................................................................................................................................1242

3.9.2 Breakout Boxes.............................................................................................................................................................. 1242
3.9.2.1 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)......................................................................... 1247
3.10 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1250
3.10.1 APD32-12-24 (APD32-12-24 AC Power Distribution Unit)......................................................................... 1250
3.10.2 APD32-4-24 (APD32-4-24 AC Power Distribution Unit).............................................................................. 1253
3.10.5 CR8MP2K3PHC0 (Three-phase AC Power Distribution Unit)..................................................................... 1262
3.10.6 CR8MP2KHDCC0 (380VDC HVDC and 220V AC Power Distribution Unit)........................................... 1264
4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement......................................................... 1268

4.1 About This Document.....................................................................................................................................................1268
4.2 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions...................................................................................................... 1271
4.3 Cabinet Installation......................................................................................................................................................... 1273
4.3.1 A610 Cabinet Installation Guide............................................................................................................................. 1273
4.3.1.1 Introduction to the A610-22 Cabinet................................................................................................................. 1273
4.3.1.2 Cabinet Accessories.................................................................................................................................................. 1280
4.3.1.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand................................................................................................................................... 1280
4.3.1.3 Cabinet Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 1282
4.3.1.3.1 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor................................................................................................................ 1282
4.3.1.3.2 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor......................................................................................................... 1303
4.3.1.4 Installing a PDU into a Cabinet............................................................................................................................1322
4.3.1.5 Connecting PGND Cables....................................................................................................................................... 1324
4.3.2 A612 Cabinet Installation Guide............................................................................................................................. 1325
4.3.2.1 Introduction to the A612-22 Cabinet................................................................................................................. 1325
4.3.2.2 Cabinet Accessories.................................................................................................................................................. 1330
4.3.2.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand................................................................................................................................... 1330
4.3.2.3 Cabinet Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 1332
4.3.2.3.1 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor......................................................................................................... 1332
4.3.2.3.2 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor................................................................................................................ 1350
4.3.2.4 Installing a PDU into a Cabinet............................................................................................................................1370
4.3.2.5 Connecting Ground Cables.................................................................................................................................... 1371
4.4 Preparing for the Installation.......................................................................................................................................1372
4.4.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions............................................................................................................ 1372
4.4.2 Checking the Installation Site...................................................................................................................................1374
4.4.3 Checking the Cabinet or Rack.................................................................................................................................. 1376
4.4.4 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories...................................................................................................... 1380
4.4.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link............................................................................................................................ 1389
4.4.6 Checking the Power Distribution System............................................................................................................. 1391
4.4.6.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System.............................................................................................. 1391
4.4.6.2 NetEngine 8000 X4................................................................................................................................................... 1395
4.4.6.2.1 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (AC)...................................................................................... 1395
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

4.4.6.2.2 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (DC)...................................................................................... 1396

4.4.6.2.3 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (High-Voltage DC)...........................................................1398
4.4.6.2.4 Connecting a X4 device to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU (PDU2000-32-3PH-1)................1399
4.4.6.2.5 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC PDU (CR8MP2KHDCC0)........ 1401
4.4.6.3 NetEngine 8000 X8................................................................................................................................................... 1403
4.4.6.3.1 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (AC)...................................................................................... 1403
4.4.6.3.2 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (DC)...................................................................................... 1405
4.4.6.3.3 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (High-Voltage DC)...........................................................1406
4.4.6.3.4 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU (CR8MP2K3PHC0).................. 1407
4.4.6.3.5 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC PDU (CR8MP2KHDCC0)........ 1410
4.4.6.4 NetEngine 8000 X16.................................................................................................................................................1412
4.4.6.4.1 Connecting the NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (AC)................................................................ 1412
4.4.6.4.2 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (DC).................................................................... 1414
4.4.6.4.3 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (HVDC).............................................................. 1416
4.4.6.4.4 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU (CR8MP2K3PHC0) 1419
4.4.6.4.5 Connecting the NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC PDU
(CR8MP2KHDCC0).................................................................................................................................................................. 1421
4.4.7 Unpacking a Device..................................................................................................................................................... 1424
4.4.7.1 Unpacking a Carton................................................................................................................................................. 1424
4.4.7.2 Unpacking a Card......................................................................................................................................................1431
4.5 Chassis Installation.......................................................................................................................................................... 1433
4.5.1 (Optional) Adjusting Mounting Brackets............................................................................................................. 1433
4.5.2 Installing the X4 device.............................................................................................................................................. 1434
4.5.3 Installing the X8 device.............................................................................................................................................. 1440
4.5.4 Installing the NetEngine 8000 X16......................................................................................................................... 1445
4.6 Other Modules Installation...........................................................................................................................................1451
4.6.1 Installing Filler Panels in a Cabinet or Rack........................................................................................................ 1451
4.6.2 Installing Cable Management Frames.................................................................................................................. 1452
4.6.3 Installing a Power Module Enclosure.................................................................................................................... 1454
4.6.4 Installing a Tray............................................................................................................................................................. 1455
4.6.5 Installing a Tool Box for Storing SFU Wrenches................................................................................................ 1456
4.6.6 Installing SFUs............................................................................................................................................................... 1457
4.6.7 Installing Fan Modules............................................................................................................................................... 1462
4.6.8 Installing Power Modules.......................................................................................................................................... 1463
4.6.9 Installing MPUs and LPUs......................................................................................................................................... 1464
4.6.10 Installing an Optical Module..................................................................................................................................1467
4.6.11 (Optional) Installing a Chassis Door................................................................................................................... 1468
4.6.12 (Optional) Installing a Noise Reduction Module............................................................................................ 1470
4.7 Installing DPD125-12-24 DC Power Distribution Box......................................................................................... 1471
4.7.1 Installing the DPD125-12-24.................................................................................................................................... 1471
4.8 Line planning..................................................................................................................................................................... 1475
4.8.1 AC & High-Voltage DC Power Cable Routing Planning of the X4 device................................................. 1475
4.8.2 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a X4 device............................................................................................ 1480
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

4.8.3 AC & High-Voltage DC Power Cable Routing Planning of the X8 device................................................. 1482
4.8.4 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a X8 device............................................................................................ 1488
4.8.5 AC & High-Voltage DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a NetEngine 8000 X16................................1490
4.8.6 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a NetEngine 8000 X16...................................................................... 1494
4.8.7 Signal Cable Routing Planning................................................................................................................................ 1497
4.9 Connect a Device..............................................................................................................................................................1498
4.9.1 Connecting Power Input Cables of a 380 V Three-Phase AC PDU.............................................................. 1498
4.9.2 Connecting Power Input Cables of a 240 V/380 V High-Voltage DC PDU............................................... 1500
4.9.3 Connecting the Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................. 1502
4.9.4 Connecting High-Voltage DC Power Cables........................................................................................................ 1505
4.9.5 Connecting DC Power Cables................................................................................................................................... 1508
4.9.6 Connecting AC Power Cables................................................................................................................................... 1510
4.9.7 Connecting Signal Cables.......................................................................................................................................... 1515
4.10 Post-Installation Check................................................................................................................................................ 1520
4.11 (Optional) Checking Optical Power........................................................................................................................ 1522
4.12 Powering on Devices.................................................................................................................................................... 1524
4.12.1 Checking the Installation......................................................................................................................................... 1524
4.12.1.1 Device Installation Checklist............................................................................................................................... 1524
4.12.1.2 Cable Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................. 1527
4.12.2 Powering on a Device............................................................................................................................................... 1530
4.12.3 Checking After Powering on a Device.................................................................................................................1530
4.12.4 Powering off a Device...............................................................................................................................................1530
4.13 Maintaining a Device................................................................................................................................................... 1530
4.13.1 Replacing a Power Module..................................................................................................................................... 1530
4.13.2 Replacing a Fan Module.......................................................................................................................................... 1532
4.13.3 Replacing an Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 1534
4.13.4 Replacing an LPU....................................................................................................................................................... 1537
4.13.5 Replacing the Only MPU on a Device (Services Have Been Interrupted).............................................. 1540
4.13.6 Replacing the Only MPU on a Device (Services Are Not Interrupted).................................................... 1542
4.13.7 Replacing One of MPUs on a Device.................................................................................................................. 1544
4.13.8 Replacing an SFU....................................................................................................................................................... 1546
4.13.9 Replacing and Clearing Air Filters........................................................................................................................ 1549
4.14 Appendix A Indicators.................................................................................................................................................. 1551
4.15 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation.......................................................................................1555
4.15.1 Cable Assembly Precautions................................................................................................................................... 1555
4.15.2 Assembling Power Cables....................................................................................................................................... 1556
4.15.2.1 Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable............................................................................................1556
4.15.2.2 Assembling the JG2 Terminal and Power Cable.......................................................................................... 1560
4.15.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables................................................................................................................................... 1562
4.15.3.1 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable...............................................................1562
4.15.3.2 Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable........................................................... 1568
4.15.3.3 Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips.................................................................................................. 1571
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

4.15.3.4 Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables............................................................................................... 1573

4.15.4 Installing Cable Accessories.................................................................................................................................... 1577
4.15.4.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories................................................................................................. 1577
4.15.4.2 Installing Power Adapters.................................................................................................................................... 1578
4.15.4.2.1 Installing the OT Terminal................................................................................................................................1578
4.15.4.3 Installing Ethernet Adapters............................................................................................................................... 1581
4.15.4.3.1 Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector................................................................................................... 1581
4.15.4.3.2 Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector............................................................................................1583
4.15.4.4 Installing Fiber Connectors.................................................................................................................................. 1585
4.15.4.4.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors............................................................................................................................... 1585
4.15.4.4.2 Installing an FC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................................1585
4.15.4.4.3 Installing an LC Fiber Connector.................................................................................................................... 1587
4.15.4.4.4 Installing the SC Fiber Connector.................................................................................................................. 1589
4.15.4.4.5 Installing an MPO Connector.......................................................................................................................... 1590
4.15.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool......................................................................................................... 1592
4.16 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation.................................................................. 1595
4.16.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room................................................................................ 1595
4.16.1.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room.................................................................... 1595
4.16.1.2 Equipment Room Layout..................................................................................................................................... 1597
4.16.1.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room...............................................................................1597
4.16.1.4 Equipment Room Environment.......................................................................................................................... 1599
4.16.1.5 Requirements for Corrosive Gases.................................................................................................................... 1600
4.16.1.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention..................................................................................................................... 1601
4.16.1.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room.................................................................... 1601
4.16.1.8 Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding.............................................................................................. 1601
4.16.2 Requirements for Power Supply............................................................................................................................ 1603
4.16.2.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply................................................................................................................. 1603
4.16.2.2 Recommendations for AC Power Supply........................................................................................................ 1604
4.16.2.3 Requirements for DC Power Supply................................................................................................................. 1605
4.16.2.4 Recommendations for DC Power Supply........................................................................................................1606
4.17 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications............................................................................................. 1606
4.17.1 General Grounding Specifications........................................................................................................................ 1606
4.17.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room........................................................................................ 1607
4.17.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices.................................................................................................................. 1607
4.17.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply................................................................... 1608
4.17.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables...................................................................................................... 1609
4.17.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables.............................................................................................1609
4.18 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables............................................................................................................1610
4.18.1 Introduction to Labels.............................................................................................................................................. 1610
4.18.1.1 Label Materials........................................................................................................................................................ 1610
4.18.1.2 Type and Structure................................................................................................................................................. 1610
4.18.1.3 Label Printing........................................................................................................................................................... 1612
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

4.18.1.4 Writing Labels.......................................................................................................................................................... 1614

4.18.1.5 Attaching Labels......................................................................................................................................................1615
4.18.1.6 Contents of Engineering Labels......................................................................................................................... 1617
4.18.1.7 Precautions for Using Engineering Labels......................................................................................................1618
4.18.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers................................................................................................................. 1618
4.18.2.1 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices....................................................................................... 1618
4.18.2.2 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF........................................................ 1619
4.18.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables............................................................................................................. 1621
4.18.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables..................................................................................................................... 1623
4.18.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables.................................................................................................................. 1624
4.18.5.1 Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables....................................................................................................... 1624
4.18.5.2 Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables........................................................................................................1625
4.19 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules.......................................................................................................1627
4.20 Appendix G Fault Tag................................................................................................................................................... 1630
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration
1 Document Declaration
Purpose
This document describes hardware features of the NetEngine 8000 X. It helps
intended readers obtain detailed information about each chassis, board, and cable,
and learn how to install and maintain devices.
NOTICE
The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.
Related Version
NOTICE
The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.
Product Name Version
HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 X Applicable to:

Series ● V800R012C10SPC300
● V800R013C00SPC100
● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
● V800R023C00SPC500
Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Network planning engineers

● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers
Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Supplements the important information in the main

text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.

Change History
● Changes in Issue 06 (2023-10-31)
This is the sixth official release.
This is the fifth official release.
This is the fourth official release.
This is the third official release.
This is the second official release.
This is the first official release.

Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool
2 Using the Hardware Tool
Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.

Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description
3 Hardware Description
3.1 Chassis
3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 X4
Overview
Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 X4

Description Part Number Model First supported
version
NetEngine 8000 02353CVY CR8PBKP04AC0 V800R012C00

X4 Integrated
Chassis AC&HVDC
Components
NetEngine 8000 02353CVY-001 CR8PBKP04AC0 V800R023C00SPC

X4 Integrated 500
Chassis AC&HVDC
Components
NetEngine 8000 02353CWA CR8PBKP04DC0 V800R012C00

X4 Integrated
Chassis DC
Components
NetEngine 8000 02353CWA-001 CR8PBKP04DC0 V800R023C00SPC

X4 Integrated 500
Chassis DC
Components


version
NetEngine 8800 02355WGA CR8P8BP04AC2 V800R023C10

X4 Integrated
Chassis AC&HVDC
Components
Appearance
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X4 1

NOTE
● The DC chassis and AC & high-voltage DC chassis have similar appearances and
structures except that they use DC and AC & high-voltage DC power modules (PMs) and
power entry modules (PEMs) respectively. The following figures show the appearance of
an AC & high-voltage DC chassis.
● Figures in the document are for reference only, and the actual appearance of the devices
may vary depending on the exact device model.

Components
Figure 3-3 Components of the NetEngine 8000 X4
1. Chassis 2. Front ESD 3. PM 4. Power 5. PM

header jack switch enclosure
6. MPU 7. LPU slot 8. Cable 9. Tray 10. PEM

management
frame
11.Fan 12. Two 13. Fan 14. Assembly 15. Serial

module and ground points module chassis bar number label
SFU position for a two- . code
diagram hole OT
terminal
There is a
yellow
grounding
label attached
16. MAC 17. Rear ESD - - -

address label jack

NOTE
The chassis header shows the following information:

● Product series name: NetEngine 8000 X
● Huawei Logo
● Indicators: For details, see the indicator description table.
The indicator plate on the chassis header includes indicators and a manufacturing
information loading interface. The manufacturing information loading interface is
disabled before delivery and cannot be used.
Slot Layout
Figure 3-4 Slot Layout of the NetEngine 8000 X4
Table 3-2 Slots on the NetEngine 8000 X4
Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks
LPU 1-4 The top of the Different types of

board faces LPUs can be
upwards installed in the
same chassis.
MPU 5-6 The top of the Two MPUs work

board faces in active/standby
upwards mode for 1:1 hot
standby.
By default, the
MPU with a
smaller slot ID is
the active MPU,
and the MPU with
a larger slot ID is
the standby MPU.

SFU 1-8 The right side of SFUs can be

the board faces installed in these
upwards slots.
NOTE
An SFU can be
installed in slots 1
to 8. SFU9 cannot
be used, and its
filler panel cannot
be removed.
PM 1-6 The indicator light PMs are plug-

end upwards and-play (PnP).
FAN 1-3 The indicator light At the normal

end upwards temperature
range, the system
can operate
properly for a
short time after a
single fan module
fails. You are
advised to replace
the faulty fan
module
immediately.
Panel
Table 3-3 Indicators on the NetEngine 8000 X4

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description
PWR PM status Green Steady on All PMs are

indicator working
properly.

Red Steady on The possible

causes are as
follows:
● One or
more PMs
are not
working
properly.
For
example, a
PM is
present
but does
not have
output
power.
● One or
more PMs
are
powered
off.
MPU MPU status Green Steady on All installed

indicator MPUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
- At least one
MPU has
failed.
LPU LPU status Green Steady on All installed

indicator LPUs are
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
LPU is not
working
properly.
● No LPU is
properly
installed.
SFU SFU status Green Steady on All installed

indicator SFUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
SFU is not
working
properly.
● No SFU is
properly
installed.
FAN Fan module Green Steady on All fan

status modules are
indicator installed and
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
working
properly.
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
properly
installed or
have been
removed.
Table 3-4 Buttons on the NetEngine 8000 X4

Silkscreen Name Description
SWITCH 1/SWITCH 2 Power switch Controls device power-on

and power-off.
NOTE
The device is powered off
only when switch1 and
switch2 are both OFF. The
device is powered on as
long as either switch is
ON.

Technical Specifications
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP04AC0 (02353CVY)

Item Specification
Cabinet installation standards ● The chassis can be installed in a 19-

inch standard cabinet with a depth
of at least 1000 mm. A 1200 mm
deep cabinet is recommended.
● By default, the chassis is installed in
a Huawei A612 cabinet with a
depth of 1200 mm and a height of
2200 mm. The part number of the
cabinet is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
● Huawei A610 cabinet with a depth
of 1000 mm and a height of 2200
mm can be used. The front door is
a convex door. The part number of
the cabinet is 02116078
(CR8B0A610E60).
● Huawei cabinets are recommended.
If a third-party cabinet is used, the
front door of the cabinet must be
equipped with an air filter, and the
rear door must not be equipped
with an air filter (if any, remove the
air filter).
● Note: If the AC&HVDC cabinet and
PDU need to be installed in the
same cabinet, install the PDU
horizontally. Otherwise, device
maintenance will be affected.
Dimensions without packaging (H x W ● 438 mm x 442 mm x 874 mm

x D) [mm(in.)] (17.24 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.40 in.)
(dimensions of the chassis body)
● 438 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(17.24 in. x 19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)
(including the chassis front and rear
decorating parts and cable tray)
Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 730 mm x 770 mm x 1150 mm(28.74

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)
Chassis height [U] 9.8 U
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 72 kg (158.7 lb)
Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 138 kg (304.2 lb)

Item Specification
Weight without packaging (full 4T bundle: 192.7 kg (424.8 lb)

configuration) [kg(lb)] 14.4T bundle: 210.1 kg (463.2 lb)
Typical power consumption (with 5240 W (estimated value when

configuration) [W] LPUI-4T boards are fully configured)
8860 W (LPUI-14.4T boards are fully
configured)
Typical heat dissipation (with 17324 BTU/hour

configuration) [BTU/hour]
MTBF [year] 18.71 year
MTTR [hour] 0.5 hour
Availability 0.99999
Power supply mode AC/HVDC built-in
Maximum number of power chassis (12 channels/PEM)*1 PEM=(2 channel/

inputs PM)*6 PM*1 PEM=12 channels
Rated input voltage [V] ● AC: 200 V to 240 V

● HVDC: 240 V/380 V
Input voltage range [V] ● AC: 176 V to 290 V

● HVDC: 188 V to 400V
Maximum input current [A] ● AC: 16 A per module

● HVDC: 14 A per module
Maximum input cable size [mm²] 2.5 mm²
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] AC:

● UPS power distribution: two 16 A
inputs per module, six PMs, twelve
16 A inputs in total
● Mains power distribution: two 20 A
HVDC:
Two 16 A inputs per module, six PMs,
twelve 16 A inputs in total
Heat dissipation mode air cooling
Airflow direction Front-to-back airflow
Number of slots 14
Number of service board slots 4

Item Specification
Switching capacity 41.89 Tbit/s (4T bundle)

173.15 Tbit/s (14.4T bundle)
Redundant MPUs 1:1
Redundant Switch fabrics 7+1
Redundant power supply 4+1
Redundant fans Supports redundancy backup of a

single fan.
Long-term operating temperature 0 °C to 40 °C (32°F to 104°F)

[°C(°F)]
Short-term operating temperature -5 °C to 50 °C (23°F to 122°F)

[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)

temperature variation rate [°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] -40 °C to 70 °C(–40°F to 158°F)
Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 85% RH, non-condensing

[RH]
Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

[RH]
Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the

altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
decreases by 1°C [33.8°F] each time
the altitude increases by 220 m
[721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404.199 ft.)

Table 3-6 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP04AC0 (02353CVY-001)

Item Specification

cabinet is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
(CR8B0A610E60).
air filter).

x D) [mm(in.)] (17.24 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.40 in.)
● 438 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(17.24 in. x 19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)


Item Specification

configured)



● HVDC: 240 V/380 V

● HVDC: 188 V to 400V


HVDC:
Number of slots 14

Redundant MPUs 1:1

Item Specification

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)

Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP04DC0 (02353CWA)

Item Specification

not less than 1000 mm. A 1200 mm
● By default, Huawei A612 cabinet
(2200 mm high x 1200 mm deep) is
used. The cabinet BOM number is
02116153 (CR8B22A612C0).
● Huawei A610 cabinet (2200 mm
high x 1000 mm deep) with a
convex front door can be used. The
BOM number of the cabinet is
02116078 (CR8B0A610E60).
● A Huawei cabinet is recommended.
equipped with an air filter, but the
rear door of the cabinet cannot be
equipped with any air filter. (If an
air filter is installed on the rear
door, uninstall it.)

x D) [mm(in.)] (17.24 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 438 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(17.24 in. x 19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)
Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 730 mm x 770 mm x 1150 mm (28.74

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)

Typical power consumption (with 5240 W (LPUI-4T boards are fully

configuration) [W] configured)
configured)


Item Specification
Power supply mode DC built-in
Maximum number of power chassis (12 channels/PEM)*1 PEM=(2

inputs channels/PM)*6 PM*1 PEM=12
channels
Rated input voltage [V] -48/-60 V
Input voltage range [V] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)
Maximum input current [A] 58.5 A/single-module
Maximum input cable size [mm²] 35 mm²
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 2200 W DC PMs: 2 x 63 A per module,

6 PMs, a maximum of 12 x 63 A per
chassis
3000 W DC PM: 2 x 100 A per module,
chassis
chassis
Number of slots 14

Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Item Specification

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F)

[RH]

[RH]

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)
Table 3-8 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP04DC0 (02353CWA-001)

Item Specification

02116153 (CR8B22A612C0).
02116078 (CR8B0A610E60).

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (17.24 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 438 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(17.24 in. x 19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)

Typical power consumption (with 5240 W (LPUI-4T boards are fully

configuration) [W] configured)
configured)

Maximum number of power chassis (12 channels/PEM)*1 PEM=(2

inputs channels/PM)*6 PM*1 PEM=12
channels
Rated input voltage [V] –48/–60 V

Item Specification
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 2200 W DC PMs: 2 x 63 A per module,

chassis
chassis
chassis
Airflow direction Front-to-back
Number of slots 14

Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

Item Specification

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)
Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m
Table 3-9 Technical specifications of the CR8P8BP04AC2

Item Specification

cabinet is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
(CR8B0A610E60).
air filter).

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (17.24 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.40 in.)
● 438 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(17.24 in. x 19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)


configured)



● HVDC: 240 V/380 V

● HVDC: 188 V to 400V


Item Specification

HVDC:
Number of slots 14

Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

Item Specification

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)
NOTE
● Temperature and humidity are measured at 1.5 m (4.92 ft.) above the floor and 0.4 m
(1.31 ft.) in front of the rack in scenarios where there is no protection card in the front
or rear of the rack.
● When the altitude is between 1800 m and 5000 m (5906 ft. and 16404 ft.), the highest
operating temperature reduces by 1°C (1.8°F) every time the altitude increases by 220 m
(722 ft.).
● Short-term operation means that the continuous operating period does not exceed 96
hours and the accumulative total period within a year does not exceed 15 days.
Otherwise, it is considered as long-term operation.
Overview

version
NetEngine 8000 02353CWB CR8PBKP08AC0 V800R012C00

X8 Integrated
Chassis AC&HVDC
Components
NetEngine 8000 02353CWB-001 CR8PBKP08AC0 V800R023C00SPC

X8 Integrated 500
Chassis AC&HVDC
Components
NetEngine 8000 02353CWC CR8PBKP08DC0 V800R012C00

X8 Integrated
Chassis DC
Components


version
NetEngine 8000 02353CWC-001 CR8PBKP08DC0 V800R023C00SPC

X8 Integrated 500
Chassis DC
Components
Appearance

NOTE

Components
1. Chassis 2. PM 3. PM 4. Power 5. Front ESD

header enclosure switch jack
6. MPU 7. LPU 8. Cable 9. Tray 10. PEM

management
frame

11. Fan 12. Two 13. Fan 14. SFU 15. Assembly
module and ground points module (SFUs are chassis bar
SFU position for a two- located code
diagram hole OT behind fan
terminal modules and
There is a are invisible
yellow after all fan
grounding modules are
label installed.)
attached.
16. Serial 17. MAC 18. Rear ESD - -

number label address label jack
NOTE

● Huawei Logo
Slot Layout


LPU 1-8 The top of the Different types of

board faces LPUs can be
upwards installed in the
same chassis.
MPU 9-10 The top of the Two MPUs work

board faces in active/standby
upwards mode for 1:1 hot
standby.
By default, the
MPU with a
smaller slot ID is
the active MPU,
and the MPU with
a larger slot ID is
the standby MPU.
SFU 1-8 The right side of SFUs can be

the board faces installed in these
upwards slots.
The SFU9 slot
cannot be used,
and the SFU9
filler panel cannot
be removed.
PM 1-10 The indicator light PMs are plug-

end upwards and-play (PnP).
FAN 1-3 The indicator light At the normal

end upwards temperature
range, the system
can operate
properly for a
short time after a
single fan module
fails. You are
advised to replace
the faulty fan
module
immediately.

Panel


indicator working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
● One or
more PMs
are not
working
properly.
For
example, a
PM is
present
but does
not have
output
power.
● One or
more PMs
are
powered
off.

indicator MPUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
- At least one
MPU has
failed.

indicator LPUs are
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
LPU is not
working
properly.
● No LPU is
properly
installed.

indicator SFUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
SFU is not
working
properly.
● No SFU is
properly
installed.

status modules are
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
working
properly.
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
properly
installed or
have been
removed.

SWITCH 1/SWITCH 2 Power switch Controls device power-on

and power-off.
NOTE
only when switch1 and
switch2 are both OFF. The
device is powered on as
long as either switch is
ON.

Table 3-14 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP08AC0 (02353CWB)

Item Specification

cabinet is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
(CR8B0A610E60).
air filter).

x D) [mm(in.)] (27.67 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 703 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(27.67 in. x19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)

Item Specification

configuration) [kg(lb)] 14.4T bundle: 340.5kg (750.7 lb)


Maximum number of power chassis (20 channels/PEM) x 1 PEM = (2

inputs channels/PM) x 10 PMs x 1 PEM = 20
channels
Rated input voltage [V] ● AC: 200 V to 240 V AC

● HVDC: 240 V/380 V
Input voltage range [V] ● AC: 176 V–290 V

● HVDC: 188 V–400 V


● UPS power distribution: 2x16 A per
module, 10 PMs, 20x16 A required
in total
● Mains power distribution: 2x20 A
per module, 10 PMs, 20x20 A
required in total
HVDC:
2x20 A per module, 10 PMs, 20x20 A
required in total
Number of slots 18

Item Specification
Switching capacity 83.78 Tbit/s

14.4T bundle: 346.3 Tbit/s
2T bundle: 43.3Tbit/s
1T bundle: 21.6Tbit/s
Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)

Table 3-15 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP08AC0 (02353CWB-001)

Item Specification

cabinet is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
(CR8B0A610E60).
air filter).

x D) [mm(in.)] (27.67 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 703 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(27.67 in. x19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)

configuration) [kg(lb)] 14.4T bundle: 340.5kg (750.7 lb)

Item Specification



channels
Rated input voltage [V] ● AC: 200 V to 240 V AC

● HVDC: 240 V/380 V
Input voltage range [V] ● AC: 176 V–290 V

● HVDC: 188 V–400 V


● UPS power distribution: 2x16 A per
module, 10 PMs, 20x16 A required
in total
● Mains power distribution: 2x20 A
per module, 10 PMs, 20x20 A
required in total
HVDC:
2x20 A per module, 10 PMs, 20x20 A
required in total
Number of slots 18

Redundant MPUs 1:1

Item Specification

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
[721.78 ft.].)

Table 3-16 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP08DC0 (02353CWC)
Item Specification

02116153 (CR8B22A612C0).
02116078 (CR8B0A610E60).

x D) [mm(in.)] (27.67 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 703 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(27.67 in. x19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)




Item Specification

channels
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 2200 W DC PM: 2 x 63 A per module,

chassis
chassis
chassis
Number of slots 18
Switching capacity 4T bundle: 83.78 Tbit/s

Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]
Short-term operating temperature –5°C to +50°C (23°F to 122°F)

[°C(°F)]


Item Specification

[RH]

[RH]
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.36 ft.) (From 1800 m

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
ft.], the operating temperature of the
device decreases by 1°C [1.8°F] for
every 220 m [721.78 ft.] increase in
altitude.)
Table 3-17 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP08DC0 (02353CWC-001)

Item Specification

02116153 (CR8B22A612C0).
02116078 (CR8B0A610E60).

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (27.67 in. x 17.40 in. x 34.41 in.)
● 703 mm x 483 mm x 985 mm
(27.67 in. x19.02 in. x 38.78 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 30.31 in. x 45.28 in.)




channels

Item Specification

chassis
chassis
chassis
Number of slots 18
Switching capacity 4T bundle: 83.78 Tbit/s

Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
altitude.)

Item Specification
NOTE
(722 ft.).
● The short-term operating conditions mean that the continuous operating period does
not exceed 96 hours and the accumulative total period within a year does not exceed 15
days. Otherwise, it is considered as long-term operation.
Overview
Description Part Number Model First Remarks

supported
version
NetEngine 02354MDD CR8PBKP16AC V800R021C10 Specific

8000 X16 0 SPC600 supported
Integrated versions:
Chassis V800R021C00
AC&HVDC SPC200
Components
NetEngine 02354MDD-0 CR8PBKP16AC V800R023C00 Specific

8000 X16 01 0 SPC500 supported
Chassis V800R021C00
AC&HVDC SPC200
Components
NetEngine 02354MDE CR8PBKP16D V800R021C10 Specific

8000 X16 C0 SPC600 supported
Chassis DC V800R021C00
Components SPC200
NetEngine 02354MDE-00 CR8PBKP16D V800R023C00 Specific

8000 X16 1 C0 SPC500 supported
Chassis DC V800R021C00
Components SPC200


Appearance



NOTE
Components

1. Power 2. Front ESD 3. MPU 4. LPU 5. Cable

switch jack management
frame
6. PEM 7. Fan module 8. SFU 9. Fan module 10. Two

(SFUs are and SFU ground points
located position for a two-
behind fan diagram hole OT
modules and terminal
are invisible There is a
after all fan yellow
modules are grounding
installed.) label
attached.
11. Assembly 12. Serial 13. MAC 14. Rear ESD 15. -
chassis bar number label address label jack
code
NOTE

● Huawei Logo

Slot Layout

LPU slot 1-16 The top of the Different types of

card faces LPUs can be
upwards. installed in the
same chassis.

MPU slot 17-18 The top of the There are two

card faces slots for the active
upwards. and standby
cards. They work
in 1:1 hot backup
mode.
By default, the
MPU with a
smaller slot ID is
the active MPU,
and the MPU with
a larger slot ID is
the standby MPU.
SFU slot 1-8 The right side of SFUs can be

the card faces installed in these
upwards. slots.
Currently, only
SFU slots 1 to 8
are available, and
the filler panel in
slot 9 cannot be
removed.
PM slot 1-20 The indicator end PMs are plug-

faces upward. and-play.
Fan module slot 1-3 The indicator end At the normal

faces upward. temperature
range, the system
can operate
properly for a
short time after a
single fan module
fails. You are
advised to replace
the faulty fan
module
immediately.
Panel

indicator working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● One or
more PMs
are not
working
properly.
For
example, a
PM is
present
but does
not have
output
power.
● One or
more PMs
are
powered
off.

indicator MPUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
- At least one
MPU has
failed.

indicator LPUs are
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
LPU is not
working
properly.
● No LPU is
properly
installed.

indicator SFUs are
working
properly.

causes are as
follows:
● At least
one
installed
SFU is not
working
properly.
● No SFU is
properly
installed.

status modules are
working
properly.


causes are as
follows:
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
working
properly.
● One or
more fan
modules
are not
properly
installed or
have been
removed.

SWITCH 1/SWITCH 2 Device switch Powers on or off the

device.
NOTE
only when SWITCH 1 and
SWITCH 2 are both OFF. If
any switch is ON, the
device is powered on.

Table 3-22 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP16AC0 (02354MDD)

Item Specification

of at least 1200 mm.
a Huawei 1.2 m deep x 2.2 m high
A612 cabinet. Huawei acoustic
doors are optional. The depth of an
acoustic door is 200 mm, and the
depth of the entire system is 1400
mm after the acoustic door is
installed. Note: The cabinet part
number is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).
Dimensions without packaging (H x W ● 1436 mm (32.3U) x 442 mm x 1033

x D) [mm(in.)] mm (56.54 in. x 17.40 in. x 40.67
in.) (chassis main body)
● 1436 mm (32.3U) x 483 mm x 1144
mm (56.54 in. x 19.02 in. x 45.04
in.) (dimensions of the chassis body
together with cable trays and front
and back attachments)
Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 1695 mm x 770 mm x 1350 mm

D) [mm(in.)] (66.73 in. x 30.31 in. x 53.15 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 244.8 kg (539.69 lb)
Weight with packaging [kg(lb)] 315.6 kg (695.78 lb)
Weight without packaging (full [LPUI-4T boards are fully configured]:

configuration) [kg(lb)] 666.1 kg ( 1468.5 lb)
[LPUI-14.4T boards are fully
configured]: 707.7 kg ( 1558.9 lb)
Typical power consumption (with [estimated value when LPUI-4T boards

configuration) [W] are fully configured]: 24015 W
[estimated value when LPUI-14.4T
boards are fully configured]: 35965 W

Item Specification
Typical heat dissipation (with [estimated value when LPUI-4T boards

configuration) [BTU/hour] are fully configured]: 77913 BTU/hour
boards are fully configured]: 116684
BTU/hour
Power supply mode AC built-in

channels
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 200 V to 240 V

HVDC: 240 V/380 V
Input voltage range [V] AC: 176 V to 290 V

HVDC: 188–400V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 16 A per module

HVDC: 14 A per module
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] For AC:

UPS power distribution: two 16 A
inputs per module
Mains power distribution: two 20 A
inputs per module
AC chassis: 20 PMs, requiring 40
channels of 16 A. By default, 16 PMs
are configured for the chassis,
requiring 32 channels of 16 A.
For HVDC:
Two 16 A inputs per module
HVDC device: 20 PMs, requiring 40
are configured for the device, requiring
32 channels of 16 A.
Number of slots 26

Item Specification
Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.
Long-term operating temperature 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour


[RH]

[RH]

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
altitude.)

Table 3-23 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP16AC0 (02354MDD-001)

Item Specification

number is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).

x D) [mm(in.)] mm (56.54 in. x 17.40 in. x 40.67
● 1436 mm (32.3U) x 483 mm x 1144
mm (56.54 in. x 19.02 in. x 45.04

D) [mm(in.)] (66.73 in. x 30.31 in. x 53.15 in.)

configuration) [kg(lb)] 666.1 kg ( 1468.5 lb)
configured]: 707.7 kg ( 1558.9 lb)


Item Specification

BTU/hour
Power supply mode AC built-in

channels
Rated input voltage [V] AC: 200 V to 240 V

HVDC: 240 V/380 V
Input voltage range [V] AC: 176 V to 290 V

HVDC: 188–400V
Maximum input current [A] AC: 16 A per module

HVDC: 14 A per module
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] For AC:

UPS power distribution: two 16 A
inputs per module
Mains power distribution: two 20 A
inputs per module
AC chassis: 20 PMs, requiring 40
are configured for the chassis,
requiring 32 channels of 16 A.
For HVDC:
Two 16 A inputs per module
HVDC device: 20 PMs, requiring 40
are configured for the device, requiring
32 channels of 16 A.
Number of slots 26

Item Specification
Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
altitude.)

Table 3-24 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP16DC0 (02354MDE)

Item Specification

number is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).

x D) [mm(in.)] mm (56.54 in. x 17.40 in. x 40.67
● 1436 mm (32.3U) x 483 mm x 1144
mm (56.54 in. x 19.02 in. x 45.04

D) [mm(in.)] (66.73 in. x 30.31 in. x 53.15 in.)

configuration) [kg(lb)] 681.1kg (1501.6 lb)
configured]: 722.7 kg (1593.3 lb)

(estimated value when LPUI-4T boards
are fully configured)

BTU/hour

Item Specification

channels
Maximum input current [A] 2200 W DC PM: 58.5 A per module

3000 W DC PM: 82 A per module

chassis
chassis
chassis
Number of slots 26
Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]
Restriction on the operating ≤ 30°C/hour


[RH]

[RH]

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
altitude.)
Table 3-25 Technical specifications of the CR8PBKP16DC0 (02354MDE-001)
Item Specification

number is 02116153
(CR8B22A612C0).

x D) [mm(in.)] mm (56.54 in. x 17.40 in. x 40.67
● 1436 mm (32.3U) x 483 mm x 1144
mm (56.54 in. x 19.02 in. x 45.04

Item Specification

D) [mm(in.)] (66.73 in. x 30.31 in. x 53.15 in.)

configuration) [kg(lb)] 681.1kg (1501.6 lb)
configured]: 722.7 kg (1593.3 lb)

(estimated value when LPUI-4T boards
are fully configured)

BTU/hour

channels
Maximum input current [A] 2200 W DC PM: 58.5 A per module


Item Specification

chassis
chassis
chassis
Number of slots 26
Redundant MPUs 1:1

single fan.

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


[RH]

[RH]

to 5000 m [5905.51 ft. to 16404.20
altitude.)

Item Specification
NOTE
(722 ft.).
● The short-term operating conditions mean that the continuous operating period does
not exceed 96 hours and the accumulative total period within a year does not exceed 15
days. Otherwise, it is considered as long-term operation.
3.2 Power Supply
3.2.1 X4 device Power Supply System

Overview
The X4 device supports DC, AC, and high-voltage DC power supply modes. The
device can be connected to up to two power sources through power entry
modules (PEMs). Each power module (PM) has two power inputs, and they
convert the power supplied to the PEM to power the entire device.

NOTE
● If only one power source is available in the equipment room, connect the PEM's
terminal blocks or power sockets A1 to A6 or B1 to B6 to the power source.
● If two power sources are available in the equipment room:
● In AC or high-voltage DC powered installation scenarios, you are advised to
connect power sockets A1 to A6 to one power source, and power sockets B1 to B6
to the other power source. By default, power sockets A1 to A6 are in use, and B1 to
B6 are on standby. If A1 to A6 fail to supply power, B1 to B6 take over.
If the power sources need to work in load balancing mode, connect as follows:
● Connect power sockets A1 to A3 and B4 to B6 to one power source.
● Connect power sockets A4 to A6 and B1 to B3 to the other power source.
● In DC powered installation scenarios, connect terminal blocks A1 to A6 to one

power source, and terminal blocks B1 to B6 to the other power source. If the two
power sources have different voltages, the one with a higher voltage provides a
higher current.
● In AC and high-voltage DC powered installation scenarios, the 220 V AC power
supply is used by default. If the 220 V AC power supply fails, the system
automatically switches to the high-voltage DC power supply.
● Requirements for the power supply system of a customer's cabinet: The output power of
two power sources must be greater than the maximum input power of the device.
Components
As shown in Figure 3-13, the power supply units of the X4 device are located at
the top of the chassis. The power supply units are PMs and power switches at the
front of the chassis, and a PEM at the rear of the chassis. Table 3-26 describes the
functions of each unit.

Figure 3-13 Power supply units of the X4 device
Table 3-26 Functions of power supply units of the X4 device

No. Component Description
1 PM Converts the power supplied to a PEM, and then powers

the entire device through the power backplane and
busbar.
2 Power switch Controls the power output of PMs. The two power
switches back each other up. When one or both of them
are turned on, the power output of PMs is enabled.
NOTICE
To ensure reliability, both power switches must be turned on
when the device is running.
3 PEM Connects to a power source.

One PEM can be connected to two power sources through
its power sockets or terminal blocks. This design
implements 1+1 power supply redundancy, ensuring that
the device is not powered off if one power source in the
equipment room fails.
PM and PEM Applications

The X4 device supports multiple power supply scenarios, which vary according to
the installed PEM and PMs. Table 3-27 describes the power supply scenarios and
PEM/PM applications.
Table 3-27 Power supply scenarios and PEM/PM applications on the X4 device
Power Supply Scenario PEM PM
–48 V DC power supply X4 device DC PEM 2200 W DC PM

AC power supply X4 device AC & high- 3000 W dual-input AC &

voltage DC PEM high-voltage DC PM
240 V high-voltage DC X4 device AC & high- 3000 W dual-input AC &

power supply voltage DC PEM high-voltage DC PM

PM and PEM Application Principles

The PEM is integrated into the chassis and does not need to be configured onsite.
Do not attempt to remove or install the PEM onsite. PMs can be configured based
on the chassis's overall power consumption, providing flexible power supply.
DC PMs and AC & high-voltage DC PMs of the X4 device can work in N+1
redundancy mode, in which N indicates the number of PMs configured based on
the chassis's actual power consumption. The maximum power supply capability of
one chassis is equal to the sum of the maximum output power of N PMs installed
in the chassis. In N+1 redundancy mode, N PMs supply power to the chassis, and
one PM works as a backup.
Taking a DC PM with 2200 W output power is used as an example, if PMs are

configured according to the N+1 redundancy mechanism (that is, one PM is added
on top of the number of required PMs), the value of N x 2200 W must be greater
than the chassis's power consumption, as described in Table 3-28.
Table 3-28 DC PM application examples for the X4 device
Overall PM PEM Connections Numbe Recommen Redun

Power Connec r of ded Rated dancy
Consumpti tions Power Current for
on Inputs Each Power
Input
P < 2200 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 63 A 1+1
2200 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 6 2+1

< 4400 W B3
4400 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 8 3+1

< 6600 W 4 B3, A4, B4
6600 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 10 4+1

< 8800 W 4, 5 B3, A4, B4, A5, B5
8800 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 12 5+1

< 11000 W 4, 5, 6 B3, A4, B4, A5, B5,
A6, B6

Taking an AC & high-voltage DC PM with 3000 W output power is used as an

example, if PMs are configured according to the N+1 redundancy mechanism
(that is, one PM is added on top of the number of required PMs), the value of N x
3000 W must be greater than the chassis's power consumption, as described in
Table 3-29.
Table 3-29 AC & high-voltage DC PM application examples for the X4 device

Overall PM PEM Connections Number Recommen Redun
Power Conne of ded Rated dancy
Consumptio ctions Power Current for
n Inputs Each Power
Input
P < 3000 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 AC: 16 A/20 1+1

A
3000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 6 2+1
< 6000 W B3 HVDC: 16 A
6000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 8 3+1

< 9000 W 4 B3, A4, B4
9000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 10 4+1

< 12000 W 4, 5 B3, A4, B4, A5, B5
12000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 12 5+1

< 15000 W 4, 5, 6 B3, A4, B4, A5, B5,
A6, B6
NOTE
Retain the filler panel in any PM slots where no PM is to be installed.
Power Supply Architecture

● DC power supply
The X4 device must be equipped with one DC PEM. This PEM has 12 terminal
blocks, every six of which are connected to one power source. Each DC PM
has two power inputs, each of which comes from one power source in the
equipment room. The DC PM converts and outputs the power to the power
backplane, allowing the two power sources to back up each other. Figure
3-14 shows the DC power supply architecture of the X4 device.

Figure 3-14 DC power supply architecture of the X4 device
● AC & high-voltage DC power supply

The X4 device must be equipped with one AC & high-voltage DC PEM. This
PEM has 12 power sockets, every six of which are connected to one power
source. Each AC & high-voltage DC PM has two power inputs, each of which
comes from one power source in the equipment room. The AC & high-voltage
DC PM converts and outputs the power to the power backplane, allowing the
two power sources to back each other up.
The X4 device can be directly connected to a power source or indirectly
connected one through a power distribution unit (PDU). Directly connecting a
device to a power source uses cable connections similar to those in the DC
power supply mode, and is not described here. The following describes the
power supply architecture in the scenario where a device is indirectly
connected to a power source through a PDU.
The NetEngine 8000 X series devices supports two types of PDUs:
– AC PDU: Each AC PDU provides one power input and six power outputs.
– High-voltage DC PDU: Each high-voltage DC PDU provides two power
inputs and eight power outputs. Each input corresponds to four outputs.
AC, high-voltage DC, and AC & high-voltage DC hybrid power supplies are
supported. Figure 3-15, Figure 3-16, and Figure 3-17 show the power supply
architectures of the three modes.

Figure 3-15 AC power supply architecture of the X4 device
Figure 3-16 High-voltage DC power supply architecture of the X4 device

Figure 3-17 AC & high-voltage DC hybrid power supply architecture of the X4

device
3.2.2 X4 device AC&High-Voltage DC PEM
Overview
The X4 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM connects the X4 device to AC&high-
voltage DC power sources. The PEM is pre-installed by default, and cannot be
removed, installed, or replaced onsite.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install the PEM onsite.
Appearance
Figure 3-18 Appearance of the X4 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM

Panel
Figure 3-19 Power sockets on the X4 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM
Table 3-30 describes the location mapping between X4 device PEM power sockets
and power modules.
Table 3-30 Location mapping between PEM power sockets and power modules
PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 A4/B4 A5/B5 A6/B6
Power
Socket
Power 1 2 3 4 5 6
Modul
e
Table 3-31 Power socket description

Name Description Power Cable Terminal
Power socket 200 V AC to 240 V Dedicated high-voltage

AC/240 V DC/380 V DC DC terminal: Power
power socket Connector,3Pin,450V,
16A,Straight Female,
1.5mm^2 or 14AWG
Input Requirements
● In an AC power distribution scenario, the 220 V AC input is supported.
● 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC input is supported in high-voltage DC power
distribution scenarios.
● Protection components must be provided for power distribution frames
(PDFs). When the AC and high-voltage DC power is from an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS), ensure that the rated current on each line is not less
than 16 A. When the AC and high-voltage DC power is from the mains power
grid, ensure that the rated current on each line is not less than 20 A.

NOTICE
Note the derating requirements of protection components when using

protection components such as fuses and circuit breakers.
NOTE
The input circuit breakers of a PDF must match the output circuit breakers.
3.2.3 X4 device DC PEM
Overview
The X4 device DC PEM connects the X4 device to DC power sources. The PEM is
pre-installed by default, and cannot be removed, installed, or replaced onsite.
CAUTION
Appearance
Figure 3-20 Appearance of the X4 device DC PEM
Panel
Figure 3-21 Terminal blocks on the X4 device DC PEM
Table 3-32 describes the location mapping between X4 device PEM terminal
blocks and power modules.

Table 3-32 Location mapping between PEM terminal blocks and power modules
PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 A4/B4 A5/B5 A6/B6

Termin
al
Block
Power 1 2 3 4 5 6
Modul
e
Table 3-33 Terminal block description
NEG (-) -48 V/-60 V terminal ● Naked Crimping

block Connector,JG2,25mm^
2,M6,80A,Right
RTN (+) BGND terminal block angle_Galaxy
● Naked Crimping
Connector,JG2,35mm^
2,M6,80A,Right
angle_Galaxy
NOTICE
Do not bend OT terminals
to 90 degrees onsite.
Input Requirements
● -48 V DC input is supported in DC power distribution scenarios.
(PDFs) to ensure that the rated current on each line is not less than 80 A.
NOTICE

NOTE
3.2.4 X8 device Power Supply System

Overview
The X8 device supports DC, AC, and high-voltage DC power supply modes. The
device can be connected to up to two power sources through power entry

modules (PEMs). Each power module (PM) has two power inputs, and they
NOTE
connect power sockets A1 to A10 to one power source, and power sockets B1 to
B10 to the other power source. By default, power sockets A1 to A10 are in use, and
B1 to B10 are on standby. If A1 to A10 fail to supply power, B1 to B10 take over.

higher current.
Components
As shown in Figure 3-22, the power supply units of the X8 device are located at
the top of the chassis. The power supply units are PMs and power switches at the
front of the chassis, and a PEM at the rear of the chassis. Table 3-34 describes the
functions of each unit.

Figure 3-22 Key supply units of the X8 device
Table 3-34 Functions of power supply units of the X8 device


busbar.
NOTICE


The X8 device supports multiple power supply scenarios, which vary according to
the installed PEM and PMs. Table 3-35 describes the power supply scenarios and
PEM/PM applications.

Table 3-35 Power supply scenarios and PEM/PM applications on the X8 device
–48 V DC power supply X8 device DC PEM 2200 W DC PM
AC power supply X8 device AC & high- 3000 W dual-input AC &

voltage DC PEM high-voltage DC PM



DC PMs and AC & high-voltage DC PMs of the X8 device can work in N+1
redundancy mode, in which N indicates the number of PMs configured based on
the chassis's actual power consumption. The maximum power supply capability of
one chassis is equal to the sum of the maximum output power of N PMs installed
in the chassis. In N+1 redundancy mode, N PMs supply power to the chassis, and
one PM works as a backup.
Table 3-36 DC PM application examples for the X8 device

Overall PM PEM Number Recomme Redun
Power Connection Connections of nded dancy
Consumpti s Power Rated
on Inputs Current
for Each
Power
Input
P < 2200 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 63 A 1+1
2200 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, B2, 6 2+1

< 4400 W A3, B3
4400 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, 4 A1, B1, A2, B2, 8 3+1

< 6600 W A3, B3, A4, B4
... ... ... ... ...

Overall PM PEM Number Recomme Redun

Power Connection Connections of nded dancy
Consumpti s Power Rated
on Inputs Current
for Each
Power
Input
17600 W ≤ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, A1, B1, A2, B2, 20 9+1

P < 19800 6, 7, 8, 9, A3, B3 ... A10,
W 10 B10

Table 3-37.
Table 3-37 AC & high-voltage DC PM application examples for the X8 device

Overall PM PEM Number Recommend Redun
Power Connectio Connections of ed Rated dancy
Consumpti ns Power Current for
Input
P < 3000 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 AC: 16 A/20 1+1

A
3000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, B2, 6 2+1
< 6000 W A3, B3 HVDC: 16 A
6000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, 4 A1, B1, A2, B2, 8 3+1

< 9000 W A3, B3, A4, B4
... ... ... ... ...
24000 W ≤ 1, 2, 3, 4, A1, B1, A2, B2, 20 9+1

P < 27000 5, 6, 7, 8, A3, B3 ... A10,
W 9, 10 B10
NOTE
Retain the filler panel in any PM slots where no PM is to be installed.

● DC power supply
The X8 device must be equipped with one DC PEM. This PEM has 20 terminal
blocks, every 10 of which are connected to one power source. Each DC PM
has two power inputs, each of which comes from one power source in the
equipment room. The DC PM converts and outputs the power to the power

backplane, allowing the two power sources to back up each other. Figure
3-23 shows the DC power supply architecture of the X8 device.
Figure 3-23 DC power supply architecture of the X8 device

The X8 device must be equipped with one AC & high-voltage DC PEM. This
PEM has 20 power sockets, every 10 of which are connected to one power
source. Each AC & high-voltage DC PM has two power inputs, each of which
comes from one power source in the equipment room. The AC & high-voltage
DC PM converts and outputs the power to the power backplane, allowing the
two power sources to back each other up.
The X8 device can be directly connected to a power source or indirectly
connected one through a power distribution unit (PDU). Directly connecting a
device to a power source uses cable connections similar to those in the DC
power supply mode, and is not described here. The following describes the
power supply architecture in the scenario where a device is indirectly
connected to a power source through a PDU.
The NetEngine 8000 X series devices provide two types of PDUs:

Figure 3-24 AC power supply architecture of the X8 device

Figure 3-25 High-voltage DC power supply architecture of the X8 device

Figure 3-26 AC & high-voltage DC hybrid power supply architecture of the X8

device
3.2.5 X8 device AC&High-Voltage DC PEM

Overview
The X8 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM connects the X8 device to AC&high-
voltage DC power sources. The PEM is pre-installed by default, and cannot be
removed, installed, or replaced onsite.
CAUTION

Appearance
Figure 3-27 Appearance of the X8 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM
Panel
Figure 3-28 Power sockets on the X8 device AC&high-voltage DC PEM
Table 3-38 describes the location mapping between X8 device PEM power sockets
and power modules.
PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 ... A9/B9 A10/B1

Power 0
Socket
Power 1 2 3 ... 9 10
Modul
e
Power socket 200 V AC to 240 V Dedicated high-voltage

AC/240 V DC/380 V DC DC terminal: Power
power socket Connector,3Pin,450V,
16A,Straight Female,
1.5mm^2 or 14AWG

Input Requirements
NOTICE

NOTE
3.2.6 X8 device DC PEM

Overview
The X8 device DC PEM connects the X8 device to DC power sources. The PEM is
pre-installed by default, and cannot be removed, installed, or replaced onsite.
CAUTION
Appearance
Figure 3-29 Appearance of the X8 device DC PEM

Panel
Figure 3-30 Terminal blocks on the X8 device DC PEM
Table 3-40 describes the location mapping between X8 device PEM terminal
blocks and power modules.
PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 ... A9/B9 A10/B1
Termin 0
al
Block
Power 1 2 3 ... 9 10
Modul
e


2,M6,80A,Right
● Naked Crimping
Connector,JG2,35mm^
2,M6,80A,Right
angle_Galaxy
NOTICE
Do not bend OT
terminals to 90 degrees
onsite.

Input Requirements
● -48 V DC input is supported in DC power distribution scenarios.
(PDFs) to ensure that the rated current on each line is not less than 80 A.
NOTICE

NOTE
3.2.7 NetEngine 8000 X16 Power Supply System

Overview
The NetEngine 8000 X16 supports DC, AC, and high-voltage DC power supply
modes. The device can be connected to up to two power sources through power
entry modules (PEMs). Each power module (PM) has two power inputs, and they

NOTE
connect power sockets A1 to A20 to one power source, and power sockets B1 to
B20 to the other power source. By default, power sockets A1 to A20 are in use, and
B1 to B20 are on standby. If A1 to A20 fail to supply power, B1 to B20 take over.

higher current.
Components
As shown in Figure 3-31, the power supply units of the NetEngine 8000 X16 are
located at the top of the chassis. The power supply units are PMs and power
switches at the front of the chassis, and a PEM at the rear of the chassis. Table
3-42 describes the functions of each unit.

Figure 3-31 Power supply units of the NetEngine 8000 X16
Table 3-42 Functions of power supply units of the NetEngine 8000 X16

busbar.
NOTICE


The NetEngine 8000 X16 supports multiple power supply scenarios, which vary
according to the installed PEM and PMs. Table 3-43 describes the power supply
scenarios and PEM/PM applications.
Table 3-43 Power supply scenarios and PEM/PM applications on the NetEngine
8000 X16
–48 V DC power supply NetEngine 8000 X16 DC 2200 W DC power

PEM module
AC power supply NetEngine 8000 X16 3000 W dual-input

AC&high-voltage DC AC&high-voltage DC
PEM power module

240 V high-voltage DC NetEngine 8000 X16 3000 W dual-input

power supply AC&high-voltage DC AC&high-voltage DC
PEM power module
380 V high-voltage DC NetEngine 8000 X16 3000 W dual-input

power supply AC&high-voltage DC AC&high-voltage DC
PEM power module

DC PMs and AC & high-voltage DC PMs of the NetEngine 8000 X16 can work in N
+1 redundancy mode, in which N indicates the number of PMs configured based
on the chassis's actual power consumption. The maximum power supply capability
of one chassis is equal to the sum of the maximum output power of N PMs
installed in the chassis. In N+1 redundancy mode, N PMs supply power to the
chassis, and one PM works as a backup.
Table 3-44 DC PM application examples for the NetEngine 8000 X16

Overall PM PEM Numb Recommend Redundan
Power Connection Connections er of ed Rated cy
Consumpti s Power Current for
Input
P < 2200 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 63 A 1+1
2200 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, 6 2+1

< 4400 W B2, A3, B3
4400 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, 4 A1, B1, A2, 8 3+1

< 6600 W B2, A3, B3,
A4, B4
... ... ... ... ...
39600 W ≤ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, A1, B1, A2, 40 19+1

P < 41800 6, 7, 8, 9, B2, A3, B3 ...
W 10, 11, 12, A20, B20
13, 14, 15,
16, 17, 18,
19, 20


Table 3-45.
Table 3-45 AC & high-voltage DC PM application examples for the NetEngine

8000 X16
Overall PM PEM Connections Num Recomme Redund
Power Connection ber nded ancy
Consumpti s of Rated
on Powe Current
r for Each
Input Power
s Input
P < 3000 W 1, 2 A1, B1, A2, B2 4 AC: 16 1+1

A/20 A
3000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3 A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 6 2+1
HVDC: 16
< 6000 W B3
A
6000 W ≤ P 1, 2, 3, 4 A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 8 3+1
< 9000 W B3, A4, B4
... ... ... ... ...
54000 W ≤ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, A1, B1, A2, B2, A3, 40 19+1

P < 57000 6, 7, 8, 9, B3 ... A20, B20
W 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15,
16, 17, 18,
19, 20
NOTE
If PMs are not fully configured, connect power cables only to power sockets of PEMs with
corresponding PMs installed, and retain filler panels in PM slots with no PMs installed.

● DC power supply
The NetEngine 8000 X16 must be equipped with two DC PEMs. Each PEM has
20 terminal blocks, every 10 of which are connected to one power source.
Each DC PM has two inputs, each of which comes from one power source in
the equipment room. The DC PM converts the power and outputs the power
to the power backplane, allowing the two power sources to back up each
other. Figure 3-32 shows the DC power supply architecture of the NetEngine
8000 X16.

Figure 3-32 DC power supply architecture of the NetEngine 8000 X16

The NetEngine 8000 X16 must be equipped with two AC & high-voltage DC
PEMs. Each PEM has 20 power sockets, every 10 of which are connected to
one power source. Each AC & high-voltage DC PM has two power inputs, each
of which comes from one power source in the equipment room. The AC &
high-voltage DC PM converts and outputs the power to the power backplane,
allowing the two power sources to back each other up.
The NetEngine 8000 X16 can be directly connected to a power source or
indirectly connected one through a power distribution unit (PDU). Directly
connecting a device to a power source uses cable connections similar to those
in the DC power supply mode, and is not described here. The following
describes the power supply architecture in the scenario where a device is
indirectly connected to a power source through a PDU.
NetEngine 8000 X series deviceses provide two types of PDUs:

Figure 3-33 AC power supply architecture of the NetEngine 8000 X16

Figure 3-34 High-voltage DC power supply architecture of the NetEngine

8000 X16

Figure 3-35 AC & high-voltage DC hybrid power supply architecture of the

NetEngine 8000 X16

3.2.8 NetEngine 8000 X16 AC&High-Voltage DC PEM
Overview
NetEngine 8000 X16 AC&high-voltage DC PEMs connect the NetEngine 8000 X16
to AC&high-voltage DC power sources. The PEMs are pre-installed by default, and
cannot be removed, installed, or replaced onsite.
The NetEngine 8000 X16 and X8 device use the same AC&high-voltage DC PEM.
The difference is that the NetEngine 8000 X16 needs to be configured with two
AC&high-voltage DC PEMs.
Appearance
Figure 3-36 Appearance of NetEngine 8000 X16 AC&high-voltage DC PEMs
Panel
Figure 3-37 Power sockets on NetEngine 8000 X16 AC&high-voltage DC PEMs
Table 3-46 describes the location mapping between NetEngine 8000 X16 PEM
power sockets and power modules.

PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 ... A19/B19 A20/B2
Power 0
Socket
Power 1 2 3 ... 19 20
Modul
e

Power socket 200 V AC to 240 V Power Connector,3Pin,

AC/240 V DC/380 V DC 450V,16A,Straight
power socket Female,1.5mm^2 or
14AWG
Input Requirements
NOTICE

NOTE
3.2.9 NetEngine 8000 X16 DC PEM

Overview
NetEngine 8000 X16 DC PEMs connect the NetEngine 8000 X16 to DC power
sources. The PEMs are pre-installed by default, and cannot be removed, installed,
or replaced onsite.
The NetEngine 8000 X16 and X8 device use the same DC PEM. The difference is
that the NetEngine 8000 X16 needs to be configured with two DC PEMs.

Appearance
Figure 3-38 Appearance of NetEngine 8000 X16 DC PEMs
Panel
Figure 3-39 Terminal blocks on NetEngine 8000 X16 DC PEMs
Table 3-48 describes the location mapping between NetEngine 8000 X16 PEM
terminal blocks and power modules.

PEM A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3 ... A19/B19 A20/B2

Termin 0
al
Block
Power 1 2 3 ... 19 20
Modul
e

2,M6,80A,Right
● Naked Crimping
Connector,JG2,25mm^
2,M6,80A,Right
angle_Galaxy
● Naked Crimping
Connector,JG2,35mm^
2,M6,80A,Right
angle_Galaxy
3.2.10 Power Switch

A switch controls the power output of power modules (PMs). The device has two
switches that back up each other. When one or both switches are in the ON state,
the power output of PMs is enabled.
Appearance
Figure 3-40 shows the appearance of the switches.
Figure 3-40 Switches of the power system

Panel
Table 3-50 Switch description
Name Description
OFF/ON Controls device power-on and power-

off.
Functions
When one or both switches are turned on, the PMs output power, and the device
is powered on. When both switches are turned off, the PMs do not output power,
and the device is powered off.
NOTICE
Ensure that both switches are turned on when the device is running for reliability
purposes.
3.2.11 PAH-3000WA (3000W Dual Inputs AC&HVDC Power

Module)
Overview
Table 3-51 Basic information about the PAH-3000WA
Item Details
Description 3000W Dual Inputs AC&HVDC Power

Module
Part Number 02312JEA
Model PAH-3000WA

Item Details
Remarks Power modules can be configured

based on the overall power
consumption of the device to flexibly
supply power.
NOTE
● After the external power is input to PMs through PEMs, the PMs output the power to
the power supply backplane. Each PM has two inputs, which are from power supply
areas A and B, respectively. The PM combines the two power inputs and outputs one.
● The power module supports AC and HVDC mixed power supply:
● If the two power supplies have different power systems, the AC power supply is
preferentially used as the active power supply (to ensure the highest power supply
efficiency), and the high-voltage DC power supply is used as the standby power
supply.
● If the two power supplies have the same power system, power supply A is
preferentially used as the active power supply, and power supply B is used as the
standby power supply.
NOTICE
1. Ensure that the upstream input and circuit breakers on areas A and B meet the
power supply requirements of the entire system. Otherwise, the power supply
of the entire system may be affected if one area cannot provide all the power
required by the entire system.
2. If the active power supply is abnormal, the system automatically switches to
the standby power supply. When the active power supply recovers, the system
automatically switches back to the active power supply.
Appearance
Figure 3-41 Appearance of the PAH-3000WA
Version Mapping
The huge hardware mapping data is migrated to the Info-Finder hardware center,
where you can easily obtain hardware mapping information.
The Info-Finder hardware center incorporates comprehensive hardware
information and mapping data by sales regions, allowing you to quickly find

desired information and filter the mapping data for more fine-grained data
display.
enterprise: https://info.support.huawei.com/info-finder/search-center/en/
enterprise/routers/netengine-8000-pid-252772223/hardwarecenter?
keyword=02312JEA&productModel=PAH-3000WA#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-42 Panel of the PAH-3000WA
Table 3-52 Indicators on the PAH-3000WA

INPUT Input Green On Normal

Indicator status.
Green Blinking The voltage

slowly (0.5 of the two
Hz) inputs
exceeds the
acceptable
range.
Green Blinking The parity

rapidly (4 Hz) check of the
address signal
fails (the
power
address is
incorrect).
OUTPUT Output Green On Normal

Indicator status.

Green Blinking The parity

address signal
fails (the
power
address is
incorrect).
- Off ● The power

module
does not
have DC
output.
● Output
voltage is
too low.
ALARM Alarm Red On ● Power

Indicator failure
caused by
an internal
Power
failure.
● Fans are
faulty.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overtempe
rature.
● The device
is powered
off due to
over-
output-
voltage.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overcurren
t or short
circuit.
● The
current of
modules is
seriously
imbalance
d.

Red Blinking The parity

address signal
fails (the
power
address is
incorrect).
- Off Normal
status.
Table 3-53 Technical specifications of the PAH-3000WA

Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 41 mm x 106.5 mm x 485 mm (1.61 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 4.19 in. x 19.09 in.)
Number of inputs 2
Rated input voltage [V] 200 V AC to 240 V AC (220 V power

grid)
240 V DC/380 V DC
Input voltage range [V] 180 V AC to 264 V AC

192 V DC to 400 V DC
Maximum input current [A] 16 A
Rated output voltage [V] 53.5 V
Rated output current [A] 56 A
Rated output power [W] 3000 W
Power supply efficiency 0.96
NOTE
The AC power supply system supports 200 V to 240 V and the power supply voltage ranges
from 180 V to 264 V. The 110 V single-phase AC input is not supported. The 110 V dual-
live-wire system must be supported. The dual-live-wire power supply voltage ranges from
180 V to 264 V.
240 V high-voltage DC power supply system, with the input voltage ranging from 192 V to
288 V. 380 V high-voltage DC power supply system with the input voltage ranging from 260
V to 400 V.

3.2.12 PDC-2200WC (PSU-PDC-2200WC-PM2200W DC Power

Supply)
Overview
Table 3-54 Basic information about the PDC-2200WC
Item Details
Description PSU-PDC-2200WC-PM2200W DC
Power Supply
Part Number 02312GDC
Model PDC-2200WC

consumption of the device to flexibly
supply power.
NOTICE
● The external power is input to PMs through PEMs. The PMs output power to
the power supply backplane. The DC power supply uses dual inputs (input A
and input B). Two inputs of each DC power supply may be connected to two
different sources, and if the voltage values of the two sources are different, the
source with a higher DC voltage value provides a larger or all current.
● Ensure that the upstream input and circuit breakers on areas A and B meet the
power supply requirements of the entire system. Otherwise, the power supply
of the entire system may be affected if one area cannot provide all the power
required by the entire system.
Appearance
Figure 3-43 Appearance of the PDC-2200WC

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=02312GDC&productModel=PDC-2200WC#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-44 Panel of the PDC-2200WC
Table 3-55 Indicators on the PDC-2200WC


Indicator status.
Green Blinking The input

voltage
exceeds the
preset
operating
voltage range.

- Off ● No DC
input.
● Positive
and
negative
terminals
are
incorrectly
connected
to each
other.

Indicator status.
- Off ● The power

module
does not
have DC
output.
● Output
voltage is
too low.
ALARM Alarm Red On ● Fans are

Indicator faulty.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overtempe
rature.
● The device
is powered
off due to
over-
output-
voltage.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overcurren
t or short
circuit.
● The
current of
modules is
seriously
imbalance
d.

- Off Normal
status.
Table 3-56 Technical specifications of the PDC-2200WC

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] x 4.19 in. x 19.09 in.)
Number of inputs 2
Rated input voltage [V] -48 V / -60 V
Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V
3.2.13 PDC-3000WA (PSU-PDC3000WA-PM3000W DC Power

Supply)
Overview
Table 3-57 Basic information about the PDC-3000WA

Item Details
Description PSU-PDC3000WA-PM3000W DC Power

Supply
Part Number 02313GSP
Model PDC-3000WA

Item Details

consumption of the device to
implement flexible power distribution.
The colors of power indicators may be
slightly different for different types of
modules.
NOTE
The external power is input to PMs through PEMs, the PMs convert AC power into
regulated DC power and output the power to the power supply backplane.
Appearance
Figure 3-45 Appearance of the PDC-3000WA
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=02313GSP&productModel=PDC-3000WA#matchRelation

Panel
Figure 3-46 Panel of the PDC-3000WA
Table 3-58 Indicators on the PDC-3000WA

Input Input Green On Normal

Indicator status.

voltage
exceeds the
preset
operating
voltage range.
- Off ● No DC
input.
● Positive
and
negative
terminals
are
incorrectly
connected
to each
other.
Output Output Green On Normal

Indicator status.
- Off ● The power

module
does not
have DC
output.
● Output
voltage is
too low.

Alarm Alarm Red On ● Fans are

Indicator faulty.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overtempe
rature.
● The device
is powered
off due to
over-
output-
voltage.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overcurren
t or short
circuit.
● The
current of
modules is
seriously
imbalance
d.
- Off Normal
status.
Table 3-59 Technical specifications of the PDC-3000WA
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] x 4.19 in. x 19.09 in.)
Number of inputs 2
Rated input voltage [V] –48 V / –60 V

Item Specification
3.2.14 PDC-4000WA (PSU-PDC-PM4000W DC Power Supply)
Overview
Table 3-60 Basic information about the PDC-4000WA

Item Details
Description PSU-PDC-PM4000W DC Power Supply
Part Number 02312TUJ
Model PDC-4000WA

consumption of the device to
implement flexible power distribution.
The colors of power indicators may be
slightly different for different types of
modules.
Appearance
Figure 3-47 Appearance of the PDC-4000WA

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=02312TUJ&productModel=PDC-4000WA#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-48 Panel of the PDC-4000WA
Table 3-61 Indicators on the PDC-4000WA


Indicator status.

voltage
exceeds the
preset
operating
voltage range.

- Off ● No DC
input.
● Positive
and
negative
terminals
are
incorrectly
connected
to each
other.

Indicator status.
- Off ● The power

module
does not
have DC
output.
● Output
voltage is
too low.
ALARM Alarm Red On ● Fans are

Indicator faulty.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overtempe
rature.
● The device
is powered
off due to
over-
output-
voltage.
● The device
is powered
off due to
overcurren
t or short
circuit.
● The
current of
modules is
seriously
imbalance
d.

- Off Normal
status.
Table 3-62 Technical specifications of the PDC-4000WA
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] x 4.19 in. x 19.09 in.)
Number of inputs 2
Rated input voltage [V] –48 V / –60 V
Maximum input current [A] 113A
Rated output current [A] 75A
3.3 Heat System
3.3.1 Overview of the Heat Dissipation System

The heat dissipation system of NetEngine 8000 X series devices consists of fan
modules and a chassis door.
● Fan modules installed at the rear of the device cool the MPUs, LPUs, and
SFUs in the chassis through front-to-back airflow (from the perspective of the
cabinet), ensuring a normal operating temperature range for the chassis.
Power modules have their own fans, which take the heat generated by power
modules out of the chassis through front-to-back airflow. These fans ensure
that the power modules work in a normal temperature range.
● The chassis door is optional and installed at the front of the chassis to shield
electromagnetic noise. The door also can prevent dust from entering the
chassis with airflows so that the chassis can work properly.

NOTICE
Cover vacant power module and card slots with filler panels to ensure efficient
heat dissipation and EMC compliance.
Heat Dissipation of Cards

The MPUs, LPUs, and SFUs use a front-to-back airflow design.
1. Front panels of the MPUs and LPUs have air holes. Cold air flows from these
air holes into the MPUs and LPUs.
2. Cool air flows through the MPUs and LPUs to the SFUs.
3. Hot air flows through the SFUs and is exhausted from the chassis by fan
modules.
Figure 3-49 shows the airflow for heat dissipation of the MPUs, LPUs, and SFUs.
Figure 3-49 Airflow for heat dissipation of the MPUs, LPUs, and SFUs (side view)
Heat Dissipation of Power Modules

The power modules use a front-to-back airflow design.
1. There are air holes on power module panels. Cold air flows into the power
modules from these holes and is blown through the power module area by
built-in fans of the power modules.
2. Cold air becomes hot air, passes through the power backplane, and goes out
of the chassis from holes on the PEM.
Figure 3-50 shows the airflow for heat dissipation of power modules.

Figure 3-50 Airflow for heat dissipation of power modules (side view)
3.3.2 X4 device Chassis Door

Overview
The chassis door is optional and is installed at the front side of the chassis. It is
used to shield electromagnetic noise and can protect the air intake vents of MPUs
and LPUs from dust.
● Install a door on a chassis when the chassis is installed in a dusty
environment or a cabinet without doors.
● A chassis door must be configured for a device that complies with FCC
standards.
Table 3-63 Basic attributes of the X4 device chassis door

Item Details
Description Chassis door
Part number 02352TPK

Appearance
Figure 3-51 Appearance of the X4 device chassis door
Version Mapping
Table 3-64 Chassis and version matching the X4 device chassis door
Chassis First Supported Version
X4 device V800R012C00

Components
Figure 3-52 Structure of the X4 device chassis door
Table 3-65 Components
1. Chassis 2. Upper 3. Lower 4. Cable 5. Release

door body enclosure enclosure management button
frame frame frame
(including the
rubber part)
3.3.3 X8 device Chassis Door
Overview
The chassis door is optional and is installed at the front side of the chassis. It is
used to shield electromagnetic noise and can protect the air intake vents of MPUs
and LPUs from dust.
● Install a door on a chassis when the chassis is installed in a dusty
environment or a cabinet without doors.

● A chassis door must be configured for a device that complies with FCC
standards.
Table 3-66 Basic attributes of the X8 device chassis door

Item Details
Description Chassis door
Part number 02352TPL
Appearance
Figure 3-53 Appearance of the X8 device chassis door

Version Mapping
Table 3-67 Chassis and version matching the X8 device chassis door
Chassis First Supported Version
X8 device V800R012C00
Components
Figure 3-54 Structure of the X8 device chassis door

Table 3-68 Components

1. Chassis 2. Upper 3. Lower 4. Cable 5. Release
door body enclosure enclosure management button
frame frame frame
(including the
rubber part)
3.3.4 FAN-240SB-B (FAN-240SB-B Fan Tray Assembly)
Overview
Table 3-69 Basic information about the FAN-240SB-B

Item Details
Description FAN-240SB-B Fan Tray Assembly
Part Number 02122584
Model FAN-240SB-B

Appearance

Figure 3-55 Appearance of the FAN-240SB-B

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02122584&productModel=FAN-240SB-B#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-56 Panel of the FAN-240SB-B
1. Fastening 2. Fan 3. Handle 4. Handle 5. Air outlet

screw indicator and release button
SFU indicator
Table 3-70 Indicators on the FAN-240SB-B
- Fan status Yellow Steady on The fan

indicator module is
abnormal.
The possible
cause is that
the software
of the FMU
on the fan
module is
abnormal or
the fan
module fails.

Green Fast blinking The fan

(4 Hz) module has
not
established
communicatio
n with the
MPU or
communicatio
n loss occurs.
- Fan module Green Slow blinking The fan

indicator (0.5 Hz) module is
working and
communicatin
g with the
MPU properly.
- Fan status Red Slow blinking An alarm is

indicator (0.5 Hz) generated,
and the fan
module is
faulty.
SFU SFU status Green Steady on The SFU is

indicator working
NOTE properly.
The device
has three fans Red Steady on Eequivalent to
and eight an alarm,
SFUs. This indicating
indicator that at least
indicates the
one of the
status of the
SFUs. The SFUs at the
FAN1 rear of the
indicator fan tray has a
indicates the fault that
status of SFUs affects
1-3, the FAN2
services and
indicator
indicates the cannot be
status of SFUs automatically
4-6, and the rectified.
FAN3 Manual
indicator intervention is
indicates the
required.
status of SFUs
7-8.

Yellow Steady on The fan

module
software is
not loaded or
the
communicatio
n fails. As a
result, the
SFU indicator
does not work
properly.
- Steady off The SFUs in

the
corresponding
partition are
not in
position.
Table 3-71 Technical specifications of the FAN-240SB-B
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 361 mm x 129 mm x 143 mm (14.21

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 5.08 in. x 5.63 in.)
Number of fans 2
Typical power consumption [W] 44 W
Overview
Item Details
Model FAN-480SB-B


Appearance


Version Mapping

display.
Panel

SFU indicator

indicator module is
abnormal.
The possible
cause is that
the software
of the FMU
on the fan
module is
abnormal or
the fan
module fails.


(4 Hz) module has
not
established
communicatio
n with the
MPU or
communicatio
n loss occurs.

working and
communicatin
g with the
MPU properly.

and the fan
module is
faulty.

indicator working
NOTE properly.
The device
and eight an alarm,
indicates the
one of the
status of the
FAN1 rear of the
1-3, the FAN2
services and
indicator
FAN3 Manual
indicates the
required.
status of SFUs
7-8.


module
software is
not loaded or
the
communicatio
n fails. As a
result, the
SFU indicator
does not work
properly.

the
corresponding
partition are
not in
position.
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 605 mm x 129 mm x 143 mm (23.82

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 5.08 in. x 5.63 in.)
Number of fans 4
3.3.6 FAN-480SE-B (FAN-480SE-B Fan Tray Assembly)
Overview
Table 3-75 Basic information about the FAN-480SE-B
Item Details
Description FAN-480SE-B Fan Tray Assembly
Model FAN-480SE-B


Appearance

Figure 3-59 Appearance of the FAN-480SE-B

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=02123500&productModel=FAN-480SE-B#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-60 Panel of the FAN-480SE-B
1. Fastening screw 2. Fan indicator 3. Folding handle 4. Air outlet

and SFU indicator

Table 3-76 Indicators on the FAN-480SE-B


indicator module is
abnormal.
The possible
cause is that
the software
of the FMU
on the fan
module is
abnormal or
the fan
module fails.

(4 Hz) module has
not
established
communicatio
n with the
MPU or
communicatio
n loss occurs.

working and
communicatin
g with the
MPU properly.

and the fan
module is
faulty.

indicator working
properly.


NOTE Red Steady on Eequivalent to
The device an alarm,
has three fans
and eight
indicating
SFUs. This that at least
indicator one of the
indicates the SFUs at the
status of the rear of the
SFUs. The fan tray has a
FAN1
indicator
fault that
indicates the affects
status of SFUs services and
1-3, the FAN2 cannot be
indicator automatically
indicates the rectified.
status of SFUs
4-6, and the
Manual
FAN3 intervention is
indicator required.
indicates the
status of SFUs Yellow Steady on The fan
7-8. module
software is
not loaded or
the
communicatio
n fails. As a
result, the
SFU indicator
does not work
properly.

the
corresponding
partition are
not in
position.
Table 3-77 Technical specifications of the FAN-480SE-B

Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 605.2 mm x 128.8 mm x 142.5 mm

x D) [mm(in.)] (23.83 in. x 5.07 in. x 5.61 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 7.2kg (15.87 lb)
Number of fans 3

Item Specification
Typical power consumption [W] 73 W (4T or lower bundle)

195 W (4T or higher bundle)
Overview

Item Details
Model FAN-960SB-B

Appearance


Version Mapping

display.
Panel

SFU indicator

indicator module is
abnormal.
The possible
cause is that
the software
of the FMU
on the fan
module is
abnormal or
the fan
module fails.

Green Blinking fast The

(4 Hz) communicatio
n between
the fan
module and
the main
control
system is not
established or
lost.
- Fan module Green Blinking The fan

indicator slowly (0.5 module works
Hz) properly and
communicate
s with the
main control
system
properly.
- Fan status Red Blinking An alarm is

indicator slowly (0.5 generated,
Hz) indicating
that the fan
module is
faulty.

indicator working
NOTE properly.
The device
and eight an alarm,
indicates the
one of the
status of the
FAN1 rear of the
1-3, the FAN2
services and
indicator
FAN3 Manual
indicates the
required.
status of SFUs
7-8.


module
software is
not loaded or
the
communicatio
n fails. As a
result, the
SFU indicator
does not work
properly.

the
corresponding
partition are
not in
position.
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 1193 mm x 129 mm × 143 mm (46.97

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 5.08 in. x 5.63 in.)
Number of fans 8
3.3.8 FAN-960SE-B (FAN-960SE-B Fan Tray Assembly)
Overview
Table 3-81 Basic information about the FAN-960SE-B
Item Details
Description FAN-960SE-B Fan Tray Assembly
Model FAN-960SE-B


Appearance

Figure 3-63 Appearance of the FAN-960SE-B

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=02123501&productModel=FAN-960SE-B#matchRelation
Panel
Figure 3-64 Panel of the FAN-960SE-B
1. Fastening screw 2. Fan indicator 3. Folding handle 4. Air outlet

and SFU indicator

Table 3-82 Indicators on the FAN-960SE-B


indicator module is
abnormal.
The possible
cause is that
the software
of the FMU
on the fan
module is
abnormal or
the fan
module fails.
Green Blinking fast The

(4 Hz) communicatio
n between
the fan
module and
the main
control
system is not
established or
lost.
- Fan module Green Blinking The fan

indicator slowly (0.5 module works
Hz) properly and
communicate
s with the
main control
system
properly.
- Fan status Red Blinking An alarm is

indicator slowly (0.5 generated,
Hz) indicating
that the fan
module is
faulty.

indicator working
properly.


NOTE Red Steady on Eequivalent to
The device an alarm,
has three fans
and eight
indicating
SFUs. This that at least
indicator one of the
indicates the SFUs at the
status of the rear of the
SFUs. The fan tray has a
FAN1
indicator
fault that
indicates the affects
status of SFUs services and
1-3, the FAN2 cannot be
indicator automatically
indicates the rectified.
status of SFUs
4-6, and the
Manual
FAN3 intervention is
indicator required.
indicates the
status of SFUs Yellow Steady on The fan
7-8. module
software is
not loaded or
the
communicatio
n fails. As a
result, the
SFU indicator
does not work
properly.

the
corresponding
partition are
not in
position.
Table 3-83 Technical specifications of the FAN-960SE-B

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (46.03 in. x 5.61 in. x 5.07 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 13.8kg (30.42 lb)
Number of fans 6

Item Specification
Typical power consumption [W] 115 W (4T or lower bundle)

260 W (4T or higher bundle)
3.4 Noise Reduction Module
3.4.1 X4 Noise Reduction Module
Overview
Table 3-84 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 X4 Noise Reduction
Module
Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 X4 Noise Reduction

Module
Part number 21245400
Model CR8B04NISEC0
Appearance
Figure 3-65 shows the appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X4 Noise Reduction
Module.

Figure 3-65 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X4 Noise Reduction Module
Version Mapping
Table 3-85 Chassis and version matching the NetEngine 8000 X4 Noise Reduction
Module
Product Chassis First Supported Version
NetEngine 02353CVY V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X4
NetEngine 02353CWA V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X4

Table 3-86 Technical specifications of the FAN-240SB-B fan module

Item Specification
Dimensions without 1771 mm x 442 mm x 200 mm (69.72 in. x 17.4 in. x

packaging (H x W x 7.87 in.)
D)
Weight without 3.2 kg (7.05 lb)

packaging
Weight with 6.3 kg (13.89 lb)

packaging[kg(lb)]
3.4.2 X8 Noise Reduction Module
Overview
Table 3-87 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 X8 Noise Reduction
Module
Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 X8 Noise Reduction

Module
Model CR8B08NISEC0
Appearance
Figure 3-66 shows the appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X8 Noise Reduction
Module.

Figure 3-66 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X8 Noise Reduction Module

Version Mapping
Table 3-88 Chassis and version matching the NetEngine 8000 X8 Noise Reduction
Module
NetEngine 02353CWB V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X8
NetEngine 02353CWC V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X8

Item Specification
Dimensions without 1771 mm x 442 mm x 200 mm (69.72 in. x 17.4 in. x

packaging (H x W x 7.87 in.)
D)
Weight without 4.7 kg (10.36 lb)

packaging
Weight with 9.4 kg (20.72 lb)

packaging[kg(lb)]
3.4.3 X16 Cabinet Door with Noise Reduction Module
Overview
Table 3-90 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 X16 Cabinet Door with
Noise Reduction Module
Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 X16 Cabinet Door

with Noise Reduction Module
Model CR8B16RACKC0

Appearance
Figure 3-67 shows the appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X16 Cabinet Door with
Noise Reduction Module.

Figure 3-67 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X16 Cabinet Door with Noise
Reduction Module

Version Mapping
Table 3-91 Chassis and version matching the NetEngine 8000 X16 Cabinet Door
with Noise Reduction Module
NetEngine 02354MDD V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X16
NetEngine 02354MDE V800R021C10SPC300

8000 X16
Item Specification
Dimensions without 600 mm x 228 mm x 2200 mm ( 8.98 in. x 8.67 in. x

packaging (H x W x 23.62 in. )
D)
Weight without 48.2 kg ( 106.26 lb )

packaging
Weight with 123.1 kg ( 231.39 lb )

packaging[kg(lb)]
3.5 Board
3.5.1 Overview
3.5.1.1 Card Classification

Depending on their functions, cards of NetEngine 8000 X series devices are
classified into the following types: Main Processing Unit (MPU), Line Processing
Unit (LPU), and Switch Fabric Unit (SFU). Table 3-93 describes these cards.
Table 3-93 Cards supported by NetEngine 8000 X series devices
Card Type Full Name Function
MPU Main Processing Unit Responsible for system control,

management, and monitoring

Card Type Full Name Function
SFU Switch Fabric Unit Responsible for line-rate data

switching on the data plane
LPUI Integrated Line Responsible for data packet processing

Processing Unit and traffic management
VSUI Integrated Versatile Supports the processing of universal

Service Unit services such as SA, CGN, and IPsec
LPUF Flexible Card Line Responsible for data packet processing

Processing Unit and traffic management
PIC Physical Interface Working with LPUFs. Each LPUF can

Card have a maximum of two PICs installed
3.5.1.2 Card Structure and Dimensions
Card Structure
Figure 3-68 shows components on a card.
Figure 3-68 Components on a card
1. Indicator 2. Captive screw 3. Wrench

NOTE NOTE
This component is used to This component is used to
fix a card into the chassis. install and remove a card.

4. Front panel plate 5. Ports 6. Printed circuit board

(PCB)
NOTE
There are card name label, NOTE
indicators, and ports on the ● The PCB contains all the
plate, as well as some other functional modules of
labels, such as the bar code the card and is the core
and laser label. of the card. The PCB
provides indicators,
buttons, and ports on
the front panel.
● Different cards provide
different indicators,
buttons, and ports. For
details, see the
description of specific
cards.
Card Dimensions
Figure 3-69 shows how the height, width, and depth of a card are measured.
Figure 3-69 Card dimensions
NOTE
The card dimensions are defined as follows:

● Height: the height of the front panel
● Width: the longest distance between the tops of two ejector levers
● Depth: height of the front panel of a card
3.5.1.3 Port Numbering of Boards
Port Numbering of LPUs

On the NetEngine 8000 X series devices, ports are numbered in the format of slot
ID/subcard ID/port number.
● Slot ID: identifies in which slot a card is installed.
● Subcard ID: In V800R012C00, LPUs on the NetEngine 8000 X series devices are
fixed, so the subcard ID is always 0.

● Port number: indicates the number of each port on a card.

There are three rows of ports on a card of the NetEngine 8000 X series
devices. These ports are numbered from top to bottom and left to right
starting from 0.
Figure 3-70 Port number (for reference only)
Port Numbering of MPUs

When configuring and checking an MPU's ETH port, its number is 0/0/0. However,
in alarms and logs, it is displayed as "MPU slot number/0/0".
3.5.1.4 Port Rate Description

The port rate is the nominal value of the rate at which a port transmits data. To
meet various transmission rate requirements, pluggable modules with different
rates are provided, including 100GE, 50GE, 40GE, 25GE, 10GE, and GE optical
modules. Generally, the rate supported by a port corresponds to the rate of the
pluggable module on the port, but it is also affected by the following factors: port
rate auto-sensing, port auto-negotiation, port splitting, and port rate
configuration.
Port Rate Auto-Sensing

Typically, port rate auto-sensing allows a port to automatically work at the rate of
the medium that is installed, and you do not need to run a command to change
the port rate.
Port Auto-Negotiation
Different from auto-sensing, auto-negotiation provides a mode of exchanging
information between two ports on connected devices. You can connect the two
ports through media that support rate auto-negotiation so that some port
attribute settings can be negotiated and the two ports can automatically
configure their transmission capabilities. The duplex mode, rate, and FEC of the
two ports are negotiated. Ports at both ends of a physical link automatically select
the same operating parameter settings by exchanging information. In this way, the
transmission capabilities of the ports can reach the maximum supported by them.
Port Split
Port split allows a high-bandwidth physical port on the switch to be split into
multiple independent low-bandwidth ports. With the port split function, ports on a
card can connect to various types of ports on the remote device, allowing for
flexible networking and lowering hardware costs. For example, a 40GE port on the
LPUI-4T can be split into 4 10GE ports.

Port Rate Configuration

In addition to the preceding methods, you can also run commands to change the
port rate. For details, see "Configuring the Interface Rate" in the Configuration
Guide - Interface Management Configuration Guide.
3.5.1.5 CM
The consumption model (CM) is a new hardware sales model that enables
customers to purchase large-capacity and high-density boards in installments to
achieve the desired hardware capacity while reducing initial costs. In the future, to
meet service development requirements, customers can flexibly purchase
hardware licenses for capacity expansion.
Background
This flexible sales model also enables customers to purchase hardware in
installments, further lowering the initial purchase threshold. Customers can
purchase boards step by step based on the required capacity rather than having to
pay for all the required boards at a time. In addition, customers can invest in
network construction flexibly based on income to quickly respond to market
requirements with minimum initial costs.
Basic Concepts
The CM consists of the following elements:
● (Mandatory) Hardware boards that support the CM.
● (Mandatory) Hardware right to use (RTU) licenses: After a license is loaded to
an interface, the interface has the corresponding bandwidth.
● (Optional) Service license (Function): After a license is enabled on an
interface, the interface supports L3VPN.
Comparison Between the CM Model and Conventional Model

Table 3-94 compares the CM and the conventional mode. The CM enables on-
demand flexible purchase.
Table 3-94 Comparison between the CM model and conventional model
Category Manda CM Conventional Model

tory or
Optio
nal
Service License Option To be loaded on a Functional license that

(Function) al working interface to enables the entire board
enable the interface to to have the
have an enhanced corresponding function
function. after the license is
loaded.

Category Manda CM Conventional Model

tory or
Optio
nal
RTU License Manda To be loaded on an ● Conventional board.

tory interface to enable the ● Entire board capacity.
interface to work and All interfaces are
support the IP/MPLS/ available.
L2VPN function.
● The board supports
Board Manda ● Board that supports functions such as IP,
tory the CM. MPLS, L2VPN, and
● Some interfaces are L3VPN.
not available.
Device Manda Infrastructure, which is the same for the CM and

tory the conventional model.
Application Procedure
1. Install the boards.
2. Obtain the ESN from the device and apply to Huawei for the matching license
authorization file.
3. Load and activate the license authorization file.
4. Activate the hardware RTU and service license (Function).
5. Configure the corresponding service.
NetEngine 8000 X Interface RTU Description

The NetEngine 8000 X provides three types of interfaces:
1. 10GE LAN/WAN or GE optical signal input/output interface
2. 100GE/50GE/40GE optical signal input/output interface
3. 400GE/200G/100GE optical signal input/output interface
Interface RTUs are described as follows:
1. 10GE LAN/WAN or GE optical signal input/output interface: By default, only
GE can be used. To use other modes, load and activate the related interface
RTU.
2. 100GE/50GE/40GE optical signal input/output interface: Disabled by default.
To use it, load and activate the related interface RTU.
3. 400GE/200G/100GE optical signal input/output interface: By default, only 100
Gbps bandwidth can be used. To use higher bandwidth, load and activate the
related interface RTU.
Benefits
The CM offers the following benefits to customers:

● Reduced initial investment: Customers break even more quickly.

● Improved slot utilization: The capability of a single slot is improved 2–4 fold,
saving a large number of slots and chassis.
● Reduced OPEX: Customers can provision services by remotely loading licenses.
Therefore, customers do not need to install boards on site to implement
capacity expansion.
3.5.2 MPU
3.5.2.1 CR8D0MPUA1C0 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit A1(MPUA1))
Overview
Table 3-95 Basic information about the CR8D0MPUA1C0

Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit

A1(MPUA1)
Model CR8D0MPUA1C0
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA1
Appearance
Figure 3-71 Appearance of the CR8D0MPUA1C0
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03059123&productModel=CR8D0MPUA1C0#matchRelation
Indicators and Buttons
Figure 3-72 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0MPUA1C0
1. RUN(G)/ 2. Active/ 3. Reset 4. CSS status 5. USB-based

ALM(R)/ Standby button indicator deployment
OFL(Y) status status indicator
indicator indicator
6. ETH port 7. Reserved 8. Cascading 9. High- 10. Fast inter-

indicator network port precision chassis
indicator clock optical switchover
module port indicator
indicator
11. OFL - - - -
button

Table 3-96 Indicators on the CR8D0MPUA1C0

RUN(G)/ Running Yellow Steady on The card is in

ALM(R)/ status power-off
OFL(Y) indicator state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)
Green Steady on The board has

been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.
Green Fast blinking The board is

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.
Green Slow blinking, The board is

once every 2 working
seconds (0.5 properly.
Hz)
Red Steady on A hardware

alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.
Red Fast blinking The system

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.
M/S CSS status Reserved Reserved Reserved.

indicator

ACT Active/ Green Steady on The card is

Standby the active
status MPU.
indicator
- Off The card is
the standby
MPU.
USB USB indicator Reserved Reserved Reserved.
ETH ETH LINK Green Steady on The link is up.
- Off The link is

down.
ETH ETH ACT Yellow Blinking Data is being

(15Hz) transmitted or
received.
- Off No data is
transmitted or
received.
SFP+ 0–1 Cascading Reserved Reserved Reserved

network port
indicator
(LINK)

network port
indicator
(ACT)
SFP+ 2–3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved.
HP-GE High- Reserved Reserved Reserved

precision
clock optical
module
indicator
FSP 0–1 Fast inter- Reserved Reserved Reserved.

chassis
switchover
port indicator

Table 3-97 Buttons on the CR8D0MPUA1C0

OFL OFL button Before removing a card,

press and hold down the
OFL button for about 6
seconds until the
RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y)
indicator turns yellow.
Then, you can remove
the card.
This button takes effect
only on the slave MPU.
RST RST button Before resetting an MPU,

press the RST button.
Ports
Figure 3-73 Ports on the CR8D0MPUA1C0
1. FSP0 and 2. SFP+2 and 3. SFP+0 and 4. ETH 5. Console

FSP1 SFP+3 SFP+1 management port(CONSOL
ports(FSP0, ports(SFP ports(SFP port(ETH) E)
FSP1) +2,SFP+3) +0,SFP+1)
6. External 7. Test port 8. External 9. Clock SFP 10. USB

synchronizatio CLK(CLK/ synchronizatio port(HP-GE) port(USB)
n port TEST) n port
CLK(CLK) TOD(TOD)
11. RS485 12. ALM IN - - -

port(485) port(ALM IN)

Table 3-98 Ports on the CR8D0MPUA1C0

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components
FSP 0–1 RJ45 Function as ports 8-core shielded

for fast inter- cable
chassis
switchovers.
Reserved.
SFP+ 0–1 SFP+ Input and output Optical fiber

optical signals of
10GE cascading
network ports.
Reserved.
SFP+ 2–3 SFP+ Function as inter- Optical fiber

chassis cascading
network ports.
Reserved.
ETH RJ45 Connects to the Super category 5

NMS workstation. shielded twisted
pair
CONSOLE RJ45 Connects to the 8-core shielded

control platform cable
and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.
CLK RJ45 Used to input or 120-ohm clock

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.
TOD RJ45 Inputs or outputs 120-ohm clock

1 pps and ASCII cable
time signals or
DCLS time signals.
CLK/TEST SMA Connects to an 50-ohm clock

external clock. cable
HP-GE SFP Used to input or Optical fiber

output high-
precision GE
signals. Reserved.
USB USB Type A USB port -

(reserved)


Components
485 RJ45 RS485 monitoring 8-core shielded

port(reserved) cable
ALM IN RJ45 Used for Boolean 8-core shielded

detection. cable
Functions and Features
Table 3-99 Functions and features of the CR8D0MPUA1C0
Functions and Features Description
Basic function The MPU is responsible for system

control and management, including
route calculation, device management
and maintenance, and device
monitoring. In addition, the MPU
functions as the system
synchronization unit to provide high-
precision and high-reliability
synchronization clock and time signals.
Reliability and availability Supports hot swap. 1:1 backup mode.
Table 3-100 Technical specifications of the CR8D0MPUA1C0
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 45.7 mm x 215 mm x 522.5 mm (1.8

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 8.46 in. x 20.57 in.)
Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 425.0 BTU/hour

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 24-core 2.5 GHz

Item Specification
SDRAM 32 GB
Storage M.2 SATA:32 GB
Overview
Item Details

A2(MPUA2)
Part Number 03050BDA
Model CR8D0MPUA1C2
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA2
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

keyword=03050BDA&productModel=CR8D0MPUA1C2#matchRelation

indicator indicator
6. ETH port 7. Reserved 8. Cascading 9. High- 10. Fast inter-

indicator network port precision chassis
indicator clock optical switchover
module port indicator
indicator
11. OFL - - - -
button
RUN(G)/ Running Yellow Steady on The card is in

ALM(R)/ status power-off
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)

alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.
M/S CSS status Reserved Reserved Reserved.

indicator
ACT Active/ Green Steady on The card is

Standby the active
status MPU.
indicator
- Off The card is
the standby
MPU.
USB USB indicator Reserved Reserved Reserved.
ETH ETH LINK Green Steady on The link is up.
- Off The link is

down.

ETH ETH ACT Yellow Blinking Data is being

(15Hz) transmitted or
received.
- Off No data is
transmitted or
received.

network port
indicator
(LINK)

network port
indicator
(ACT)
SFP+ 2–3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved.

precision
clock optical
module
indicator
FSP 0–1 Fast inter- Reserved Reserved Reserved.

chassis
switchover
port indicator


seconds until the
the card.
RST RST button Before resetting an MPU,

press the RST button.

Ports

FSP1) +2,SFP+3) +0,SFP+1)

n port TEST) n port
CLK(CLK) TOD(TOD)
11. RS485 12. ALM IN - - -


Components
FSP 0–1 RJ45 Function as ports 8-core shielded

for fast inter- cable
chassis
switchovers.
Reserved.
SFP+ 0–1 SFP+ Input and output Optical fiber

optical signals of
10GE cascading
network ports.
Reserved.
SFP+ 2–3 SFP+ Function as inter- Optical fiber

chassis cascading
network ports.
Reserved.


Components

pair

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.

1 pps and ASCII cable
time signals or
DCLS time signals.

HP-GE SFP High-precision Optical fiber

clock SFP port.
Reserved.
USB USB Type A USB port -

(reserved)

port(reserved) cable
ALM IN RJ45 Used for Boolean 8-core shielded

detection. cable




Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 8.46 in. x 20.57 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 24-core 2.5 GHz
SDRAM 32 GB

Overview

Item Details

A4(MPUA4)
Part Number 03050EXT
Model CR8D0MPUA4C0
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA4
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050EXT&productModel=CR8D0MPUA4C0#matchRelation


indicator indicator
6. ETH port 7. Reserved 8. Reserved 9. High- 10. Fast inter-

indicator cascading cascading precision chassis
network port network port clock optical switchover
indicator indicator module port indicator
indicator
11. OFL - - - -
button

RUN(G)/ Running Yellow Steady on The board is

ALM(R)/ status in power-off
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)

been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)


alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.
ACT Control status Green Steady on The board is

indicator the active
board.
- Steady off The board is

the standby
board.
M/S Cluster status Reserved Reserved Reserved

indicator
USB USB indicator Reserved Reserved Reserved
ETH ETH LINK Green Steady on The link is Up.
- Steady off The link is

Down.
ETH ETH ACT Yellow Blinking (15 Data is being

Hz) transmitted
and received.
- Steady off No data is

being
transmitted or
received.
SFP+ 2–3 SFP+ 2–3 Reserved Reserved Reserved

indicator

network port
indicator
(LINK)


network port
indicator
(ACT)

precision
clock optical
module
indicator
FSP 0–1 Fast inter- Reserved Reserved Reserved

chassis
switchover
port indicator

OFL OFL button Before removing a board,

button for six seconds
until the RUN(G)/
ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator
turns yellow. Then, you
can remove the board.
RESET RST button This button is used to

reset the MPU.
Ports


FSP1) +2,SFP+3) +0,SFP+1)

n port TEST) n port
CLK(CLK) TOD(TOD)
11. RS485 12. ALM IN - - -


Components
FSP 0–1 RJ45 Reserved interface 8-core shielded

for fast chassis cable
switchovers
SFP+ 2–3 SFP+ Reserved interface Optical fiber

for chassis
cascading
SFP+ 0–1 SFP+ 10GE cascading Optical fiber

network port for
optical signal
input and output.
Reserved.

pair

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.



Components

1pps+ASCII time cable
signals or DCLS
time signals.
HP-GE SFP High-precision Optical module

clock interface. (34060286/
S4016067/340604
84) and Atom
GPS timing SFP
module
(03034CGQ)
USB USB 2.0 Type A USB port -

(reserved)

port (reserved) cable
ALM IN RJ45 Is used for 8-core shielded

Boolean cable
detection.



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.57 in.)
Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 185 mm x 550 mm x 720 mm (7.28 in.

D) [mm(in.)] x 21.65 in. x 28.35 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 8-core 2.3 GHz
SDRAM 32 GB
3.5.2.4 CR8D0MPUA6C0 (03050EYK: NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit

A6(MPUA6))
Overview
Item Details

A6(MPUA6)
Part Number 03050EYK
Model CR8D0MPUA6C0
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA6

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050EYK&productModel=CR8D0MPUA6C0#matchRelation



example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)

been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)

alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.

board.


the standby
board.

indicator

Down.

Hz) transmitted
and received.

being
transmitted or
received.

indicator

network port
indicator
(LINK)

network port
indicator
(ACT)

precision
clock optical
module
indicator

chassis
switchover
port indicator



until the RUN(G)/

reset the MPU.
Ports

Components

switchovers

for chassis
cascading

network port for
optical signal
input and output.
Reserved.


Components

Supports 10M/ pair
100M/1000M
auto-sensing.

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.


signals or DCLS
time signals.

S4016067/340604
84) and Atom
GPS timing SFP
module
(03034CGQ)

(reserved)


Boolean cable
detection.

Basic function The card is responsible for system

route computing, device management
monitoring. In addition, the card
Restrictions and remarks Cannot be installed in the same

chassis with main control boards of
other models. In V800R021C10SPC600
and later versions, this main control
board can be installed in the same
chassis with that of the same model
(part number: 03050EYK-001).
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 8.46 in. x 20.57 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 15.16 in. x 30.71 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 8-core 2.3 GHz

Item Specification
SDRAM 32 GB
Storage M.2 SATA: 32 GB
3.5.2.5 CR8D0MPUA6C0 (03050EYK-001: NetEngine 8000 Main Processing

Unit A6(MPUA6))
Overview
Item Details

A6(MPUA6)
Part Number 03050EYK-001
Model CR8D0MPUA6C0
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA6
Appearance
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050EYK-001&productModel=CR8D0MPUA6C0#matchRelation

example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)

been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)


alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.

board.

the standby
board.

indicator

Down.

Hz) transmitted
and received.

being
transmitted or
received.

indicator

network port
indicator
(LINK)


network port
indicator
(ACT)

precision
clock optical
module
indicator

chassis
switchover
port indicator


until the RUN(G)/

reset the MPU.
Ports


Components

switchovers

for chassis
cascading

network port for
optical signal
input and output.
Reserved.

Supports 10M/ pair
100M/1000M
auto-sensing.

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.


signals or DCLS
time signals.

S4016067/340604
84) and Atom
GPS timing SFP
module
(03034CGQ)

(reserved)


Components


Boolean cable
detection.
Basic function The card is responsible for system

route computing, device management
monitoring. In addition, the card
Restrictions and remarks Cannot be installed in the same

chassis with main control boards of
other models. In V800R021C10SPC600
and later versions, this main control
board can be installed in the same
chassis with that of the same model
(part number: 03050EYK).
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 8.46 in. x 20.57 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 15.16 in. x 30.71 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 8-core 2.3 GHz
SDRAM 32 GB
3.5.2.6 CR8D0MPUAXC0 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit

A10(MPUA10))
Overview
Table 3-125 Basic information about the CR8D0MPUAXC0

Item Details

A10(MPUA10)
Part Number 03050LDG
Model CR8D0MPUAXC0
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA10
Appearance
Figure 3-86 Appearance of the CR8D0MPUAXC0

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LDG&productModel=CR8D0MPUAXC0#matchRelation
Figure 3-87 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0MPUAXC0

indicator indicator

indicator
11. OFL - - - -
button

Table 3-126 Indicators on the CR8D0MPUAXC0


example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)

been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)

alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.

board.


the standby
board.

indicator

Down.

Hz) transmitted
and received.

being
transmitted or
received.

indicator

network port
indicator
(LINK)

network port
indicator
(ACT)

precision
clock optical
module
indicator

chassis
switchover
port indicator

Table 3-127 Buttons on the CR8D0MPUAXC0


until the RUN(G)/

reset the MPU.
Ports
Figure 3-88 Ports on the CR8D0MPUAXC0

FSP1) +2,SFP+3) +0,SFP+1)

n port TEST) n port
CLK(CLK) TOD(TOD)
11. RS485 12. ALM IN - - -


Table 3-128 Ports on the CR8D0MPUAXC0

Components

switchovers

for chassis
cascading

network port for
optical signal
input and output.
Reserved.

Supports 10M/ pair
100M/1000M
auto-sensing.

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.


signals or DCLS
time signals.

S4016067/340604
84) and Atom
GPS timing SFP
module
(03034CGQ)

(reserved)


Components


Boolean cable
detection.
Table 3-129 Functions and features of the CR8D0MPUAXC0

Basic function It is responsible for system control and

management, including route
calculation, device management and
maintenance, and device monitoring.
In addition, it functions as the system
Table 3-130 Technical specifications of the CR8D0MPUAXC0

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 8.46 in. x 20.57 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 15.16 in. x 30.71 in.)
Typical heat dissipation [BTU/hour] 358 BTU/hour
Long-term operating temperature 0 °C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

[°C(°F)]

Item Specification
Short-term operating temperature –5 °C to +50 °C (23°F to 122°F)

[°C(°F)]
CPU 16-core 2.0 GHz
SDRAM 32 GB
3.5.2.7 CR8D0MPUAXC1 (NetEngine 8000 Main Processing Unit

A11(MPUA11))
Overview
Table 3-131 Basic information about the CR8D0MPUAXC1

Item Details

A11(MPUA11)
Part Number 03050LDH
Model CR8D0MPUAXC1
Card type MPU
Silkscreen MPUA11
Appearance
Figure 3-89 Appearance of the CR8D0MPUAXC1
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050LDH&productModel=CR8D0MPUAXC1#matchRelation
Figure 3-90 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0MPUAXC1

indicator indicator

indicator
11. OFL - - - -
button
Table 3-132 Indicators on the CR8D0MPUAXC1


example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


been powered
on but the
system
software is
not running.

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Hz)

alarm is
generated.
You can run
the display
alarm
hardware
command to
check the
hardware
alarm type.

(4 Hz) power is
insufficient.

board.

the standby
board.

indicator

Down.


Hz) transmitted
and received.

being
transmitted or
received.

indicator

network port
indicator
(LINK)

network port
indicator
(ACT)

precision
clock optical
module
indicator

chassis
switchover
port indicator
Table 3-133 Buttons on the CR8D0MPUAXC1


until the RUN(G)/

reset the MPU.

Ports
Figure 3-91 Ports on the CR8D0MPUAXC1

FSP1) +2,SFP+3) +0,SFP+1)

n port TEST) n port
CLK(CLK) TOD(TOD)
11. RS485 12. ALM IN - - -

Table 3-134 Ports on the CR8D0MPUAXC1

Components

switchovers

for chassis
cascading

network port for
optical signal
input and output.
Reserved.

pair


Components

and implements
onsite system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.

output 2 Mbps cable
clock signals or 2
MHz clock signals.


signals or DCLS
time signals.

S4016067/340604
84) and Atom
GPS timing SFP
module
(03034CGQ)

(reserved)


Boolean cable
detection.

Table 3-135 Functions and features of the CR8D0MPUAXC1
Basic function It is responsible for system control and

management, including route
calculation, device management and
maintenance, and device monitoring.
In addition, it functions as the system
Table 3-136 Technical specifications of the CR8D0MPUAXC1
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 45.7 mm x 433 mm x 522.5 mm

x D) [mm(in.)]

D) [mm(in.)]

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 16-core 2.0 GHz
SDRAM 32 GB
3.5.3 SFU

3.5.3.1 CR8DSFU14TC0 (NetEngine 8000 X16 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-14T4-C))
Overview
Table 3-137 Basic information about the CR8DSFU14TC0
Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 X16 14.4Tbps Switch

Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-C)
Part Number 03050EVU
Model CR8DSFU14TC0
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-14T4-C
Appearance
Figure 3-92 Appearance of the CR8DSFU14TC0
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050EVU&productModel=CR8DSFU14TC0#matchRelation
Figure 3-93 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFU14TC0

Table 3-138 Indicators on the CR8DSFU14TC0

RUN(G)/ Running Green The card has Steady on

ALM(R)/ status been powered
OFL(Y) indicator on but the
system
software is
not running.
Green Slow blinking, Slow blinking

once every 2 (0.5 Hz)
seconds (0.5
Hz)
Green Fast blinking Fast blinking

(4 Hz) (4 Hz)
Red The card has Steady on

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware).
Yellow The card is in Steady on

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)

Table 3-139 Buttons on the CR8DSFU14TC0

OFL OFL button Needs to be held down

before a card is removed.
You need to press and
hold the button for six
seconds until the
the board.
- Wrench removal button The board supports

removable wrenches. To
remove the wrenches
from an SFU, press and
hold the round button
(marked by number 3 in
the preceding figure) on
the SFU.
Table 3-140 Functions and features of the CR8DSFU14TC0

Basic function Switches cells between LPUs,

communicates with the main control
boards over Ethernet, is subject to
centralized control and management
of the main control boards, and
monitors the temperature and voltage
of various boards.
Reliability and availability Supports hot swap. The SFUs work in

7+1 backup mode. The eight SFUs
balance services at the same time. If
one SFU is faulty or replaced, the
other seven SFUs automatically take
over its services to prevent service
interruptions. This improves system
reliability.
Restrictions and remarks This SFU can be installed only in slots

1 to 8.
Breakout supported No
Interface rate auto-sensing supported No

Table 3-141 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFU14TC0

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 43.94 in. x 15.32 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 50.79 in. x 29.13 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
Switching capacity 14.4 Tbps
3.5.3.2 CR8DSFU14TC8 (NetEngine 8000 X8 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-14T4-A))
Overview
Table 3-142 Basic information about the CR8DSFU14TC8

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-A)
Part Number 03050BBL
Model CR8DSFU14TC8
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-14T4-A

Appearance
Figure 3-94 Appearance of the CR8DSFU14TC8
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050BBL&productModel=CR8DSFU14TC8#matchRelation
Figure 3-95 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFU14TC8
1. Running status 2. OFL button 3. Wrench removal

indicator button
Table 3-143 Indicators on the CR8DSFU14TC8
RUN(G)/ Running Green Steady on The board has

system
software is
not running.


Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.
Red Steady on The board has

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.
Yellow Steady on The card is in

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)
Table 3-144 Buttons on the CR8DSFU14TC8


seconds until the
the card.

- Wrench removal button An SFU is installed and

removed using
remove the wrenches
hold the button (marked
by number 3 in the
figure) on the SFU.
Table 3-145 Functions and features of the CR8DSFU14TC8
Basic function Implements cell exchange between

LPUs, communicates with the MPU
over Ethernet, accepts the MPU's
centralized control and management,
and monitors board temperature and
voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-146 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFU14TC8
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.3 CR8DSFU14TCA (NetEngine 8000 X4 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-14T4-B))
Overview
Table 3-147 Basic information about the CR8DSFU14TCA

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-B)
Part Number 03050BBK
Model CR8DSFU14TCA
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-14T4-B
Appearance
Figure 3-96 Appearance of the CR8DSFU14TCA

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050BBK&productModel=CR8DSFU14TCA#matchRelation
Figure 3-97 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFU14TCA

indicator button
Table 3-148 Indicators on the CR8DSFU14TCA

system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

Red Steady on A fault that

affects
services has
occurred and
it cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware), or
the card has
generated an
alarm
because the
memory size
is not equal
to the
standard
specification.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)
Table 3-149 Buttons on the CR8DSFU14TCA


seconds until the
the card.

- Wrench removal button The SFU is installed and

removed using
remove the wrenches
the SFU.
Table 3-150 Functions and features of the CR8DSFU14TCA

voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-151 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFU14TCA
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.4 CR8DSFU14TD1 (NetEngine 8000 X4 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-14T4-D))
Overview
Table 3-152 Basic information about the CR8DSFU14TD1

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-D)
Part Number 03050KAU
Model CR8DSFU14TD1
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-14T4-D
Appearance
Figure 3-98 Appearance of the CR8DSFU14TD1
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050KAU&productModel=CR8DSFU14TD1#matchRelation
Figure 3-99 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFU14TD1

indicator button
Table 3-153 Indicators on the CR8DSFU14TD1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred and
it cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware), or
the card has
generated an
alarm
because the
memory size
is not equal
to the
standard
specification.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)
Table 3-154 Buttons on the CR8DSFU14TD1


seconds until the
the card.


removed using
remove the wrenches
the SFU.
Table 3-155 Functions and features of the CR8DSFU14TD1

voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-156 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFU14TD1
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.5 CR8DSFU14TDE (NetEngine 8000 X8 14.4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-14T4-E))
Overview
Table 3-157 Basic information about the CR8DSFU14TDE
Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-14T4-E)
Part Number 03050KAX
Model CR8DSFU14TDE
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-14T4-E
Appearance
Figure 3-100 Appearance of the CR8DSFU14TDE
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050KAX&productModel=CR8DSFU14TDE#matchRelation

indicator button
Table 3-158 Functions and features of the CR8DSFU14TDE

voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-159 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFU14TDE
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.6 CR8DSFUI2TC1 (NetEngine 8000 X16 2Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-2T-C))
Overview
Table 3-160 Basic information about the CR8DSFUI2TC1

Item Details
Description NetEngine 8000 X16 2Tbps Switch

Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-C)
Part Number 03050LEF
Model CR8DSFUI2TC1
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-2T-C
Appearance
Figure 3-101 Appearance of the CR8DSFUI2TC1
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050LEF&productModel=CR8DSFUI2TC1#matchRelation
Figure 3-102 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TC1
Table 3-161 Indicators on the CR8DSFUI2TC1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

Yellow Steady on The board is

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)
Table 3-162 Buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TC1

OFL Offline button Before removing a board,

press and hold the OFL
button until the RUN(G)/
turns orange (about six
seconds). Then, you can
remove the board.
- Wrench removal button The card supports

remove the wrenches
the SFU.
Table 3-163 Functions and features of the CR8DSFUI2TC1


voltage.


reliability.
Restrictions and remarks Currently, only SFU slots 1 to 8 are

used.
Table 3-164 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFUI2TC1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (43.94 in. x 1.67 in. x 15.32 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
Switching capacity 2 Tbps
3.5.3.7 CR8DSFUI2TDA (NetEngine 8000 X4 2Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-2T-A))

Overview
Table 3-165 Basic information about the CR8DSFUI2TDA

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-A)
Part Number 03050KAT
Model CR8DSFUI2TDA
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-2T-A
Appearance
Figure 3-103 Appearance of the CR8DSFUI2TDA
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KAT&productModel=CR8DSFUI2TDA#matchRelation

Figure 3-104 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TDA

indicator button
Table 3-166 Indicators on the CR8DSFUI2TDA


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)
Table 3-167 Buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TDA

OFL Board removal button Before removing a card,

seconds until the
the card.

remove the wrenches
the SFU.

Table 3-168 Functions and features of the CR8DSFUI2TDA


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-169 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFUI2TDA

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.3.8 CR8DSFUI2TDB (NetEngine 8000 X8 2Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-2T-B))
Overview
Table 3-170 Basic information about the CR8DSFUI2TDB

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-2T-B)
Part Number 03050KAW
Model CR8DSFUI2TDB
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-2T-B
Appearance
Figure 3-105 Appearance of the CR8DSFUI2TDB
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KAW&productModel=CR8DSFUI2TDB#matchRelation

Figure 3-106 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TDB

indicator button
Table 3-171 Indicators on the CR8DSFUI2TDB


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)
Table 3-172 Buttons on the CR8DSFUI2TDB

OFL Board removal button Before removing a board,

seconds until the
the board.

remove the wrenches
the SFU.

Table 3-173 Functions and features of the CR8DSFUI2TDB


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-174 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFUI2TDB

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]


Unit(SFUI-4T-A))
Overview

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-A)
Model CR8DSFUI4TC0
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-A
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059130&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC0#matchRelation


indicator button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred and
it cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware), or
the card has
generated an
alarm
because the
memory size
is not equal
to the
standard
specification.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


seconds until the
the card.


removed using
remove the wrenches
the SFU.

voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Unit(SFUI-4T-B))
Overview
Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-B)
Model CR8DSFUI4TC1
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-B
Appearance
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03059129&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC1#matchRelation

indicator button

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


seconds until the
the card.


removed using
remove the wrenches
the SFU.

voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.11 CR8DSFUI4TC4 (03050BEA: NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-4T-C))
Overview

Item Details

Part Number 03050BEA
Model CR8DSFUI4TC4
Card type SFU
Appearance

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050BEA&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC4#matchRelation

indicator button



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred and
it cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware), or
the card has
generated an
alarm
because the
memory size
is not equal
to the
standard
specification.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)



seconds until the
the card.

removed using
remove the wrenches
by number 3 in the
figure) on the SFU.


of various boards.

reliability.

1 to 8.

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.3.12 CR8DSFUI4TC4 (03050BEA-001: NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-C))
Overview
Item Details

Part Number 03050BEA-001
Model CR8DSFUI4TC4
Card type SFU

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050BEA-001&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC4#matchRelation


indicator button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred and
it cannot be
rectified
automatically
(critical alarm
about
hardware), or
the card has
generated an
alarm
because the
memory size
is not equal
to the
standard
specification.


power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


seconds until the
the card.

removed using
remove the wrenches
by number 3 in the
figure) on the SFU.



of various boards.

reliability.

1 to 8.

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.3.13 CR8DSFUI4TC6 (03050BEC: NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-4T-D))
Overview

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-D)
Part Number 03050BEC
Model CR8DSFUI4TC6
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-D
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050BEC&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC6#matchRelation


indicator button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


seconds until the
the card.

removed using
remove the wrenches
by number 3 in the
figure) on the SFU.


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.3.14 CR8DSFUI4TC6 (03050BEC-001: NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-D))
Overview

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-D)
Part Number 03050BEC-001
Model CR8DSFUI4TC6
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-D
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050BEC-001&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TC6#matchRelation


indicator button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start.)


seconds until the
the card.

removed using
remove the wrenches
by number 3 in the
figure) on the SFU.


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.3.15 CR8DSFUI4TDE (NetEngine 8000 X4 4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-4T-F))
Overview
Table 3-205 Basic information about the CR8DSFUI4TDE

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-F)
Part Number 03050KAS
Model CR8DSFUI4TDE
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-F
Appearance
Figure 3-119 Appearance of the CR8DSFUI4TDE
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KAS&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TDE#matchRelation

Figure 3-120 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFUI4TDE

indicator button
Table 3-206 Indicators on the CR8DSFUI4TDE


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)
Table 3-207 Buttons on the CR8DSFUI4TDE

OFL Board removal button Before removing a card,

seconds until the
the card.

remove the wrenches
the SFU.

Table 3-208 Functions and features of the CR8DSFUI4TDE


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-209 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFUI4TDE

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 12.46 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.3.16 CR8DSFUI4TDF (NetEngine 8000 X8 4Tbps Switch Fabric

Unit(SFUI-4T-G))
Overview
Table 3-210 Basic information about the CR8DSFUI4TDF

Item Details

Fabric Unit(SFUI-4T-G)
Part Number 03050KAV
Model CR8DSFUI4TDF
Card type SFU
Silkscreen SFUI-4T-G
Appearance
Figure 3-121 Appearance of the CR8DSFUI4TDF
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KAV&productModel=CR8DSFUI4TDF#matchRelation

Figure 3-122 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DSFUI4TDF

indicator button
Table 3-211 Indicators on the CR8DSFUI4TDF


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)
Table 3-212 Buttons on the CR8DSFUI4TDF


seconds until the
the board.

remove the wrenches
the SFU.

Table 3-213 Functions and features of the CR8DSFUI4TDF


voltage.

reliability.

1 to 8.
Table 3-214 Technical specifications of the CR8DSFUI4TDF

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (1.67 in. x 22.04 in. x 9.20 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.4 VSUI-400

3.5.4.1 CR8DVSUIK0C3 (Integrated Service Unit 400(VSUI-400-E))
Overview
Table 3-215 Basic information about the CR8DVSUIK0C3

Item Details
Description Integrated Service Unit 400(VSUI-400-

E)
Part Number 03050LDT
Model CR8DVSUIK0C3
Card type Fixed Board
Silkscreen VSUI-400-E
Appearance
Figure 3-123 Appearance of the CR8DVSUIK0C3
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LDT&productModel=CR8DVSUIK0C3#matchRelation
Figure 3-124 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DVSUIK0C3

Table 3-216 Indicators on the CR8DVSUIK0C3

RUN(G)/ Running Green Steady on The card has

system
software is
not running.
Green Slow blinking, The system is

once every 2 running
Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

Table 3-217 Buttons on the CR8DVSUIK0C3
OFL Board removal button To remove a board, hold

down the OFL button for
about 6s until the
RUN/ALM/OFL indicator
turns on, and then
remove the board.
Table 3-218 Functions and features of the CR8DVSUIK0C3
Basic function Supports 400 Gbit/s line-rate universal

service processing capability.
Reliability and availability Hot swappable.
Restrictions and remarks If only SFU1 and SFU2 are installed on

the device, the board does not support
traffic forwarding and cannot work
properly.
Workaround: When the board is
installed, at least one SFU in slots
SFU3 to SFU8 must work normally.
FlexE supported No
Link protocol -
Table 3-219 Technical specifications of the CR8DVSUIK0C3
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)
Dimensions with packaging (H x W x 260.0 mm x 635.0 mm x 845.0 mm

D) [mm(in.)] (10.24 in. x 25.0 in. x 33.27 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
Switching capacity 800 Gbit/s
3.5.5 LPUF-1T
3.5.5.1 CR8DLPUFT171 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit (LPUF-1T))
Overview
Table 3-220 Basic information about the CR8DLPUFT171

Item Details
Description Flexible Card Line Processing Unit

(LPUF-1T)
Part Number 03050LCT
Model CR8DLPUFT171
Card type Mother Flexible Board
Silkscreen LPUF-1T
Appearance
Figure 3-125 Appearance of the CR8DLPUFT171

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LCT&productModel=CR8DLPUFT171#matchRelation
Figure 3-126 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DLPUFT171
Table 3-221 Indicators on the CR8DLPUFT171

RUN(G)/ Running Green Steady on The board is

ALM(R)/ status powered on,
OFL(Y) indicator but the
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)
Table 3-222 Buttons on the CR8DLPUFT171


remove the board.

Table 3-223 Functions and features of the CR8DLPUFT171
Basic function The board provides two flexible

subcard slots on the line side. Each slot
supports a maximum bandwidth of
500 Gbit/s.
Reliability and availability Hot swappable
Restrictions and remarks 1. In 4-SFU mode (SFUs 3, 5, 6, and 8),

the bandwidth is 1 Tbit/ when four
SFUs are installed, and the bandwidth
is 800 Gbit/s when three SFUs (N+1
backup) are installed.
2. The default mode is 8-SFU mode.
You can run the set sfu mode sfu-4/
sfu-8 command in the system view to
switch to the 4-SFU/8-SFU mode
(switching is supported only by the 1T
bundle).
Table 3-224 Technical specifications of the CR8DLPUFT171
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 23.23 in. x 29.53 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 16-core 2.0 GHz
SDRAM 16GB

Item Specification
Storage 1GB
3.5.5.2 CR8DLPUFT181 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit E(LPUF-1T-E))
Overview
Table 3-225 Basic information about the CR8DLPUFT181

Item Details

E(LPUF-1T-E)
Part Number 03050LCU
Model CR8DLPUFT181
Silkscreen LPUF-1T-E
Appearance
Figure 3-127 Appearance of the CR8DLPUFT181
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LCU&productModel=CR8DLPUFT181#matchRelation

Figure 3-128 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DLPUFT181
Table 3-226 Indicators on the CR8DLPUFT181


software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)
Table 3-227 Buttons on the CR8DLPUFT181

remove the board.
Table 3-228 Functions and features of the CR8DLPUFT181
Basic function The board provides two flexible

subcard slots on the line side. Each slot
supports a maximum bandwidth of
500 Gbit/s.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default mode is 8-SFU mode.

You can run the set sfu mode sfu-4/
sfu-8 command in the system view to
switch to the 4-SFU/8-SFU mode.
(switching is supported only by the 1T
bundle).

Table 3-229 Technical specifications of the CR8DLPUFT181
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 23.23 in. x 29.53 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 16-core 2.0 GHz
SDRAM 16GB
Storage 1GB
3.5.6 LPUI-1T3
3.5.6.1 CR8DEANEJXD1 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM))
Overview
Table 3-230 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJXD1
Item Details
Description 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)
Part Number 03050KBL
Model CR8DEANEJXD1

Item Details
Silkscreen LPUI-1T3-CM
10x100G-QSFP28-36×10GE-SFP+
Appearance
Figure 3-129 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJXD1
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KBL&productModel=CR8DEANEJXD1#matchRelation
Figure 3-130 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJXD1

Table 3-231 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJXD1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

Breakout 0–3 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0–3:

indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.
0–45 Port indicator Green Steady on The link is up.
Green Blinking Data is being

transmitted or
received.
Green Off The link is

down.

Table 3-232 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJXD1


seconds until the
the board.
Breakout Breakout button When you press the

button, the breakout
indicators stop status
cycling and remain in the
current status. Then,
each time you press the
indicators' status
switches. If you do not
press the button in 60
seconds, the indicators
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-233 Ports on the CR8DEANEJXD1

Components
0~35 SFP28/SFP+/SFP Interface for 155Mbps eSFP

inputting and BIDI Optical
outputting 10G Module
LAN/WAN or GE 125M~2.67Gbps
optical signals. eSFP DWDM
Some interfaces Optical Module
support GE
electrical 1Gbps Electrical
modules. For Module
details, see the 1.25Gbps eSFP
Restrictions and Optical Module
remarks field in 1.25Gbps eSFP
Table 6. CWDM Optical
Interface for Module
inputting and 1.25Gbps eSFP
outputting 25GE BIDI Optical
or 10G LAN/WAN Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components
36–45 QSFP28/QSFP+ Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

inputting and Optical Module
outputting 50Gbps QSFP28
100GE/50GE/ Optical Module
40GE optical
signals 50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-234 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJXD1

Attributes Details
Working mode Full-duplex
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP,

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-235 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJXD1

Basic function The board provides ten 100G QSFP28

ports and thirty-six 25GE SFP28 ports
on the line side. The rate of each
QSFP28 port is 100 Gbit/s/50 Gbit/s/40
Gbit/s, and the rate of each SFP28 port
is 25 Gbit/s/10 Gbit/s/1 Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks The 36*25G interfaces can work in

25GE, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN or GE
mode.
2. Starting from port 0, every four
adjacent ports form a port group. Each
port group supports two working
modes:
25GE/10GE mode (default): In this
mode, ports in a port group can be
configured to work in 25GE/10GE
ports.
10GE/GE mode (which can be
switched using the port-mode card-id
group-id command in the slot view): In
this mode, ports in a port group can
be configured to work in 10GE or GE
mode. These ports can switch between
10GE LAN and 10GE WAN by group.
Mixed use of 10GE LAN and 10GE
WAN in one group is not allowed.
3. 10GE WAN interfaces support only
the master clock.
4. 25GE ports use SFP28 optical
modules, 10GE ports use SFP+ optical
modules, and GE ports use SFP optical
modules. Electrical modules are
supported only by some ports (18, 21,
24, 27, 30, and 33).
5. The default rate of a port is 100
Gbit/s. Each port supports 100GE/
50GE/40GE/4x25GE/4x10GE. If the
port transmission rate of the optical
module does not match the default
rate, you can run the port split
command to change the rate.
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
bonded into a 200G port through
FlexE. 400G bonding is not supported.
7. A fiber extractor is required to
remove and insert a fiber.
8. Before removing or inserting a
board using an ejector lever, remove
the optical modules (2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17,
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43
and 45) close to the ejector lever.

Breakout supported Yes, supported by 100G ports

To enable the breakout function on a
port, run the port split command.
Interface rate auto-sensing supported If the 25G mode is configured, 10GE/

25GE auto-sensing is supported. If the
10G mode is configured, GE/10GE
auto-sensing is supported.
Not supported by 100Gbps QSF28
ports.
FlexE supported Yes

Physical ports 36 and 37 can be added
to the same group. port-id ranges from
1000 to 3000. A maximum of 10 FlexE
clients can be created.
Physical port 44 can be added to one
group. port-id ranges from 1000 to
3000. A maximum of 10 FlexE clients
can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-236 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJXD1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.6.2 CR8DEANEJXD9 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM))
Overview
Table 3-237 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJXD9

Item Details

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)
Part Number 03050LLA
Model CR8DEANEJXD9
Appearance
Figure 3-131 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJXD9

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LLA&productModel=CR8DEANEJXD9#matchRelation
Figure 3-132 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJXD9
Table 3-238 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJXD9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-239 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJXD9


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-240 Ports on the CR8DEANEJXD9

Components
0–35 SFP+/SFP Interface for 155Mbps eSFP

support GE
modules. For Module
outputting 10G BIDI Optical
LAN/WAN optical Module
signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-241 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJXD9

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-242 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJXD9

Basic function The line side of the board provides 10

100G QSFP28 ports and 36 10GE SFP+
ports. The rate of each QSFP28 port is
100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s, and
the rate of each SFP+ port is 10 Gbit/s
or 1 Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks 1. A 36*10G interface can work in any

of the following modes: 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN, and GE.
modes:
10GE mode (default): In this mode,
each port in a port group can be
configured as a 10GE port.
configured using the port-mode card-
id group-id command in the slot view):
In this mode, each port in a port group
can be configured as a 10GE/GE port.
In each port group, 10GE LAN or 10GE
WAN is switched by group. The
combination of 10GE LAN and 10GE
WAN is not supported.
the master clock.
4. SFP+ optical modules are used for
10GE ports, SFP optical modules are
used for GE ports, and electrical
modules are supported by some ports
(18, 21, 24, 27, 30, and 33).
port transmission rate of an optical
command to switch the transmission
rate.
6. {36, 37}, {38, 39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43},
{44, 45}: every two 100G ports can be
remove or insert an optical fiber.
8. Before inserting or removing a
the optical module (2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17,
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43 or
45) close to the ejector lever.


Interface rate auto-sensing supported In 10G mode, GE/10GE auto-sensing is

supported.
Not supported by 100 Gbps QSFP28
ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-243 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJXD9
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.6.3 CR8DEANEJXDM (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec + 36-Port

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-
CM))
Overview
Table 3-244 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJXDM
Item Details
Description 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec

+ 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
MACsec Integrated Line Processing
Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)
Part Number 03050KBK
Model CR8DEANEJXDM
Appearance
Figure 3-133 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJXDM

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KBK&productModel=CR8DEANEJXDM#matchRelation
Figure 3-134 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJXDM
Table 3-245 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJXDM


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-246 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJXDM


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-247 Ports on the CR8DEANEJXDM

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-248 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJXDM

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-249 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJXDM




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-250 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJXDM

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.6.4 CR8DEANEJXDQ (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec + 36-Port

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) MACsec Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-
CM))
Overview
Table 3-251 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJXDQ

Item Details

+ 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
MACsec Integrated Line Processing
Unit CM(LPUI-1T3-CM)
Part Number 03050LLC
Model CR8DEANEJXDQ
Appearance
Figure 3-135 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJXDQ

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LLC&productModel=CR8DEANEJXDQ#matchRelation
Figure 3-136 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJXDQ
Table 3-252 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJXDQ


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.
0–45 Port indicator Green Steady on The link is Up.

transmitted
and received.
Green Steady off The link is

Down.

Table 3-253 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJXDQ


remove the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-254 Ports on the CR8DEANEJXDQ

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
outputting 10G BIDI Optical
LAN/WAN optical Module
signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-255 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJXDQ

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-256 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJXDQ

Basic function The line side of the board provides 10

100G QSFP28 ports and 36 10GE SFP+
ports. The rate of each QSFP28 port is
100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s, and
the rate of each SFP+ port is 10 Gbit/s
or 1 Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks 1. A 36*10G interface can work in any

of the following modes: 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN, and GE.
modes:
10GE mode (default): In this mode,
each port in a port group can be
configured as a 10GE port.
In this mode, each port in a port group
can be configured as a 10GE/GE port.
In each port group, 10GE LAN or 10GE
WAN is switched by group. The
the master clock.
(18, 21, 24, 27, 30, and 33).
port transmission rate of an optical
rate.
6. {36, 37}, {38, 39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43},
{44, 45}: every two 100G ports can be
8. Before inserting or removing a
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43 or
45) close to the ejector lever.


Interface rate auto-sensing supported In 10G mode, GE/10GE auto-sensing is

supported.
ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-257 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJXDQ
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.7 LPUF-2T
3.5.7.1 CR8DLPUFT0D1 (Flexible Card Line Processing Unit (LPUF-2T))
Overview
Table 3-258 Basic information about the CR8DLPUFT0D1
Item Details

(LPUF-2T)
Part Number 03050LCV
Model CR8DLPUFT0D1
Silkscreen LPUF-2T
Appearance
Figure 3-137 Appearance of the CR8DLPUFT0D1

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LCV&productModel=CR8DLPUFT0D1#matchRelation
Figure 3-138 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DLPUFT0D1
Table 3-259 Indicators on the CR8DLPUFT0D1


software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)
Table 3-260 Buttons on the CR8DLPUFT0D1


remove the board.

Table 3-261 Functions and features of the CR8DLPUFT0D1
Basic function The line side of the board provides two

flexible sub-slots, each of which
supports a maximum bandwidth of 1
Tbit/s.
Table 3-262 Technical specifications of the CR8DLPUFT0D1
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 23.23 in. x 29.53 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU 16-core 2.0 GHz
SDRAM 16GB
Storage 1GB
3.5.8 LPUI-2T
3.5.8.1 CR8D00EENBC1 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))

Overview
Table 3-263 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBC1

Item Details
Description 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050BDG
Model CR8D00EENBC1
Silkscreen LPUI-2T-CM
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-139 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBC1
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050BDG&productModel=CR8D00EENBC1#matchRelation

Figure 3-140 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBC1
1. RUN(G)/ 2. Breakout 3. Port indicator 4. OFL button

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button
Table 3-264 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBC1

system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

Breakout 0~3 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0~3:

indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.
0~19 Port indicator Green Steady on The link is up.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-265 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBC1


button for about 6
seconds until the OFL
indicator comes on.
the board.
Breakout Breakout button Interface splitting

keyboard.
When you press the
button, the Breakout
indicators' status
press the button in 60s,
the Breakout indicators
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-141 Ports on the CR8D00EENBC1
1. Port for inputting and outputting optical signals

Table 3-266 Ports on the CR8D00EENBC1

Components
0~19 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+

and outputting Optical Module
100GE/50GE/ 50Gbps QSFP28
40GE optical Optical Module
signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-267 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBC1

Attributes Details
Working mode Full-duplex mode

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-268 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBC1

Basic function Provides 20 100GE QSFP28 interfaces

interface can be 100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s,
or 40 Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks 1. Before removing or inserting a

17, and 19) close to the ejector lever.
2. The default rate of an interface is
100 Gbit/s. Each interface supports
100GE/50GE/40GE/4x25GE/4x10GE. If
the transmission rate of the interface
on the optical module does not match
the default rate, you can run the port
split command to change the rate.
3. Interfaces 0, 3, 10, and 13 do not
support FlexE, and the other interfaces
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}. Every four 100G
interfaces can be bundled into a 400G
interface.
Breakout supported Yes.

FlexE supported Yes

Physical ports 1, 2, 4, and 5 can be
added to the same group. port-id
ranges from 20 to 49 and from 1000
to 3000. A maximum of 30 FlexE
Physical ports 11, 12, 14, and 15 can
be added to the same group. port-id

Table 3-269 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBC1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.2 CR8D00EENBC3 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview

Item Details

Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-
CM)
Part Number 03050BDK
Model CR8D00EENBC3
Silkscreen LPUI-2T-L-CM
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050BDK&productModel=CR8D00EENBC3#matchRelation

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


interface can be 100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s,
or 40 Gbit/s.


the optical modules (involving
interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
close to the ejector lever.
100 Gbps. Each interface supports
100GE/50GE/40GE/4x25GE/4x10GE/
2x50G. If the transmission rate of the
interface on the optical module does
not match the default rate, you can
run the port split command to change
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G
interface through FlexE.

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.3 CR8D00EENBC7 (03050DFL: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview

Item Details

Part Number 03050DFL
Model CR8D00EENBC7
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DFL&productModel=CR8D00EENBC7#matchRelation

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Basic function Provides twenty 100GE QSFP28

interfaces on the line side. Each
interface can work at the rate of 100
Gbps/50 Gbps/40 Gbps.


interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.4 CR8D00EENBC7 (03050DFL-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Overview

Item Details

Part Number 03050DFL-001
Model CR8D00EENBC7
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DFL-001&productModel=CR8D00EENBC7#matchRelation
1. RUN(G)/ALM(R)/ 2. Port indicator 3. OFL button

OFL(Y) status indicator



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

Model CR8D00EENBC7
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components
0 to 19 QSFP28/QSFP+ Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

Model CR8D00EENBC7
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.7 CR8D00EENBC9 (03050DFQ: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050DFQ
Model CR8D00EENBC9
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DFQ&productModel=CR8D00EENBC9#matchRelation


status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button

system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components
0 to 19 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.8 CR8D00EENBC9 (03050DFQ-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28

Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview

Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050DFQ-001
Model CR8D00EENBC9
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DFQ-001&productModel=CR8D00EENBC9#matchRelation




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

CM)
Model CR8D00EENBC9
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G

FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

CM)
Model CR8D00EENBC9
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.11 CR8D00EENBCF (03050DRX: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec

Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-333 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBCF
Item Details

Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050DRX
Model CR8D00EENBCF
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-167 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBCF
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DRX&productModel=CR8D00EENBCF#matchRelation

Figure 3-168 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBCF
Table 3-334 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBCF


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-335 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBCF


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-169 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCF
Table 3-336 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCF

Components

100GE/40GE 100Gbps QSFP28
optical signals Optical Module

Table 3-337 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBCF

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-338 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBCF


interface is 100/40 Gbit/s.

13, 15, 17, 19) close to the ejector
lever.
Gbit/s. Each port supports 100GE,
40GE, 4x25GE, and 4x10GE. If the
transmission rate of the interface on
the optical module does not match the
default rate, you can run the port split
rate.

FlexE supported No

Table 3-339 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBCF

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.12 CR8D00EENBCF (03050DRX-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec

Overview
Table 3-340 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBCF

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050DRX-001
Model CR8D00EENBCF
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-170 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBCF
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DRX-001&productModel=CR8D00EENBCF#matchRelation
Figure 3-171 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBCF
Table 3-341 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBCF

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-342 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBCF


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-172 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCF
Table 3-343 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCF

Components


Table 3-344 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBCF

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-345 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBCF



lever.
rate.

FlexE supported No

Table 3-346 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBCF

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.13 CR8D00EENBCG (03050DRY: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec

Overview
Table 3-347 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBCG

Item Details

Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050DRY
Model CR8D00EENBCG
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-173 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBCG
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DRY&productModel=CR8D00EENBCG#matchRelation
Figure 3-174 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBCG
Table 3-348 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBCG

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

Breakout 0–3 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0~3:

indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-349 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBCG


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-175 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCG
Table 3-350 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCG

Components
0–19 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+


Table 3-351 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBCG

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-352 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBCG



lever.
transmission rate of the optical
module in use does not match the
default port rate, you can run the port
split command to change the
transmission rate.

FlexE supported No

Table 3-353 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBCG

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU Hi1620s
SDRAM 32GB
3.5.8.14 CR8D00EENBCG (03050DRY-001: 20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 MACsec

Overview
Table 3-354 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBCG

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050DRY-001
Model CR8D00EENBCG
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-176 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBCG
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DRY-001&productModel=CR8D00EENBCG#matchRelation
Figure 3-177 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBCG
Table 3-355 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBCG

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

Breakout 0–3 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0~3:

indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout

indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-356 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBCG


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-178 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCG
Table 3-357 Ports on the CR8D00EENBCG

Components


Table 3-358 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBCG

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-359 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBCG



lever.
module in use does not match the
default port rate, you can run the port
split command to change the
transmission rate.

FlexE supported No

Table 3-360 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBCG

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
CPU Hi1620s
SDRAM 32GB
3.5.8.15 CR8D00EENBD7 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-361 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBD7

Item Details

Part Number 03050KPB
Model CR8D00EENBD7
20×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-179 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBD7
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KPB&productModel=CR8D00EENBD7#matchRelation
Figure 3-180 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBD7
Table 3-362 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBD7

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-363 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBD7

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-364 Ports on the CR8D00EENBD7

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-365 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBD7
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-366 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBD7



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes

Table 3-367 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBD7

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.16 CR8D00EENBD9 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-368 Basic information about the CR8D00EENBD9
Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050KPL
Model CR8D00EENBD9
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-181 Appearance of the CR8D00EENBD9
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KPL&productModel=CR8D00EENBD9#matchRelation

Figure 3-182 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EENBD9
Table 3-369 Indicators on the CR8D00EENBD9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-370 Buttons on the CR8D00EENBD9

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-371 Ports on the CR8D00EENBD9

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-372 Port attributes about the CR8D00EENBD9
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-373 Functions and features of the CR8D00EENBD9



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes

Table 3-374 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EENBD9

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.17 CR8D00LRXFC6 (03050DMG: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-375 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFC6
Item Details
Description 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing
Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050DMG
Model CR8D00LRXFC6
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-183 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFC6
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DMG&productModel=CR8D00LRXFC6#matchRelation

Figure 3-184 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFC6

Table 3-376 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFC6


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.

down.
Table 3-377 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFC6


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports
Figure 3-185 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFC6

Table 3-378 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFC6

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-379 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFC6

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-380 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFC6

Basic function Provides 72 x 25GE SFP28 ports on the

line side. Each SFP28 port can work at
the rate of 25 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, or 1
Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks 1. All ports can work in 25GE, 10GE

LAN, 10GE WAN or GE mode.
modes:
configured as 25GE/10GE ports.
In this mode, ports in a port group can
mode. Ports can switch between 10GE
LAN and 10GE WAN by group. Mixed
use of 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN in
one group is not allowed.
the master clock mode.
SFP28 optical modules are used for
25GE ports, SFP+ optical modules are
used for 10GE ports, and SFP optical
modules are used for GE ports. Some
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
45, 48 and 51) support electrical
modules.
remove or insert a fiber.
the optical module close to the ejector
lever (involving ports 2, 5, 8, 11, 14,
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).
Interface rate auto-sensing supported In 25G mode, 10GE/25GE auto-sensing

supported; In 10G mode, GE/10GE
auto-sensing supported.
FlexE supported No

Table 3-381 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFC6

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.18 CR8D00LRXFC6 (03050DMG-001: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/

Overview

Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050DMG-001
Model CR8D00LRXFC6
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DMG-001&productModel=CR8D00LRXFC6#matchRelation




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports


Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



Gbit/s.

modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Model CR8D00LRXFC6

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports


Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



Gbit/s.

modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Model CR8D00LRXFC6

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

Ports

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


Gbit/s.


modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).

FlexE supported No


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.21 CR8D00LRXFC8 (03050DMJ: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview

Item Details

Unit L(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050DMJ
Model CR8D00LRXFC8
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DMJ&productModel=CR8D00LRXFC8#matchRelation




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports


Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



Gbit/s.

modes:
● 25GE/10GE mode (default): In this
● 10GE/GE mode (which can be
configured using the port-mode
card-id group-id command in the
slot view): In this mode, ports in a
port group can be configured to
work in 10GE or GE mode. Ports
can switch between 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN by group. Mixed use of
10GE LAN and 10GE WAN in one
group is not allowed.
4. SFP28 optical modules are used for
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.22 CR8D00LRXFC8 (03050DMJ-001: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/

GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Item Details

Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050DMJ-001
Model CR8D00LRXFC8

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DMJ-001&productModel=CR8D00LRXFC8#matchRelation




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports


Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



Gbit/s.

modes:
● 25GE/10GE mode (default): In this
● 10GE/GE mode (which can be
configured using the port-mode
card-id group-id command in the
slot view): In this mode, ports in a
port group can be configured to
work in 10GE or GE mode. Ports
can switch between 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN by group. Mixed use of
10GE LAN and 10GE WAN in one
group is not allowed.
4. SFP28 optical modules are used for
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview
Item Details

Model CR8D00LRXFC8

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.




system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the board.
Ports


Components
0–71 SFP28/SFP+/SFP Interface for 155Mbps eSFP

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



Gbit/s.

modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview
Item Details

Model CR8D00LRXFC8

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the board.

Ports

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
1.25/9.953/10.312
5bps SFP+ Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


Gbit/s.


modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).

FlexE supported No


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.25 CR8D00LRXFCP (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Overview
Table 3-431 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFCP

Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Model CR8D00LRXFCP
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-205 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFCP
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059074&productModel=CR8D00LRXFCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-206 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCP


Table 3-432 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFCP


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-433 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCP


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports
Figure 3-207 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCP

Table 3-434 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCP

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
1.25/9.953/10.312
5 Gbit/s SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-435 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFCP

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-436 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFCP


Gbit/s.


modes: 25GE/10GE (default). In this
mode, each port in a port group can
be configured as a 25GE/10GE port.
10GE/GE mode (can be switched using
the port-mode card-id group-id
command in the slot view): In this
mode, each port in each port group
can be configured as a 10GE or GE
port. In each port group, 10GE LAN or
10GE WAN is switched by group. The
3. 10GE WAN ports support only the
master clock.
modules. Some electrical ports (18, 21,
24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42, 45, 48 and
51) support SFP28 optical modules,
SFP+ optical modules, and SFP optical
modules.
remove and insert optical fibers.
6. Remove the optical modules (2, 5, 8,
11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38,
41, 44, 47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68
and 71) near the ejector levers before
using the ejector levers to insert or
remove the board.
Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE or 10GE/25GE port

rate switching and auto-sensing.
FlexE supported No

Table 3-437 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFCP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.26 CR8D00LRXFCQ (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Integrated Line Processing Unit L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-438 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFCQ

Item Details

Model CR8D00LRXFCQ
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-208 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFCQ
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059272&productModel=CR8D00LRXFCQ#matchRelation
Figure 3-209 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCQ


Table 3-439 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFCQ


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-440 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCQ


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports
Figure 3-210 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCQ

Table 3-441 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCQ

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-442 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFCQ

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-443 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFCQ


Gbit/s.

modes: 25GE/10GE mode (default). In
this mode, each port in each port
group can be configured as 25GE/
10GE. 10GE/GE mode (which can be
mode. Each port group can be
switched between 10GE LAN and 10GE
WAN. The combination of 10GE LAN
and 10GE WAN is not supported.
the master clock.
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
45, 48 and 51) on electrical modules
support SFP28 optical modules.
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44, 47,
50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68 or 71) close
to the ejector lever.
Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE or 10GE/25GE port

rate switching and auto-sensing.

FlexE supported No
Table 3-444 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFCQ
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.27 CR8D00LRXFCT (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Overview
Table 3-445 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFCT
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050AWV
Model CR8D00LRXFCT
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-211 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFCT
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050AWV&productModel=CR8D00LRXFCT#matchRelation
Figure 3-212 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCT


Table 3-446 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFCT


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-447 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCT


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports
Figure 3-213 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCT

Table 3-448 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCT

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
1.25/9.953/10.312
5 Gbit/s SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-449 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFCT

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-450 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFCT


Gbit/s.


modes: 25GE/10GE (default). In this
mode, each port in a port group can
be configured as a 25GE/10GE port.
10GE/GE mode (can be switched using
the port-mode card-id group-id
command in the slot view): In this
mode, each port in each port group
can be configured as a 10GE or GE
port. In each port group, 10GE LAN or
10GE WAN is switched by group. The
3. 10GE WAN ports support only the
master clock.
modules. Some electrical ports (18, 21,
24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42, 45, 48 and
51) support SFP28 optical modules,
SFP+ optical modules, and SFP optical
modules.
remove and insert optical fibers.
6. Remove the optical modules (2, 5, 8,
11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38,
41, 44, 47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68
and 71) near the ejector levers before
using the ejector levers to insert or
remove the board.

FlexE supported No

Table 3-451 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFCT

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.28 CR8D00LRXFCV (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Integrated Line Processing Unit L(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-452 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFCV

Item Details

Part Number 03050AWX
Model CR8D00LRXFCV
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-214 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFCV
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050AWX&productModel=CR8D00LRXFCV#matchRelation
Figure 3-215 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCV


Table 3-453 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFCV


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-454 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFCV


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports
Figure 3-216 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCV

Table 3-455 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFCV

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-456 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFCV

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-457 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFCV


Gbit/s.

modes: 25GE/10GE mode (default). In
this mode, each port in each port
group can be configured as 25GE/
10GE. 10GE/GE mode (which can be
mode. Each port group can be
switched between 10GE LAN and 10GE
WAN. The combination of 10GE LAN
and 10GE WAN is not supported.
the master clock.
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
45, 48 and 51) on electrical modules
support SFP28 optical modules.
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44, 47,
50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68 or 71) close
to the ejector lever.


FlexE supported No
Table 3-458 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFCV
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.29 CR8D00LRXFD6 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Overview
Table 3-459 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFD6
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050KNV
Model CR8D00LRXFD6

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-217 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFD6
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KNV&productModel=CR8D00LRXFD6#matchRelation
Figure 3-218 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFD6

Table 3-460 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFD6


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-461 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFD6


seconds until the
the board.

Ports
Table 3-462 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFD6

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-463 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFD6

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-464 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFD6


Gbit/s.


modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).

FlexE supported No

Table 3-465 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFD6

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.30 CR8D00LRXFD8 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Overview
Table 3-466 Basic information about the CR8D00LRXFD8

Item Details

Part Number 03050KPG
Model CR8D00LRXFD8
72×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-219 Appearance of the CR8D00LRXFD8
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KPG&productModel=CR8D00LRXFD8#matchRelation
Figure 3-220 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00LRXFD8
Table 3-467 Indicators on the CR8D00LRXFD8

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-468 Buttons on the CR8D00LRXFD8


seconds until the
the board.

Ports
Table 3-469 Ports on the CR8D00LRXFD8

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
1.25/9.953/10.312
5bps SFP+ Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

Table 3-470 Port attributes about the CR8D00LRXFD8

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-471 Functions and features of the CR8D00LRXFD8


Gbit/s.


modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).

FlexE supported No

Table 3-472 Technical specifications of the CR8D00LRXFD8

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.31 CR8DEANCJXCB (03050HGV: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port

25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-473 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXCB

Item Details

25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)
CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050HGV
Model CR8DEANCJXCB
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-221 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXCB
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050HGV&productModel=CR8DEANCJXCB#matchRelation
Figure 3-222 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCB
Table 3-474 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXCB

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-475 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCB


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-223 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCB

Table 3-476 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCB

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-477 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXCB

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-478 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXCB




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-479 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXCB
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.32 CR8DEANCJXCB (03050HGV-001: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-

Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit
CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-480 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXCB

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050HGV-001
Model CR8DEANCJXCB
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-224 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXCB

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050HGV-001&productModel=CR8DEANCJXCB#matchRelation
Figure 3-225 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCB
Table 3-481 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXCB


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted
and received.

Down.

Table 3-482 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCB


remove the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-483 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCB

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-484 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXCB

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-485 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXCB




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



is supported. In 10G mode, GE/10GE
ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-486 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXCB

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.33 CR8DEANCJXCC (03050HTA: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port

25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-487 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXCC

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050HTA
Model CR8DEANCJXCC
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-226 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXCC

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050HTA&productModel=CR8DEANCJXCC#matchRelation
Figure 3-227 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCC
Table 3-488 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXCC


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-489 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCC


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-228 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCC

Table 3-490 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCC

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-491 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXCC

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-492 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXCC




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43


FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-493 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXCC

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.34 CR8DEANCJXCC (03050HTA-001: 10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-

Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L
CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-494 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXCC

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050HTA-001
Model CR8DEANCJXCC
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-229 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXCC
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050HTA-001&productModel=CR8DEANCJXCC#matchRelation
Figure 3-230 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCC
Table 3-495 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXCC


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-496 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXCC


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-497 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXCC

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-498 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXCC

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-499 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXCC




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43


FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-500 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXCC

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.35 CR8DEANCJXDB (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-501 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXDB
Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-CM)
Part Number 03050KPF
Model CR8DEANCJXDB
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-231 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXDB
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050KPF&productModel=CR8DEANCJXDB#matchRelation
Figure 3-232 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXDB
Table 3-502 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXDB


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted
and received.

Down.

Table 3-503 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXDB


remove the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-504 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXDB

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-505 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXDB

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-506 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXDB




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-507 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXDB

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.36 CR8DEANCJXDC (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-508 Basic information about the CR8DEANCJXDC
Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050KQL
Model CR8DEANCJXDC
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-233 Appearance of the CR8DEANCJXDC

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KQL&productModel=CR8DEANCJXDC#matchRelation
Figure 3-234 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANCJXDC
Table 3-509 Indicators on the CR8DEANCJXDC


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-510 Buttons on the CR8DEANCJXDC


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-511 Ports on the CR8DEANCJXDC

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-512 Port attributes about the CR8DEANCJXDC

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-513 Functions and features of the CR8DEANCJXDC




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43


FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-514 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANCJXDC

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.37 CR8DEANEJYD1 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-515 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJYD1
Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050JVW
Model CR8DEANEJYD1
Silkscreen LPUI-2T-E-CM
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-235 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJYD1
Version Mapping


display.
keyword=03050JVW&productModel=CR8DEANEJYD1#matchRelation
Figure 3-236 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJYD1
Table 3-516 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJYD1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-517 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJYD1


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-518 Ports on the CR8DEANEJYD1

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-519 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJYD1

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-520 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJYD1




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-521 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJYD1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.38 CR8DEANEJYD9 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 25GE(SFP28)/

10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-522 Basic information about the CR8DEANEJYD9

Item Details

CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050LLE
Model CR8DEANEJYD9
10x100G-QSFP28-36×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-237 Appearance of the CR8DEANEJYD9

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LLE&productModel=CR8DEANEJYD9#matchRelation
Figure 3-238 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANEJYD9
Table 3-523 Indicators on the CR8DEANEJYD9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted
and received.

Down.

Table 3-524 Buttons on the CR8DEANEJYD9


remove the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.

Ports
Table 3-525 Ports on the CR8DEANEJYD9

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-526 Port attributes about the CR8DEANEJYD9

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-527 Functions and features of the CR8DEANEJYD9




mode.
modes:
ports.
the master clock.
24, 27, 30, and 33).
6. Every two 100G ports ({36, 37}, {38,
39}, {40, 41}, {42, 43}, {44, 45}) can be
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43



ports.
FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-528 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANEJYD9

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.39 CR8DEENBFED1 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-529 Basic information about the CR8DEENBFED1
Item Details

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-
CM)
Part Number 03050JVT
Model CR8DEENBFED1
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-239 Appearance of the CR8DEENBFED1

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050JVT&productModel=CR8DEENBFED1#matchRelation
Figure 3-240 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEENBFED1

Table 3-530 Indicators on the CR8DEENBFED1

system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-531 Buttons on the CR8DEENBFED1


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-532 Ports on the CR8DEENBFED1

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-533 Port attributes about the CR8DEENBFED1

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-534 Functions and features of the CR8DEENBFED1



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes

Table 3-535 Technical specifications of the CR8DEENBFED1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.40 CR8DEENBFED9 (20-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-536 Basic information about the CR8DEENBFED9
Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050LLV
Model CR8DEENBFED9
20×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-241 Appearance of the CR8DEENBFED9
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050LLV&productModel=CR8DEENBFED9#matchRelation

Figure 3-242 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEENBFED9
Table 3-537 Indicators on the CR8DEENBFED9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-538 Buttons on the CR8DEENBFED9

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-539 Ports on the CR8DEENBFED9

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-540 Port attributes about the CR8DEENBFED9
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-541 Functions and features of the CR8DEENBFED9



interfaces 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 19)
the rate.
support FlexE.
4. {1, 2, 4, 5}, {6, 7, 8, 9}, {11, 12, 14,
15}, {16, 17, 18, 19}: Every four 100G


FlexE supported Yes

Table 3-542 Technical specifications of the CR8DEENBFED9

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

3.5.8.41 CR8DERYBFED1 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-543 Basic information about the CR8DERYBFED1
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050JVR
Model CR8DERYBFED1
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-243 Appearance of the CR8DERYBFED1
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050JVR&productModel=CR8DERYBFED1#matchRelation

Figure 3-244 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DERYBFED1

Table 3-544 Indicators on the CR8DERYBFED1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.

down.
Table 3-545 Buttons on the CR8DERYBFED1


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Ports

Table 3-546 Ports on the CR8DERYBFED1

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-547 Port attributes about the CR8DERYBFED1

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-548 Functions and features of the CR8DERYBFED1


Gbit/s.

modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).


FlexE supported No
Table 3-549 Technical specifications of the CR8DERYBFED1
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.8.42 CR8DERYBFED9 (72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP)

Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-550 Basic information about the CR8DERYBFED9
Item Details

Unit CM(LPUI-2T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050LLU
Model CR8DERYBFED9

Item Details
72×25GE-SFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-245 Appearance of the CR8DERYBFED9
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LLU&productModel=CR8DERYBFED9#matchRelation
Figure 3-246 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DERYBFED9

Table 3-551 Indicators on the CR8DERYBFED9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-552 Buttons on the CR8DERYBFED9


seconds until the
the board.

Ports
Table 3-553 Ports on the CR8DERYBFED9

Components

support GE
modules. For Module
optical signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
Table 3-554 Port attributes about the CR8DERYBFED9

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-555 Functions and features of the CR8DERYBFED9


Gbit/s.


modes:
ports (18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 36, 39, 42,
modules.
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44,
47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, and 71).

FlexE supported No

Table 3-556 Technical specifications of the CR8DERYBFED9

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9 LPUI-4T
3.5.9.1 CR8D00EKNBC1 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-557 Basic information about the CR8D00EKNBC1

Item Details

Model CR8D00EKNBC1
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-247 Appearance of the CR8D00EKNBC1
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059993&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC1#matchRelation
Figure 3-248 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EKNBC1

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button

Table 3-558 Indicators on the CR8D00EKNBC1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

Breakout 0~3 Breakout Green Steady on If breakout

indicator indicator X is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-559 Buttons on the CR8D00EKNBC1


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-249 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBC1

Table 3-560 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBC1

Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-561 Port attributes about the CR8D00EKNBC1

Attributes Details
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-562 Functions and features of the CR8D00EKNBC1

Basic function The 40-port 100GBase-QSFP28 fixed

line processing unit provides 40 100GE
QSFP28 ports. Each port can work at
Gbit/s.


board using ejector levers, remove the
optical modules close to the ejector
levers (involving ports 1, 3, 6, 9, 11, 13,
16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
2x50G. If the interface transmission
rate of the optical module in use does
not match the default transmission
rate, run the port split command to
enable the interface breakout function.
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
and 37 do not support FlexE, but other
interfaces support FlexE.
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
36, 38, 39}: Every four 100G interfaces
can be bundled into a 400G interface
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-563 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EKNBC1
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.2 CR8D00EKNBC2 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Item Details

CM)
Model CR8D00EKNBC2

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03059996&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC2#matchRelation

status indicator

5. Breakout - - -
button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


Gbit/s.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.3 CR8D00EKNBC6 (03050DFJ: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Overview

Item Details

Part Number 03050DFJ
Model CR8D00EKNBC6

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DFJ&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC6#matchRelation

status indicator

5. Breakout - - -
button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Basic function Provides forty 100GE QSFP28

interfaces. Each interface can work at
the rate of 100 Gbps/50 Gbps/40 Gbps.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.4 CR8D00EKNBC6 (03050DFJ-001: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Overview

Item Details

Part Number 03050DFJ-001
Model CR8D00EKNBC6

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DFJ-001&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC6#matchRelation



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


the rate of 100 Gbps/50 Gbps/40 Gbps.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

Model CR8D00EKNBC6
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.


system
software is
not running.


Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP


100 Gbps/50 Gbps/40 Gbps.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

Model CR8D00EKNBC6
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
the interface transmission rate of the
optical module in use does not match
the default transmission rate, run the
port split command to enable the
interface breakout function.
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
and 37 do not support FlexE, and
other interfaces support FlexE.
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
36, 38, 39}. Every four 100G interfaces
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.7 CR8D00EKNBC8 (03050DFN: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM))
Overview

Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050DFN
Model CR8D00EKNBC8
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DFN&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC8#matchRelation

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button



system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.8 CR8D00EKNBC8 (03050DFN-001: 40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28

Overview
Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050DFN-001
Model CR8D00EKNBC8

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DFN-001&productModel=CR8D00EKNBC8#matchRelation

status indicator

5. Breakout - - -
button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview
Item Details

CM)
Model CR8D00EKNBC8

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

status indicator

5. Breakout - - -
button


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

Overview

Item Details

CM)
Model CR8D00EKNBC8
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted
and received.

Down.


remove the board.
Breakout Interface splitting button When you press the

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes



Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.11 CR8D00EKNBCP (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-627 Basic information about the CR8D00EKNBCP

Item Details

Model CR8D00EKNBCP
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-275 Appearance of the CR8D00EKNBCP
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059076&productModel=CR8D00EKNBCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-276 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EKNBCP

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button

Table 3-628 Indicators on the CR8D00EKNBCP


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the card is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-629 Buttons on the CR8D00EKNBCP


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-277 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBCP

Table 3-630 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBCP

Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-631 Port attributes about the CR8D00EKNBCP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-632 Functions and features of the CR8D00EKNBCP


Gbit/s.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-633 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EKNBCP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.12 CR8D00EKNBCQ (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Processing Unit L(LPUI-4T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-634 Basic information about the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Item Details

Line Processing Unit L(LPUI-4T-L-CM)
Model CR8D00EKNBCQ

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-278 Appearance of the CR8D00EKNBCQ
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03059276&productModel=CR8D00EKNBCQ#matchRelation
Figure 3-279 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EKNBCQ

status indicator

5. Breakout - - -
button
Table 3-635 Indicators on the CR8D00EKNBCQ


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)

Breakout 0–3 Breakout Green Steady on If breakout

on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X.
For example,
if breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0. If
the port
indicator is
steady on, the
link for
breakout 0 on
the port is up.
If the port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data. If the
port indicator
is off, the link
for breakout 0
on the port is
down.
If breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicator is
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.
If the
breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports.
If a card has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.


down.
Table 3-636 Buttons on the CR8D00EKNBCQ


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.

keyboard.
When you press the
indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-280 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Table 3-637 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Components

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-638 Port attributes about the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-639 Functions and features of the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Basic function Provides 40 100GE QSFP28 ports on

the line side. Each port can work at
Gbit/s.


16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-640 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EKNBCQ

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.13 CR8D00EKNBD6 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-641 Basic information about the CR8D00EKNBD6

Item Details

Part Number 03050KPA
Model CR8D00EKNBD6

Item Details
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-281 Appearance of the CR8D00EKNBD6
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050KPA&productModel=CR8D00EKNBD6#matchRelation
Figure 3-282 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EKNBD6

Table 3-642 Indicators on the CR8D00EKNBD6


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-643 Buttons on the CR8D00EKNBD6

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-644 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBD6

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-645 Port attributes about the CR8D00EKNBD6
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-646 Functions and features of the CR8D00EKNBD6



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-647 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EKNBD6

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.14 CR8D00EKNBD8 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-648 Basic information about the CR8D00EKNBD8

Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050KPH
Model CR8D00EKNBD8
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-283 Appearance of the CR8D00EKNBD8
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KPH&productModel=CR8D00EKNBD8#matchRelation
Figure 3-284 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EKNBD8
Table 3-649 Indicators on the CR8D00EKNBD8

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-650 Buttons on the CR8D00EKNBD8

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-651 Ports on the CR8D00EKNBD8

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-652 Port attributes about the CR8D00EKNBD8
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-653 Functions and features of the CR8D00EKNBD8



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-654 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EKNBD8

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.15 CR8DE4KEFNC0 (03050HGX: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-655 Basic information about the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Item Details
Description 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line
Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM)
Part Number 03050HGX
Model CR8DE4KEFNC0
4×400GE-QSFP-DD+24×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-285 Appearance of the CR8DE4KEFNC0
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050HGX&productModel=CR8DE4KEFNC0#matchRelation
Figure 3-286 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE4KEFNC0
Table 3-656 Indicators on the CR8DE4KEFNC0

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

Breakout 0–7 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0–7

indicator (0-3 available,
4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-657 Buttons on the CR8DE4KEFNC0


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-287 Ports on the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Table 3-658 Ports on the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Components
0–3 QSFP-DD 400GE/200G/ 400Gbps QSFP-

100GE optical DD Optical
signal input and Module
output interfaces 200Gbps QSFP-
(2x100GE DD Optical
interfaces and the Module
corresponding 200
Gbit/s QSFP-DD 100Gbps QSFP28
optical modules Optical Module
are supported
since
V800R022C10)

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-659 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-660 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Basic function The line processing board provides

four 400GE QSFP-DD interfaces and 24
100GE QSFP28 interfaces on the line
side. The rate of each QSFP-DD
interface is 400 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s,
and the rate of each QSFP28 interface
is 100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of a QSFP28 optical

module is 100 Gbit/s, and each
QSFP28 optical module supports
optical module does not match the
default rate, run the port split
2. The default rate of a QSFP-DD port
is 400 Gbit/s, and each port supports
400GE/100GE. If the interface
3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
not support FlexE, but other ports
support FlexE.
4. When a QSFP-DD port is used with
a 400G ZR+ optical module, the short-
term operating temperature ranges
from –5°C to +40°C.
Breakout supported Yes, only 100G interfaces support the

breakout function.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
ranges from 1000 to 3000. A
maximum of 30 FlexE clients can be
created.
created.
created.
created.
Table 3-661 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KEFNC0
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

Item Specification

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.16 CR8DE4KEFNC0 (03050HGX-001: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-

Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-662 Basic information about the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Item Details

Part Number 03050HGX-001
Model CR8DE4KEFNC0
Appearance
Figure 3-288 Appearance of the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050HGX-001&productModel=CR8DE4KEFNC0#matchRelation
Figure 3-289 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE4KEFNC0
Table 3-663 Indicators on the CR8DE4KEFNC0


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.
0 to 15 Port indicator Green Steady on The link is up.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-664 Buttons on the CR8DE4KEFNC0


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-665 Ports on the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-666 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-667 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KEFNC0




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.
Breakout supported Yes. Only 100G interfaces support

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.

Table 3-668 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KEFNC0

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.17 CR8DE4KEFND0 (4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-669 Basic information about the CR8DE4KEFND0

Item Details

Part Number 03050KPC
Model CR8DE4KEFND0

Appearance
Figure 3-290 Appearance of the CR8DE4KEFND0
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KPC&productModel=CR8DE4KEFND0#matchRelation
Figure 3-291 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE4KEFND0
Table 3-670 Indicators on the CR8DE4KEFND0

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-671 Buttons on the CR8DE4KEFND0


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-672 Ports on the CR8DE4KEFND0

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-673 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KEFND0

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-674 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KEFND0




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.

Table 3-675 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KEFND0

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM))
Overview

Item Details

Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050JVV
Model CR8DE4KEFND1

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050JVV&productModel=CR8DE4KEFND1#matchRelation

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM))
Overview

Item Details

Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-E-CM)
Part Number 03050LLX
Model CR8DE4KEFND9

Appearance
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050LLX&productModel=CR8DE4KEFND9#matchRelation

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.



seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.


Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.20 CR8DE4KFBNC2 (03050JFR: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-690 Basic information about the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Item Details

Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM)
Part Number 03050JFR
Model CR8DE4KFBNC2

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050JFR&productModel=CR8DE4KFBNC2#matchRelation
Table 3-691 Indicators on the CR8DE4KFBNC2


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.


in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-692 Buttons on the CR8DE4KFBNC2


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-693 Ports on the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-694 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-695 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KFBNC2




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.
Breakout supported Yes. 400GE interfaces 0 to 3 support

the 1x400GE/1x100GE/2x100GE/
4x100GE split mode, and 100GE
interfaces 4 to 27 support the
1x100GE/1x50GE/1x40GE/4x25GE/
4x10GE split mode.
To enable interface splitting, run the
port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.

Table 3-696 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.21 CR8DE4KFBNC2 (03050JFR-001: 4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-697 Basic information about the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Item Details

Part Number 03050JFR-001
Model CR8DE4KFBNC2

Appearance
Figure 3-296 Appearance of the CR8DE4KFBNC2
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050JFR-001&productModel=CR8DE4KFBNC2#matchRelation
Figure 3-297 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE4KFBNC2
Table 3-698 Indicators on the CR8DE4KFBNC2

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-699 Buttons on the CR8DE4KFBNC2


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-700 Ports on the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-701 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-702 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KFBNC2




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.

4x10GE split mode.
port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.

Table 3-703 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KFBNC2

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.22 CR8DE4KFBND2 (4-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 24-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM (LPUI-4T-L-CM))
Overview
Table 3-704 Basic information about the CR8DE4KFBND2

Item Details

Part Number 03050KQG
Model CR8DE4KFBND2

Appearance
Figure 3-298 Appearance of the CR8DE4KFBND2
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050KQG&productModel=CR8DE4KFBND2#matchRelation
Figure 3-299 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE4KFBND2
Table 3-705 Indicators on the CR8DE4KFBND2

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-706 Buttons on the CR8DE4KFBND2


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-707 Ports on the CR8DE4KFBND2

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-708 Port attributes about the CR8DE4KFBND2

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-709 Functions and features of the CR8DE4KFBND2




3. Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 22, and 25 do
support FlexE.

4x10GE split mode.
port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
created.
created.
created.
created.

Table 3-710 Technical specifications of the CR8DE4KFBND2
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.23 CR8DE8KE8NCP (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM,Enable 8*100GE by
default))
Overview
Table 3-711 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCP
Item Details

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-
CM,Enable 8*100GE by default)
Model CR8DE8KE8NCP

Appearance
Figure 3-300 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCP
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059078&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-301 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCP
1. RUN(G)/ 2. OFL button 3. Breakout 4. Breakout

ALM(R)/OFL(Y) button indicator
status indicator
5. Port indicator - - -

Table 3-712 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCP


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

Breakout 0~7 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0~7

indicator (0~3
available, 4~7
reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has

breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-713 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCP


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-302 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCP

Table 3-714 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCP

Components
0~3, 8~11 QSFP-DD Interface for 400Gbps QSFP-

inputting and DD Optical
outputting Module
400GE/200G/ 200Gbps QSFP-
signals (100GE is Module
supported since
V800R013C00, 100Gbps QSFP28
and 2 x 100G Optical Module
optical modules (supported since
are supported V800R013C00)
since
V800R022C10)
4~7, 12~15 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-715 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-716 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCP

Basic function The LPU provides eight 400GE QSFP-

DD ports and eight 100GE QSFP28
ports. Each QSFP-DD port can work at
the rate of 400 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s.
The port can work at the rate of 100
Gbit/s since V800R013C00. Each
QSFP28 port can work at the rate of
100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of a QSFP28 port is

100 Gbit/s, and each QSFP28 port
supports 100GE/50GE/40GE/4x25GE/
4x10GE. If the port transmission rate
of the optical module does not match
the default rate, run the port split
command to switch the rate.
is 400 Gbit/s, and each QSFP-DD port
supports 400GE/100GE (100GE
supported since V800R013C00). If the
switch the rate.
3. In versions earlier than
V800R013C00, this board does not
support FlexE. In V800R013C00 and
later versions, ports 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13,
14, and 15 do not support FlexE, but
other ports support FlexE.

breakout function.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.

Table 3-717 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCP
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.24 CR8DE8KE8NCQ (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-CM,Enable 8*100GE
by default))
Overview
Table 3-718 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCQ
Item Details

Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-
Model CR8DE8KE8NCQ

Appearance
Figure 3-303 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCQ
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03059279&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCQ#matchRelation
Figure 3-304 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCQ

status indicator

Table 3-719 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCQ


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

Breakout 0~7 Breakout Green Steady on Breakout 0~7

indicator (0~3
available, 4~7
reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has

breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-720 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCQ


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-305 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCQ

Table 3-721 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCQ

Components
0~3, 8~11 QSFP-DD Interface for 400Gbps QSFP-

inputting and DD Optical
outputting Module
400GE/200G/ 200Gbps QSFP-
signals (100GE is Module
supported since
V800R013C00, 100Gbps QSFP28
and 2 x 100G Optical Module
optical modules (supported since
are supported V800R013C00)
since
V800R022C10)
4~7, 12~15 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-722 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCQ

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-723 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCQ
Basic function The LPU provides eight 400GE QSFP-

DD ports and eight 100GE QSFP28
ports. Each QSFP-DD port can work at
the rate of 400 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s.
The port can work at the rate of 100
Gbit/s since V800R013C00. Each
QSFP28 port can work at the rate of
100 Gbit/s, 50 Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s.

switch the rate.
Breakout supported Yes. 400GE interfaces 0 to 3 and 8 to

11 support the 1x400GE/1x100GE/
2x100GE/4x100GE split mode, and
100GE interfaces 4 to 7 and 12 to 15
support the 1x100GE/1x50GE/1x40GE/
4x25GE/4x10GE split mode.
port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

Table 3-724 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCQ

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.25 CR8DE8KE8NCU (03050CMD: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM,Enable
16*100GE by default))
Overview
Table 3-725 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Item Details

Part Number 03050CMD
Model CR8DE8KE8NCU
Appearance
Figure 3-306 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050CMD&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCU#matchRelation
Figure 3-307 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

status indicator
Table 3-726 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCU


system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-727 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCU


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-308 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Table 3-728 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Components
0–3, 8–11 QSFP-DD 400GE/200G/ 400Gbps QSFP-

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)
4–7, 12–15 QSFP28/QSFP+ Port for inputting 40Gbps QSFP+

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-729 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-730 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Basic function The line processing unit provides eight

400GE QSFP-DD ports and eight
100GE QSFP28 ports. Each QSFP-DD
port can work at the rate of 400
Gbit/s. Each QSFP28 port can work at
Gbit/s.

switch the rate.

breakout function.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.

Table 3-731 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCU
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.26 CR8DE8KE8NCU (03050CMD-001: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-

Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-
CM,Enable 16*100GE by default))
Overview
Table 3-732 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCU
Item Details

Part Number 03050CMD-001
Model CR8DE8KE8NCU

Appearance
Figure 3-309 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCU
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050CMD-001&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCU#matchRelation
Figure 3-310 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button

Table 3-733 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCU


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-734 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCU


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-311 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Table 3-735 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)
4–7, 12–15 QSFP28/QSFP+ Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-736 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-737 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCU


port can work at the rate of 400
Gbit/s. Each QSFP28 port can work at
Gbit/s.

switch the rate.

breakout function.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-738 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCU

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.27 CR8DE8KE8NCW (03050CME: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-
Overview
Table 3-739 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Item Details

Part Number 03050CME
Model CR8DE8KE8NCW
Appearance
Figure 3-312 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050CME&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCW#matchRelation
Figure 3-313 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

status indicator
Table 3-740 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCW


system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-741 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCW


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-314 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Table 3-742 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Components
0–3, 8–11 QSFP-DD Port for inputting 400Gbps QSFP-

and outputting DD Optical
400GE/200G/ Module
100GE optical 200Gbps QSFP-
signals (2x100G DD Optical
supported since Module
V800R022C10)
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-743 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCW
Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-744 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCW

port can work at the rate of 400 Gbit/s
or 100 Gbit/s. Each QSFP28 port can
work at the rate of 100 Gbit/s, 50
Gbit/s, or 40 Gbit/s.


switch the rate.

port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.

Table 3-745 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCW
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.28 CR8DE8KE8NCW (03050CME-001: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-

Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit L CM(LPUI-4T-L-
Overview
Table 3-746 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8NCW
Item Details

Part Number 03050CME-001
Model CR8DE8KE8NCW

Appearance
Figure 3-315 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8NCW
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050CME-001&productModel=CR8DE8KE8NCW#matchRelation
Figure 3-316 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button

Table 3-747 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8NCW


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

power-off
state. (For
example, the
card has been
forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-748 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8NCW


seconds until the
the card.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-317 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Table 3-749 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)

signals
50Gbps QSFP28
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-750 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-751 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8NCW



switch the rate.

port split command.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-752 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8NCW

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.29 CR8DE8KE8ND1 (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM,Enable 16*100GE
by default))
Overview
Table 3-753 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8ND1

Item Details

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-
Part Number 03050JVU
Model CR8DE8KE8ND1
Appearance
Figure 3-318 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8ND1

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050JVU&productModel=CR8DE8KE8ND1#matchRelation
Figure 3-319 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8ND1

status indicator
5. Breakout - - -
button
Table 3-754 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8ND1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-755 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8ND1


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-756 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8ND1

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-757 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8ND1

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-758 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8ND1




switch the rate.

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-759 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8ND1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.30 CR8DE8KE8ND9 (8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-

QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-CM,Enable 16*100GE
by default))
Overview
Table 3-760 Basic information about the CR8DE8KE8ND9

Item Details

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-E-
Part Number 03050LLY
Model CR8DE8KE8ND9
Appearance
Figure 3-320 Appearance of the CR8DE8KE8ND9

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050LLY&productModel=CR8DE8KE8ND9#matchRelation
Figure 3-321 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE8KE8ND9
Table 3-761 Indicators on the CR8DE8KE8ND9


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


4-7 reserved):
breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are off,
the card has
no breakout
ports. If the
card has
breakout

ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-762 Buttons on the CR8DE8KE8ND9


seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-763 Ports on the CR8DE8KE8ND9

Components

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)


Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-764 Port attributes about the CR8DE8KE8ND9

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-765 Functions and features of the CR8DE8KE8ND9




switch the rate.

interface breakout.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-766 Technical specifications of the CR8DE8KE8ND9

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.31 CR8DEKNBFED1 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-767 Basic information about the CR8DEKNBFED1

Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050JVS
Model CR8DEKNBFED1
40×100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-322 Appearance of the CR8DEKNBFED1

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050JVS&productModel=CR8DEKNBFED1#matchRelation
Figure 3-323 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEKNBFED1
Table 3-768 Indicators on the CR8DEKNBFED1


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-769 Buttons on the CR8DEKNBFED1

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-770 Ports on the CR8DEKNBFED1

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-771 Port attributes about the CR8DEKNBFED1
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-772 Functions and features of the CR8DEKNBFED1



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-773 Technical specifications of the CR8DEKNBFED1

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.9.32 CR8DEKNBFED9 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line

Overview
Table 3-774 Basic information about the CR8DEKNBFED9

Item Details

CM)
Part Number 03050LLW
Model CR8DEKNBFED9
40×100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-324 Appearance of the CR8DEKNBFED9
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050LLW&productModel=CR8DEKNBFED9#matchRelation
Figure 3-325 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEKNBFED9
Table 3-775 Indicators on the CR8DEKNBFED9

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

affects
services has
occurred. The
fault cannot
be rectified
automatically
and requires
manual
intervention.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command,
the board is
about to
start, or the
OFL button is
held down.)


indicator breakout
indicators. If
breakout
indicator X is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1. If
the breakout
indicators 0
to 3 are
steady off,
the board has
no breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each

breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5 seconds in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-776 Buttons on the CR8DEKNBFED9

seconds until the
the board.

indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Table 3-777 Ports on the CR8DEKNBFED9

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-778 Port attributes about the CR8DEKNBFED9
Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-779 Functions and features of the CR8DEKNBFED9



16, 19, 21, 23, 26, 29, 31, 33, 36, and
39).
3. Interfaces 4, 7, 14, 17, 24, 27, 34,
4. {0, 1, 2, 3}, {5, 6, 8, 9}, {10, 11, 12,
13}, {15, 16, 18, 19}, {20, 21, 22, 23},
{25, 26, 28, 29}, {30, 31, 32, 33}, {35,
through FlexE.


FlexE supported Yes


Table 3-780 Technical specifications of the CR8DEKNBFED9
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 17.05 in. x 20.59 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.10 LPUI-14.4T
3.5.10.1 CR8D00EJKBCP (36-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated Line

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-14T4-CM,Enable 36*100GE by default))
Overview
Table 3-781 Basic information about the CR8D00EJKBCP
Item Details
Description 36-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-14T4-
Part Number 03050DCJ
Model CR8D00EJKBCP
36×400GE-QSFP-DD

Appearance
Figure 3-326 Appearance of the CR8D00EJKBCP
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03050DCJ&productModel=CR8D00EJKBCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-327 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D00EJKBCP
Table 3-782 Indicators on the CR8D00EJKBCP

system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.

down.

Table 3-783 Buttons on the CR8D00EJKBCP


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Breakout Breakout button Reserved
Ports
Figure 3-328 Ports on the CR8D00EJKBCP
Table 3-784 Ports on the CR8D00EJKBCP

Components
0~35 QSFP-DD 400GE/200G/ 400Gbps QSFP-

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)
Table 3-785 Port attributes about the CR8D00EJKBCP

Attributes Details

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-786 Functions and features of the CR8D00EJKBCP
Basic function The line processing board provides 36

400GE QSFP-DD interfaces on the line
interface is 400 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of a QSFP-DD port

supports 400GE/100GE. If the
2. Interfaces 0, 1, 2, 9, 10, 11, 18, 19,
20, 27, 28 and 29 do not support
FlexE; other interfaces are reserved
(not supported in V800R021C00).
FlexE supported No
Table 3-787 Technical specifications of the CR8D00EJKBCP
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.11 LPUI-7.2T
3.5.11.1 CR8D0E18KBCP (18-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated Line

Processing Unit CM(LPUI-7T2-CM,Enable 18*100GE by default))
Overview
Table 3-788 Basic information about the CR8D0E18KBCP
Item Details
Description 18-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD Integrated

Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-7T2-
Part Number 03050DDP
Model CR8D0E18KBCP
18×400GE-QSFP-DD
Appearance
Figure 3-329 Appearance of the CR8D0E18KBCP

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03050DDP&productModel=CR8D0E18KBCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-330 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0E18KBCP
Table 3-789 Indicators on the CR8D0E18KBCP


system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

in power-off
state. (For
example, the
board has
been forcibly
powered off
using the
power off
command or
is about to
start, or the
OFL button is
pressed.)

transmitted or
received.

down.
Table 3-790 Buttons on the CR8D0E18KBCP


button for about 6
indicator comes on.
the board.
Breakout Breakout button Reserved

Ports
Figure 3-331 Ports on the CR8D0E18KBCP
Table 3-791 Ports on the CR8D0E18KBCP

Components
0~17 QSFP-DD 400GE/200G/ 400Gbps QSFP-

(2x100GE DD Optical
corresponding 200
are supported
since
V800R022C10)
Table 3-792 Port attributes about the CR8D0E18KBCP
Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-793 Functions and features of the CR8D0E18KBCP
Basic function The line processing unit provides

eighteen 400GE QSFP-DD ports. Each
QSFP-DD port can work at the rate of
400 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s.

Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of a QSFP-DD port

supports 400GE/100GE. If the
2. Interfaces 0, 1, 2, 9, 10, and 11 do
not support FlexE, and other interfaces
support FlexE.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.
can be created.


can be created.
Table 3-794 Technical specifications of the CR8D0E18KBCP
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.05 in. x 20.60 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.12 P1T
3.5.12.1 CR8D0E5NBCCP (5-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible

Card CM(P1T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-795 Basic information about the CR8D0E5NBCCP
Item Details
Description 5-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE

MACsec Flexible Card CM(P1T-CM)
Part Number 03034RMB
Model CR8D0E5NBCCP
Card type Flexible Board

Item Details
Silkscreen P1T-CM
5x100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-332 Appearance of the CR8D0E5NBCCP
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03034RMB&productModel=CR8D0E5NBCCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-333 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0E5NBCCP

Table 3-796 Indicators on the CR8D0E5NBCCP

RUN/ALM Running Green Steady on The board has

status been powered
indicator on but the
system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.
0 to 4 Port indicator Green Steady on The link is Up.

transmitted
and received.


Down.

on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.

- Steady off Breakout

indicators 0
to 3 are off,
indicating
that the
board has no
breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5s in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

Table 3-797 Buttons on the CR8D0E5NBCCP


indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-334 Ports on the CR8D0E5NBCCP
Table 3-798 Ports on the CR8D0E5NBCCP

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-799 Port attributes about the CR8D0E5NBCCP

Attributes Details
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP and

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-800 Functions and features of the CR8D0E5NBCCP

Basic function Supports 500 Gbit/s line-rate

forwarding.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of an interface is

2x50G. If the transmission rate of an
rate.
2. {0, 1}, {2, 3}: Every two 100G
interfaces can be bonded into a 200G
interface through FlexE. Bonding four
ports into a 400G interface is not
supported.


FlexE supported Yes

Physical ports 0 and 1 can be added to
the same group. port-id ranges from
Physical port 4 can be added to the
same group. port-id ranges from 1000
The specifications of the FPIC on the
CR8DLPUFT171, CR8DLPUFT072,
CR81LPUFT072 and CR8DLPUFT172
are as follows:
Table 3-801 Technical specifications of the CR8D0E5NBCCP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.12.2 CR8D0E5NBCDP (5-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible

Card E CM(P1T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-802 Basic information about the CR8D0E5NBCDP
Item Details

MACsec Flexible Card E CM(P1T-E-CM)
Part Number 03034RMF
Model CR8D0E5NBCDP
Silkscreen P1T-E-CM
5x100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-335 Appearance of the CR8D0E5NBCDP

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03034RMF&productModel=CR8D0E5NBCDP#matchRelation
Figure 3-336 Indicators and buttons on the CR8D0E5NBCDP
Table 3-803 Indicators on the CR8D0E5NBCDP


status been powered
system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.

transmitted
and received.

Down.


on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.


indicators 0
to 3 are off,
indicating
that the
board has no
breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5s in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

Table 3-804 Buttons on the CR8D0E5NBCDP


indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-337 Ports on the CR8D0E5NBCDP
Table 3-805 Ports on the CR8D0E5NBCDP

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-806 Port attributes about the CR8D0E5NBCDP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-807 Functions and features of the CR8D0E5NBCDP

Basic function Supports 500 Gbit/s line-rate

forwarding.
Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of an interface is

rate.
2. {0, 1}, {2, 3}: Every two 100G
interfaces can be bonded into a 200G
interface through FlexE. Bonding four
ports into a 400G interface is not
supported.


FlexE supported Yes

The specifications of the FPIC on the
CR8DLPUFT171, CR8DLPUFT072,
CR81LPUFT072 and CR8DLPUFT172
are as follows:
Table 3-808 Technical specifications of the CR8D0E5NBCDP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.12.3 CR8D0LJXXCCP (36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+ MACsec Flexible

Card CM(P1T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-809 Basic information about the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Item Details
Description 36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+

Part Number 03033MKN
Model CR8D0LJXXCCP
Silkscreen P1T-CM
36x10GE-SFP+
Appearance
Figure 3-338 Appearance of the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=03033MKN&productModel=CR8D0LJXXCCP#matchRelation
Indicators
Figure 3-339 Indicators on the CR8D0LJXXCCP
Table 3-810 Indicators on the CR8D0LJXXCCP

status been powered
system
software is
not running.

Hz)


(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.

transmitted
and received.

Down.

Ports
Figure 3-340 Ports on the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Table 3-811 Ports on the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Components

outputting 10GE Module
optical signals eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
Table 3-812 Port attributes about the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Attributes Details
Frame format Ethernet_II,Ethernet_SAP,Ethernet_SNA

P

Table 3-813 Functions and features of the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Basic function Provides 36 GE/10GE auto-sensing

line-rate forwarding ports.
Restrictions and remarks 1. All ports can work in 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN, or GE mode.
port in a port group can be configured
as a 10GE/GE port. In each port group,
10GE LAN or 10GE WAN is switched
by group. Mixed use of 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN in one group is not
supported.
the master clock.
(including ports 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, and
26).
6. Before using an ejector lever to
insert or remove a board, remove the
optical module close to the ejector
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32 and 35).
Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.
FlexE supported No

Table 3-814 Technical specifications of the CR8D0LJXXCCP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.12.4 CR8D0LJXXCDP (36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+ MACsec Flexible

Card E CM(P1T-E-CM))
Overview
Table 3-815 Basic information about the CR8D0LJXXCDP

Item Details
Description 36-Port 10GBase LAN/WAN-SFP+

MACsec Flexible Card E CM(P1T-E-CM)
Part Number 03034XTN
Model CR8D0LJXXCDP
Silkscreen P1T-E-CM
36x10GE-SFP+

Appearance
Figure 3-341 Appearance of the CR8D0LJXXCDP
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03034XTN&productModel=CR8D0LJXXCDP#matchRelation

Indicators
Figure 3-342 Indicators on the CR8D0LJXXCDP
Table 3-816 Indicators on the CR8D0LJXXCDP


status been powered
system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.

transmitted
and received.

Down.

Ports
Figure 3-343 Ports on the CR8D0LJXXCDP

Table 3-817 Ports on the CR8D0LJXXCDP

Components

outputting 10GE Module
optical signals eSFP DWDM
Optical Module
1Gbps Electrical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
Optical Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
CWDM Optical
Module
1.25Gbps eSFP
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
10Gbps SFP+
CWDM Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
BIDI Optical
Module
10Gbps SFP+
DWDM Optical
Module
Table 3-818 Port attributes about the CR8D0LJXXCDP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-819 Functions and features of the CR8D0LJXXCDP

Basic function Provides 36 GE/10GE auto-sensing

line-rate forwarding ports.
Restrictions and remarks 1. All ports can work in 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN, or GE mode.
port in a port group can be configured
as a 10GE/GE port. In each port group,
10GE LAN or 10GE WAN is switched
by group. Mixed use of 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN in one group is not
supported.
the master clock.
(including ports 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, and
26).
6. Before using an ejector lever to
insert or remove a board, remove the
optical module close to the ejector
17, 20, 23, 26, 29, 32 and 35).
Interface rate auto-sensing supported Supports GE/10GE auto-sensing.
FlexE supported No

Table 3-820 Technical specifications of the CR8D0LJXXCDP
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.13 P2T
3.5.13.1 CR8DE2KE2NCP (2-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD FlexE + 2-Port

100GBase-QSFP28 Flexible Card CM(P2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-821 Basic information about the CR8DE2KE2NCP
Item Details
Description 2-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD FlexE + 2-

Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Flexible Card
CM(P2T-CM)
Part Number 03034XTS
Model CR8DE2KE2NCP
Silkscreen P2T-CM
2x400GE-QSFP-DD+2x100GE-QSFP28

Appearance
Figure 3-344 Appearance of the CR8DE2KE2NCP
Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03034XTS&productModel=CR8DE2KE2NCP#matchRelation
Figure 3-345 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DE2KE2NCP

Table 3-822 Indicators on the CR8DE2KE2NCP


status been powered
system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.

a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.

transmitted
and received.


Down.
Breakout 0 to Breakout Green Steady on If breakout

7 indicator indicator X is
on, the
interface
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the
interface
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
an interface
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this interface
is receiving
and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the
interface
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.


indicators 0
to 7 are off,
indicating
that the
board has no
breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
7 turns on for
5s in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

Table 3-823 Buttons on the CR8DE2KE2NCP


indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-346 Ports on the CR8DE2KE2NCP
Table 3-824 Ports on the CR8DE2KE2NCP

Components
0 to 1 QSFP-DD Port for inputting 400Gbps QSFP-

and outputting DD Optical
400GE/200G/ Module
100GE optical 200Gbps QSFP-
signals (2x100G DD Optical
supported since Module
V800R022C10)
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module


Components
2-3 QSFP28/QSFP+ Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module
Table 3-825 Port attributes about the CR8DE2KE2NCP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-826 Functions and features of the CR8DE2KE2NCP

Basic function Supports 1T line-rate forwarding.

Restrictions and remarks 1. The default rate of a QSFP28

interface is 100 Gbit/s. Each interface
4x10GE. If the interface transmission
rate of an optical module does not
match the default rate, you can run
the port split command to switch the
rate.
3. Ports 2 and 3 do not support FlexE,
but other ports support FlexE.

FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-827 Technical specifications of the CR8DE2KE2NCP

Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

Item Specification

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
3.5.13.2 CR8DEANBFECP (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 FlexE MACsec Flexible

Card CM(P2T-CM))
Overview
Table 3-828 Basic information about the CR8DEANBFECP

Item Details

Part Number 03034RMA
Model CR8DEANBFECP
Silkscreen P2T-CM
10x100GE-QSFP28
Appearance
Figure 3-347 Appearance of the CR8DEANBFECP

Version Mapping
display.
keyword=03034RMA&productModel=CR8DEANBFECP#matchRelation
Figure 3-348 Indicators and buttons on the CR8DEANBFECP
Table 3-829 Indicators on the CR8DEANBFECP


status been powered
system
software is
not running.

Hz)

(4 Hz) loading the
system
software or is
resetting.


a fault that
affects
services and
cannot be
rectified
automatically.
Manual
intervention is
required.

not powered
on. For
example, the
power off
command is
executed to
forcibly power
off the board,
the board is
in the pre-
startup phase,
or the OFL
button on the
mother board
is pressed.

transmitted
and received.

Down.


on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel X. For
example, if
breakout
indicator 0 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 0 (if
a port
indicator is
blinking,
breakout
channel 0 on
this port is
receiving and
transmitting
data); if
breakout
indicator 1 is
on, the port
indicators are
showing the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1.


indicators 0
to 3 are off,
indicating
that the
board has no
breakout
ports. If the
board has
breakout
ports, each
breakout
indicator for
channels 0 to
3 turns on for
5s in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. To
rapidly
identify the
running
status of a
specific
breakout
channel, press
the Breakout
button to
switch to your
desired
indicator. For
example, if
you want to
check the
running
status of
breakout
channel 1 on
each port,
press the
Breakout
button to
have breakout
indicator 1
turn on.

Table 3-830 Buttons on the CR8DEANBFECP


indicators' status
automatically start
status cycling.
Ports
Figure 3-349 Ports on the CR8DEANBFECP
Table 3-831 Ports on the CR8DEANBFECP

Components

40GE optical
BIDI Optical
Module
100Gbps QSFP28
Optical Module

Table 3-832 Port attributes about the CR8DEANBFECP

Attributes Details

Ethernet_SNAP
Table 3-833 Functions and features of the CR8DEANBFECP

Basic function Supports 1T line-rate forwarding.
Restrictions and remarks 1. Before inserting or removing a

the optical modules (1 and 9) close to
the ejector lever.
rate.
3. {0, 1}, {2, 3}, {4, 5}, {6, 7}: Every two
100G interfaces can be bonded into a
200G interface through FlexE. Bonding
four or eight interfaces into a 400G/
800G interface is not supported.


FlexE supported Yes

can be created.
can be created.
Table 3-834 Technical specifications of the CR8DEANBFECP
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] (2.18 in. x 7.78 in. x 9.08 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] x 12.32 in. x 15.16 in.)

[°C(°F)]

Item Specification

[°C(°F)]
3.6 Optical
3.6.1 Understanding Pluggable Optical Modules
3.6.1.1 Appearance and structure
Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.
Figure 3-350 Optical module structure
1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell
5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module

connector
3.6.1.2 Types of Optical Modules

Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.
● Classified by transmission rates
Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000

Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation types
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, CXP, CFP,CSFP and
QSFP-DD.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP module is an SFP
module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature, bias current,
transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Because all the SFP
optical modules support these monitoring functions, eSFP is also called
SFP.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus, SFP with a higher rate. SFP+
modules are more sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI)
because they have a higher rate. To reduce EMI, SFP+ modules have more
springs than SFP modules and the cages for SFP+ modules on a card are
tighter.
– XFP: X is the Roman numeral 10, meaning that all XFP optical modules
provide a 10 Gbit/s transmission rate. XFP optical modules support LC
fiber connectors. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+
optical modules.
– SFP28: with the same interface size as an SFP+ module. An SFP28
interface can use a 25GE SFP28 optical module or 10GE SFP+ optical
module.
– QSFP28: with the same interface size as a QSFP+ module. A QSFP28
interface can use a 100GE QSFP28 optical module or a 40GE QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable. QSFP+ optical modules
support MPO fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ modules.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density. A QSFP-DD
optical module is a high-speed pluggable optical module defined by
QSFP-DD MSA.
– CXP: hot-pluggable high-density parallel optics transceiver form factor,
which provides 12 channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions.
It applies only to short multimode links.
– CFP: C form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. Dimensions of a CFP optical module are
144.75 mm x 82 mm x 13.6 mm (W x D x H).
– CSFP: A Compact Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) module is a Gigabit
Ethernet transceiver with two bidirectional channels inside a conventional
SFP form factor to address high-density port requirements in FTTx
deployments.
– QSFP-DD (Quad Small Form-Factor Pluggable-Double Density) optical
module: It is a double-density four-channel small pluggable high-speed
optical module. QSFP-DD is currently the preferred encapsulation mode
for 400G optical modules, enabling data centers to effectively increase
and expand cloud capacity as required. A QSFP-DD optical module uses

8-channel electrical interfaces. The rate of each channel reaches 25 Gbit/s

(NRZ modulation) or 50 Gbit/s (PAM4 modulation), providing up to 200
Gbit/s or 400 Gbit/s aggregation solutions.
● Classified by physical layer standards
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see Standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by modes
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.
Wavelength division multiplexing modules differ from other optical modules in
center wavelengths. A common optical module has a center wavelength of 850
nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm, whereas a wavelength division multiplexing module
transmits lights with different center wavelengths. Wavelength division
multiplexing modules are classified into two types: coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM).
Within the same band, DWDM modules are available in more types and use
wavelength resources more efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM
modules allow lights with different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one
fiber without interfering each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used
to combine the lights into one channel, which is then split into multiple channels
by a demultiplexer on the remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required.
DWDM and CWDM modules are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.
3.6.1.3 Instruction
The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.

Table 3-835 Commonly used optical modules

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type
SFP LC Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
Single-fiber-bidirectional transceiver
SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional


ulatio type
n type
XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional
SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional
QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional

8


ulatio type
n type
QSFP+ LC/MPO
CXP MPO


ulatio type
n type
CFP LC/MPO CFP
CFP2
CFP4
CFP8


ulatio type
n type
CSFP LC
QSFP- LC
DD
3.6.1.4 Instructions on How to Use an Optical Module

This section describes instructions on how to use an optical module.
NOTE
Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement-Replacing an Optical Module.
ESD Measures
Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.
Figure 3-351 Methods of wearing ESD gloves

Figure 3-352 Methods of wearing ESD wrist strap
Placing Optical Apparatus and fibers

Do not touch pins or connecting fingers with bare hands. Handle the optical fibers
gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of grasping the fiber or
the fiber cover.
Do not apply axial or lateral fiber wallop bumps on the fiber. Do not fold, twist, or
crush the tail fiber. Do not drag the tail fiber or press the coupling point of the tail
fiber. Figure 3-353 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and fibers.
Figure 3-353 Methods of placing optical apparatus and fibers
NOTE
Install the fiber in circles with diameter longer than 6 cm ( 0.20 ft ).
Uninstalling Optical Apparatus

● Open the buckle and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical fiber. Ensure that the optical fiber
is connected to and removed from the interface horizontally.
Figure 3-354 The tab is closed

Figure 3-355 The tab is open
● 155Mbps SFP Electrical Transceiver, in Figure 3-356 (1) shows a black plastic
latch. Press the latch to unlock the electrical module. As (2) indicates, hold
the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.
Figure 3-356 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical module
Please do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the electrical
module.
If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage buckle, as shown in the following figure. Then,
hold the two sides of the electrical module to remove it.

● CFP2 optical module(02311LYG), in Figure 3-357, Push the puller to the

bottom until the latch shown in (1) automatically unlocks the optical module.
Then, horizontally drag the puller to remove the optical module.
Figure 3-357 Removing a CFP2 optical module
● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.

CAUTION
The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.
Precautions for the loosened optical module

● When installing an optical module, force it into position. If a crack sound is
heard or a slight tremor is felt, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
When the latch boss is not secured, the connecting finger is unstably
connected to the connector on the board, and the link may become Up. On
the condition that the optical module tremors or collides with another object,
however, the optical module will be loosened or the optical signals will be
temporarily cut off.
● When inserting the optical module, make sure that the tab is closed. (At this
time, the latch boss locks the optical module.) After the optical module is
inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical
module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
longer, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● After the CFP optical module is securely inserted, tighten the two screw rods
of the module alternately. To prevent the module from getting loosened due
to vibration or collision, you are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the
screw rods.

Precautions for receptacle contamination

● Clean tissues must be prepared for deployment on site. You need to clean the
optical connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the
receptacle against the contamination.
NOTE
Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning
tissue to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning an optical
connector.
● To prevent contamination, the optical module should be covered with either a

dust cap or an optical connector.
Cover an optical module with a dust cap.
Cover an optical module with an optical connector
● Lay the optical fibers on the Optical-fiber Distribution Frame (ODF) or coil
them up in a fiber management tray. Make sure that the optical fibers are not
squeezed.

● If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
has not been covered with a dust cap, you should clean it before using it. A
cotton swab is used to clean a receptacle, and a cleaning tissue is used to
clean an optical connector.
NOTE
During the cleaning process, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much force, because the receptacle may be damaged.
● If, for no apparent reason, optical signals are lost during the operation of a
device, use the preceding method to clean the receptacle or the optical
connector. This will eliminate contamination as the cause of the signal loss.
Precautions for the overload-caused burnt optical module

● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or the attenuation of optical
signals, disconnect the optical connector from the optical module. Otherwise,
the optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than -7 dBm. If the input optical power is larger than -7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmitting optical
power is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receiving optical
power is X-Y, which must be smaller than -7dBm (X-Y<-7 dBm).

Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors

The Ethernet port rate is increasing and the quality requirement for optical fibers
and optical cables is higher. Table 3-836 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).
Table 3-836 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber

connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NOTE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 3-837 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber
connector when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to
double the rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 3-837 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector

Connectors (dB)
1 -22
2 -29
4 -33
6 -35
8 -37
10 -39
Link splice loss and reflectance values of the test methods and the following
processing steps:
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.

2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.
3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it.
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Other precautions
● The optical connector should be horizontally inserted in the receptacle to
avoid damages to the receptacle.
● Mixed use of multi-mode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.

Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and multi-mode.
Table 3-838 Method of distinguishing optical modules in single mode and

multi-mode
Item Single mode Multi-mode
Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km
Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm
Information on the SM MM
label
50G and 400G Optical Module Installation Guide

1. Precautions for optical module installation
(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the puller or patch cord from
bumping on the door.

(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER or 400GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical
module, the receive optical power damage threshold is lower than the average
minimum transmit optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by
self-loops. Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for
self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method of checking an optical path
Figure 3-358 Method of checking an optical path
3. Method of cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber
Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the patch cord connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use a smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.

● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.
● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.

● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.
5. Method of using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical

module
Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.
● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the inside of the optical port
and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction
along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Cap the optical port after the cleaning is complete.
6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from dirtying the optical
port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.
7. Safety precautions
● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are

extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.
8. Discrete reflectance
Focus on the reflection indicators of each node during link deployment. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE standards.
Table 3-839 Maximum discrete reflectance of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE
Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER

discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
1 -25 dB -22 dB -19 dB

Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER

discrete (Maximum value (Maximum value (Maximum value
reflectances of each discrete of each discrete of each discrete
greater than –55 reflectance) reflectance) reflectance)
dB
2 -31 dB -29 dB -27 dB
4 -35 dB -33 dB -32 dB
6 -38 dB -35 dB -35 dB
8 -40 dB -37 dB -37 dB
10 -41 dB -39 dB -39 dB
3.6.1.5 Configuring an Optical Attenuator

This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.
Calculating the Optical Attenuation

You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.
Table 3-840 Description of the Paramater

Name Description
P(in)min Worst sensitivity.
P(out)max Maximum transmit optical power.
S Transmission distance.
A Attenuation coefficient. Note that the

attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths. By
default, the attenuation coefficient of
a 1310-nm wavelength in a G.652
fiber is 0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km;
the attenuation coefficient of a 1550-
nm wavelength in a G.652 fiber is
0.235 dBm/km or 0.25 dBm/km.
P(in)max Maximum receive optical power, that

is, minimum overload point.
The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a

transmission point is as follows:
If P(out)max – S x Attenuation coefficient > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be
configured. The optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T=
P(out)max - S x Attenuation coefficient - P(in)max.

Table 3-841 Reference for configuring an attenuator
BOM Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)

Number n max min min max
34060276 eSFP, -8 dBm -15 dBm -31 dBm -8 dBm

1310nm,ST
M1,LC,SM,
15km
NOTE
● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an

attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.
BOM Number and Description of Attenuators
Table 3-842 BOM number and description of attenuators
BOM Number Description
45030021 Fixed Optical Attenuator,

1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/PC-45dB
45030022 Fixed Optical Attenuator,

1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/PC-45dB
NOTE
This table is for reference only. BOM numbers of attenuators vary with configuration
documents.
3.6.2 Optical Amplifier

Table 3-843 Specifications of the Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-SMF-1535nm–
1547nm
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name Optical Amplifier-QSFP28-

SMF-1535nm–1547nm
Part number 02313JCM
Model QSFP28-Amplifier-SM
Form factor QSFP28

Item Value
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type SMF
Working case temperature (°C) –5°C to +75°C (23°F to 167°F)
Environmental standard RoHS
Security standard EN/IEC60825-1:2014;EN/

IEC62368-1:2014;UL 62368-1 Ed.2
ESD (HBM1) [V] 2000 V
Transmitter optical characteristics
Center wavelength (nm) 1547.715 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) +7 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]
Receiver optical characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1535.82 nm-1547.72 nm
Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -29 dbm

(dBm)
The 02313LHH must be used with the 02313JCM to meet the requirements of
single-span 40–120 km transmission.
● In V800R021C00, 02313LHH is used. In this case:
1. If the link loss is less than 22 dB (standard-defined), site survey is not required
and an OA only needs to be configured at the transmit end.
2. If the transmission distance ranges from 80 km to 120 km, site survey is
required to determine the OA configuration scheme:
(1) If the link loss is less than or equal to 24 dB, an OA needs to be configured
only at the transmit end.
(2) If the link loss is greater than 24 dB but less than or equal to 28 dB, an OA
needs to be configured at both the transmit and receive ends, and the receive
optical power threshold of the involved module needs to be switched using a
command.
(3) If the link loss is greater than 28 dB, optimize the link to ensure that the loss is
less than 28 dB.
Instructions for using the OA (02313JCM):
The OA (02313JCM) works with the 400G ZR (02313LHH) to realize the long-haul
transmission of 40 km to 120 km.

The OA (02313JCM) can be powered by the QSFP-DD or QSFP28 service port . The
OA can be connected to the 400ZR module on the same board or on a different
board.
The following figure shows the connection.
3.6.3 155Mbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.6.3.1 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-844 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1310nm(Tx)/

1550nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Part Number 02310QNG
Model OSC015B01
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-U
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)
DDM options SFF-8472
Environment standard RoHS
Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 15 km

Item Value
Transmitter Optical Characteristics
Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -8 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -14 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB
Receiver Optical Characteristics
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1480 nm - 1580 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -32 dBm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -
3.6.3.2 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial
Table 3-845 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-15km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 155Mbps-eSFP-SM-1550nm(Tx)/

Part Number 02310QNH
Model OSC015B02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.4 1Gbps Electrical Module

3.6.4.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Table 3-846 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry
Part Number 02310RAV
Model OEGD01N01
Form factor SFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T
Connector type RJ45
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km
3.6.5 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module
3.6.5.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended
Table 3-847 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-

extended
Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx/FC200MM

Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC
Optical fiber type MMF
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

3.6.5.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360)
Table 3-848 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-

commercial
Model eSFP-1550nm-1000Base-Zx/FC100
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.
3.6.5.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Part Number S4016067
Model OSG010N05
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSG040002
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.5.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4017310)

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial

Item Value
Model OSG080N02
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
NOTE
3.6.6 1.25Gbps eSFP BIDI Optical Module
3.6.6.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Table 3-852 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1490nm(Rx)-10km-

commercial(34060470) specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/

1490nm(Rx)-10km-
commercial(34060470)
Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-U
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -19.5 dBm

NOTE
Used in pair with 34060475.
3.6.6.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-853 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1490nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Model SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Application standard IEEE 802.3ah, 1000Base-BX10-D
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Model OGEBIDI41
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -23 dBm

NOTE

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Model OGEBIDI40
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Model OGEBIDI80
Form factor eSFP

Item Value
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Model OGEBIDI81
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

NOTE
3.6.6.7 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-858 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/1550nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm(Tx)/

Model eSFP-1310/1550-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.
3.6.6.8 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-859 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/1310nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 0.1~1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm(Tx)/

Model eSFP-1550/1310-L1.1-BIDI
Form factor eSFP

Item Value
Connector type LC
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -5°C to 70°C(23°F to 158°F)
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 0.1~1.25 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
When an optical module is used on the OptiX PTN equipment, the rate of the optical
module cannot exceed 155 Mbit/s.


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02314RDH
Model SFP-GE-BIDI-80km-SM1550
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
Security standard TUV; EN 60825-1, EN 62368-1;

NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56.
ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

NOTE
It is used with 02314RDK in pairs.

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02314RDK
Model SFP-GE-BIDI-80km-SM1490
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)

Item Value
Security standard TUV; EN 60825-1, EN 62368-1;

NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56.

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
It is used with 02314RDH in pairs.
3.6.7 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model eSFP-LH80-SM1571
Form factor eSFP
Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial

Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial

Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

3.6.8 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module
3.6.8.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Table 3-870 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial
Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.10
Form factor eSFP
Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s
Center wavelength [nm] 1560.61 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Item Value

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information


Item Value
Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Form factor eSFP
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.9 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
3.6.9.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVT)
Table 3-910 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-

commercial
Part Number 02310PVT
Model OSX080N03
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.
3.6.9.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (02310PVU)

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Part Number 02310PVU
Model OSX080N04
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW

Item Value
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.

3.6.9.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (S4017405)

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX010N10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -5.2 dBm

[dBm]

Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm
Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX040N10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.6.9.5 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial
Table 3-914 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-

commercial
Model OSX040N03
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Item Value
Basic Information

Item Value

commercial
Model OSX001002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OMXD30002
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.
3.6.10 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module
3.6.10.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-917 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Model OSX010N13
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,

1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km

10GE: 10 km
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10GE: 3.5 dB
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm

10GE: -14.4 dBm

3.6.10.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-918 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

Model OSX040N12
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW,

1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s
Target transmission distance [km] GE: 40 km

10GE: 40 km
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 4 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: 4 dBm

[dBm]

Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -4.7 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -4.7 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10GE: 3.0 dB
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -15.8 dBm

10GE: -15.8 dBm
3.6.11 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module
3.6.11.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial
Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070001
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

Item Value

commercial
Model OSX070002
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070003
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070004
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070005

Item Value
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]


Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070006
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070007
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Basic Information

commercial
Model OSX070008
Form factor SFP+
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.12 10Gbps SFP+ BIDI Optical Module

3.6.12.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-927 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/

Part Number 02311JNF
Model OSX040B10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX-U
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.12.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial
Table 3-928 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02311JNQ
Model OSX040B11
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX40-D
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.12.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-929 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

1330nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Part Number 34060544-002
Model OSX010B10
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-U
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

3.6.12.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Table 3-930 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

1270nm(Rx)-10km-industry
Model OSX010B11
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-BX10-D
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.13 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module
3.6.13.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-931 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02311GSA
Model OSX080C00
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT

G.709
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)

<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Center wavelength [nm] -
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606

nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12);

-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

NOTE
3.6.14 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module


Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02311GSA
Model OSX080C00
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT

G.709
Connector type LC

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606

nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12);

-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

NOTE

Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1528nm~1568nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02314MED
Model OSX040C01
Form factor SFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW, ITUT G.

709
Connector type LC


Item Value
DDM options SFF-INF-8077i
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -16 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 1E-12,

9.95Gbps~10.7Gbps)
-19 dBm(EOL)(@ BER 2E-03, 11.3Gbps,
dispersion 800ps/nm, at room
temperature and OSNR > 31dB)
3.6.15 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module

3.6.15.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
Table 3-934 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-

commercial
Part Number 02312PDK
Model SFP28-25G-850nm-0.1km-MM
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE802.3-2012, 25GBASE-SR
Connector type LC

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.15.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry
Table 3-935 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-

industry
Part Number 02312PDL
Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-10km-SM
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 cc, 25GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-

LR
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,
10.3125G)

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.15.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended
Table 3-936 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-

extended
Model SFP28-25G-850nm-0.1km-MM
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-SR,

10GBASE-SR
Connector type LC

Item Value

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,
10.3125G)
Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 75°C(-4°F to 167°F)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

3.6.15.4 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry
Table 3-937 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-industry specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-0.3km-

industry
Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-300m-SM
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-SR,

10GBASE-SR
Connector type LC

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,
10.3125G)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 2 dBm
3.6.15.5 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-938 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-40km-

commercial
Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-40km-SM
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 cc
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(25.78125G)

<1x10E-12(10.3125G)

Item Value

[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 6.0 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 0 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -21.0 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) -4.0 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Rx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) -4.0 dBm

[dBm]
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -4.0 dBm
3.6.16 25Gbps SFP28 BIDI Optical Module
3.6.16.1 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-939 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/1330nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Item Value
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1270nm(Tx)/

Part Number 02312TVC
Model SFP28-25G-TX1270/RX1330-10km-SM-
BIDI
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,

10GBASE-LR
Connector type LC

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,
10.3125G)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.16.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-940 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/1270nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1330nm(Tx)/

Part Number 02312TXG
Model SFP28-25G-TX1330/RX1270-10km-SM-
BIDI
Form factor SFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,

10GBASE-LR
Connector type LC

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,
10.3125G)

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.17 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module
3.6.17.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-941 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-

SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial
Part Number 02310WUT
Model OMXD30009
Form factor QSFP+

Item Value
Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.3 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3.5 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -4 dBm

[dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Item Value
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -11.5 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.3 dBm

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.
3.6.17.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
Table 3-942 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
Part Number 02310WUU
Model OMXD30010
Form factor QSFP+
Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-SR4
Connector type MPO-12
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

0.15 km(OM4)

Item Value

[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7.6 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -5.6 dBm

[dBm]

NOTE
3.6.17.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-943 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02311NUA
Model OSM010N11
Form factor QSFP+

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Transmission rate [bit/s] 4x9.95328 Gbit/s

4x10.3125 Gbit/s

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
3.6.18 50Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module

3.6.18.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-944 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-10km-

commercial
Part Number 02311YNR
Model OSL010N01
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-LR
Connector type LC

CE Class B

[dBm]
Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) 4 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach
the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with a WDM device, the 1+1
protection switching duration on the client side of the WDM device is longer than 50 ms.
3.6.18.2 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial
Table 3-945 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1311nm-40km-

commercial
Part Number 02312AXF
Model QSFP28-50G-1311nm-40km-SM
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 50GBASE-ER
Connector type LC

CE Class B

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 1.5 dBm

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

NOTE
If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
1. To keep the optical module running stably for a long time, set the receive optical power
less than -4 dBm. (According to IEEE 802.3, if the receive optical power exceeds -2.3 dBm,
the optical module may be permanently damaged.)
2. Before connecting the optical module, you are advised to use the optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dBm, the optical module can be
directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dBm, add an appropriate attenuator at the receive
end to ensure that P is less than -4 dBm. Alternatively, add an appropriate attenuator (the
recommended value is no less than 10 dB) before the optical module is connected, and
then adjust the attenuator according to the actual situation to prevent the module from
being damaged.
3. If the pigtail loopback or short-distance connection of the optical module is used, the
attenuator must be added. It is recommended that the attenuator be greater than or equal
to 10 dB.

3.6.18.3 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial
Table 3-946 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-

SMF-1295.56~1300.05nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02312MLF
Model QSFP28-50G-1310nm-80km-SM-01
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard Huawei Define
Connector type LC

1300.05 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -28 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.
3. The optical module can be connected only to the optical module with the same BOM
number.
3.6.19 50Gbps QSFP28 BIDI Optical Module
3.6.19.1 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial
Table 3-947 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/1271nm(Rx)-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 50Gbps-QSFP28-SMF-1331nm(Tx)/

Part Number 02312EVV
Model QSFP28-50G-BIDI-10km-SM-1
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3bm-2015, 50GBASE-BR10
Connector type LC

Item Value
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(after FEC)

<2x10E-4(before FEC)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
power.


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02312EVW
Form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC


[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

NOTE
power.

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02312EVX
Form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC


Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
being damaged.
to 10 dB.

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02312EVY
Form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC


Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. If the module needs to reach the
nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
The optical power read by the device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical
power.
being damaged.
to 10 dB.
3.6.20 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module
3.6.20.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
Table 3-951 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-

Part Number 02311NTY
Model OMND10N13
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802, 3bm, 100GBASE-SR4

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

0.1 km(OM4)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

NOTE
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .
3. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.

3.6.20.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial
Table 3-952 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1271~1331nm-2km-commercial
Part Number 02311QDH
Model OSN020N15
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard 100G CWDM4 MSA
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -10 dBm

NOTE
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .
3.6.20.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-

commercial
Table 3-953 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-

commercial specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1310nm-30km(NO
FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial
Part Number 02312AUE
Model OSN030N05
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802, 3ba, 100GBASE-ER4
Connector type LC

Item Value
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V
Target transmission distance [km] 40 km(FEC)

30 km(NO FEC)

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Item Value

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach 40 km, the board FEC function must be enabled. Otherwise,
it can reach only 30 km.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data obtained with FEC not enabled. After FEC is enabled, 1x10E
- 12 can be reached.
3. In 30 km application, the BER can reach 1x10E - 12.
4. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average value, not the OMA optical power.
3.6.20.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial (02312BSS)
Table 3-954 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-

Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial
Part Number 02312BSS
Model OSN010N24
Form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the

commercial

Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-80km-
commercial
Part Number 02312NCX
Model QSFP28-100G-1310nm-80km-SM-01
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard Huawei Define
Connector type LC

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

NOTE
1. FEC must be enabled on the board to ensure that the module reaches the nominal value.
2. The BER 5x10E-5 is the data when FEC is disabled. After FEC is enabled, the BER can
reach 1x10E-12.
3. When the optical module is used for 80 km transmission, it must be interconnected with
Huawei optical modules of the same model.
commercial

Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-40km-
commercial
Part Number 02312NVQ
Model QSFP28-100G-1310-40km-SM
Form factor QSFP28

Item Value
Application standard IEEE 802.3 100GBASE-ER4
Connector type LC

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Item Value
Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -20.9 dBm

NOTE
When an optical module is installed on an interface, the FEC function on the interface is
disabled by default. Pay attention to the FEC status of the peer interface during
interconnection.
commercial (02313SWA)

Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial
Part Number 02313SWA
Model OSN010N24
Form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC
ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Item Value

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the

3.6.20.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-958 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-

commercial
Part Number 02314GYE
Model OSK002N01
Form factor QSFP28
Application standard IEEE 802.3cd, 100GBASE-LR1
Connector type LC

CE Class B
Transmission rate [bit/s] 106.25 Gbit/s(PAM4)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

NOTE
1. The optical power is subject to the OMA optical power. To reach the nominal value, the
FEC function of the optical module must be enabled.
2. The optical power of an optical module displayed on the device is the average optical
power, not the OMA optical power.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
WDM client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
3.6.21 200Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module
3.6.21.1 200Gbps(2*100Gb/s NRZ)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-959 200Gbps(2*100Gb/s NRZ)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 200Gbps(2*100Gb/s NRZ)-QSFP-DD-

Part Number 02314FLG
Model OSK010N03
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE802.3 ba-2010
Connector type Dual-CS
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E–12
DDM options QSFP-DD MSA

Item Value
Transmission rate [bit/s] 2*103.125G Gbit/s

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm
Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: -10.6 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Item Value
3.6.22 400Gbps QSFP-DD Optical Module
3.6.22.1 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-960 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 400Gbps(8*56Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-

Part Number 02312HCM
Model OSK010N02
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE802.3 bs-2017
Connector type LC

<2.4E-4(before FEC)
Transmission rate [bit/s] 425 Gbit/s

Item Value

1277.89 nm
1282.26 nm
1286.66 nm
1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Modulation mode -

1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

Item Value

NOTE
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
protection switching time of WDM client-side 1+1 protection is greater than 50 ms.

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02312YQG
Model OSK040N02
Form factor QSFP-DD
Connector type LC

<2.4E-4(before FEC)

Item Value

1277.89 nm
1282.26 nm
1286.66 nm
1295.56 nm
1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Modulation mode -

1276.89 nm ~ 1278.89 nm
1281.25 nm ~ 1283.27 nm
1285.65 nm ~ 1287.68 nm
1294.53 nm ~ 1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm ~ 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm ~ 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm ~ 1310.19 nm
Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -18.6 dBm

[dBm]

Item Value
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) -4.4 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) -3.6 dBm

[dBm]
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -4.4 dBm

NOTE
When the board is used for 40 km transmission, it must be interconnected with a Huawei
optical module of the same model.
3.6.22.3 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial (02313GRH)
Table 3-962 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-

Part Number 02313GRH
Model OSK080N02
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE802.3 cw
Connector type LC

<1.25E-2(before FEC)

Item Value
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Minimum extinction ratio [dB] -
Modulation mode 400G DP-16QAM
Number of tunable channels -
Channel spacing [GHz] -
Center frequency deviation [GHz] ±1.8 GHz
Tx channel tuning time [s] 180s
Output optical power in case of laser ≤-20 dBm

shutdown [dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm
FEC mode CFEC

RS-FEC
Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm(OSNR)
Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 26 dB

[dB]
PMD tolerance [ps] 10 [email protected] dB OSNR penalty

Item Value
PDL tolerance [dB] 3.5 with ≤ 1.3 dB OSNR penalty
SOP tolerance [krad/s] 50 krad/[email protected] penalty

NOTE
1. After being switched to the 400G ZR mode, modules with part numbers 02314MEF and
02314PXP cannot interconnect with this optical module.
2. Site survey is required if the transmission distance is in the range of 40 km to 120 km.
(1) Only single-span applications are supported.
(2) If the link loss is less than or equal to 28 dB, an OA need to be configured at both the
transmit and receive ends.
(3) If the link loss is greater than 28 dB, optimize the link to reduce the insertion loss to
less than 28 dB.
(4) When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
(5) According to the 400G ZR protocol, the hot start time of a port with a 400G ZR optical
module is less than 180s, and the cold start time is less than 200s.
3.6.22.4 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial
Table 3-963 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

SMF-1528.773~1567.133nm-
commercial
Part Number 02313GSB
Model OSK080N03
Form factor QSFP-DD
Connector type LC


Item Value
Center wavelength [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Number of tunable channels 48/64
Channel spacing [GHz] 75GHz/100GHz

shutdown [dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1528.773nm~1567.133nm
FEC mode CFEC

RS-FEC
Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm

[dB]

Item Value
CD tolerance [ps/nm] 0 ps/nm ~ 2400 ps/nm

NOTE
1. After being switched to the 400G ZR mode, modules with part numbers 02314MEF and
2. Only the single-span application is supported. This optical module needs to be used with
the fiber amplifier module.
3. When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
WDM client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
4. According to the 400G ZR protocol, the hot start time of a port with a 400G ZR optical

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02313KLT
Model OSK002N01
Form factor QSFP-DD
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <1E-4(before FEC)

Item Value

1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

1284.5 nm ~ 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm ~ 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm ~ 1337.5 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Modulation mode -

1284.5 nm ~ 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm ~ 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm ~ 1337.5 nm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: 3.5 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) per lane: -7.6 dBm

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] −4.6dBm, SECQ − 6.0dB

Item Value

NOTE
During link deployment, focus on the reflection indicators of each node. The discrete
reflection indicators must meet the IEEE specifications.
IEEE 802.3cu standard discrete reflection requirements: For a 400G FR4 link with six
reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or equal to –38 dB. For a 400G
FR4 link with eight reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or equal to –40
dB. For a 400G FR4 link with 10 reflection points, each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –41 dB.
3.6.22.6 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial
Table 3-965 400Gbps(8*50Gb/s PAM4)-QSFP-DD-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02313KST
Model QSFP-DD-400G-850-0.1km
Form factor QSFP-DD
Bit error ratio (BER) <5E-6(Pre-FEC)

Item Value
Target transmission distance [km] 100m@OM5

100m@OM4
70m@OM3
Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm~ 860 nm
Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4 dBm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Modulation mode PAM4
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm~ 860 nm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm

[dBm]
Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: −6.5 dBm
Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4 dBm

3.6.22.7 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial (02313LHH)
Table 3-966 400Gbps-QSFP-DD-SMF-1547nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02313LHH
Model OSK080N04
Form factor QSFP-DD
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) <1E-15(after FEC)

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value
Number of tunable channels -
Channel spacing [GHz] -

shutdown [dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1547.715 nm
FEC mode CFEC

RS-FEC
Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm: OSNR>=26dB

-20 dBm ~ 0 dBm: OSNR>=34dB

[dB]

Item Value
NOTE
After being switched to the 400G ZR mode, modules with part numbers 02314MEF and
Only single-span applications are supported.
1. If the link loss is less than 22 dB (standard-defined), site survey is not required and an
OA only needs to be configured at the transmit end.
2. If the transmission distance ranges from 80 km to 120 km, site survey is required to
determine the OA configuration scheme:
(1) If the link loss is less than or equal to 24 dB, an OA needs to be configured only at the
transmit end.
(2) If the link loss is greater than 24 dB but less than or equal to 28 dB, an OA needs to be
configured at both the transmit and receive ends, and the receive optical power threshold
of the involved module needs to be switched using a command.
(3) If the link loss is greater than 28 dB, optimize the link to ensure that the loss is less
than 28 dB.
(4) When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the
(5) According to the 400G ZR protocol, the hot start time of a port with a 400G ZR optical
3.6.22.8 400Gbps(4*100)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
Table 3-967 400Gbps(4*100)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 400Gbps(4*100)-QSFP28-

Part Number 02314FNF
Model OSK010NM1
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE 802.3cu
Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E–12

Item Value
Security standard TUV: EN 62368-1, EN 60825-1;

CB: IEC 60825-1, IEC60825-2;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO. 62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56.
Transmission rate [bit/s] per lane: 106.25 Gbit/s(PAM4)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1304.5 nm-1317.5 nm

NOTE
1. To achieve the nominal value, the FEC function of the board must be enabled.
2. The BER 3x10E–6 is the data when FEC is disabled. After FEC is enabled, the BER can
reach 1x10E–12.
3. The optical power is subject to the OMA. The optical power of an optical module
displayed on a device is the average value, not the OMA optical power.


specifications
Item Value
Basic Information

Part Number 02314LKG
Model OSK006NO1
Form factor QSFP-DD
Connector type LC
Bit error ratio (BER) 1E-6(Pre-FEC)
Center wavelength [nm] 1271nm

1291nm
1311nm
1331nm

1284.5nm~1297.5nm
1304.5nm~1317.5nm
1324.5nm~1337.5nm

[dBm]

[dBm]

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

1284.5nm~1297.5nm
1304.5nm~1317.5nm
1324.5nm~1337.5nm
Minimum Rx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (AVG) 5.1 dBm

[dBm]
Maximum Rx optical power (OMA) 4.4 dBm

[dBm]

NOTE
The optical module needs to be interconnected with the optical module of the same model.
When this type of optical module is used to interconnect with WDM equipment, the WDM
client-side 1+1 protection switching time is greater than 50 ms.
Reflectance indicators of each node must be given attention during link deployment.
Discrete reflectance indicators must comply with IEEE specifications.
Discrete reflectance requirements of the IEEE 802.3cu standard: For a 400G LR4-6 link with
six reflection points, the discrete reflectance of each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –35 dB. For a 400G LR4-6 link with eight reflection points, the discrete reflectance
of each reflection point must be less than or equal to –37 dB. For a 400G LR4-6 link with
10 reflection points, the discrete reflectance of each reflection point must be less than or
equal to –39 dB.

3.6.22.10 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,

478.75Gb/s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF
Table 3-969 High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,

478.75Gb/s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name High Speed Transceiver,QSFP-

DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,
478.75Gb/
s,-10dBm,-6dBm,-12dBm,LC,SMF
Part Number 02314MEF
Model OSK080N11
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE802.3 cw / IEEE 802.3 bs
Connector type LC

CB: IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56;
Target transmission distance [km] 400G ZR: 80km(with OA)

400G ZR+: 80km(single-span)/
480km(six-span)

Item Value

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Number of tunable channels 48 channels (100 GHz spacing)/64

channels (75 GHz spacing)

shutdown [dBm]
FEC mode CFEC for ZR

OFEC for ZR+
Rx optical power range [dBm] -12 dBm ~ 0 dBm (Colored light

mode)
-20 dBm ~ 0 dBm (Gray light mode)

[dB]
CD tolerance [ps/nm] 400ZR 2400 ps/nm

400ZR+ 20000 ps/nm
300ZR+ 40000 ps/nm
200ZR+ 50000 ps/nm
100ZR+ 100000 ps/nm

Item Value

NOTE
1. The 400G ZR mode supports only single-span applications. This optical module must be
used with an OA module.
2. The 400G ZR+ mode supports multi-span applications (six spans at most).
3. When working in 400G ZR mode, the module cannot interconnect with modules with
part numbers 02313GRH, 02313LHH, and 02313GSB.
4. The optical module supports eight working modes. The two ends must work in the same
mode. If the two ends work in different modes, the working status of the interconnected
link is abnormal.
3.6.22.11 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,

478.75Gb/s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF)
Table 3-970 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-band 191.3-196.1THz,

478.75Gb/s,0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.652(SMF) specifications
Item Value
Basic Information
Module name 400G Transceiver,QSFP-DD,Tunable C-

band 191.3-196.1THz,478.75Gb/s,
0dBm,4dBm,-20dBm,LC,ITU-T G.
652(SMF)
Part Number 02314PXP
Model OSK080N12
Form factor QSFP-DD
Application standard IEEE802.3 cw / IEEE 802.3 bs
Connector type LC

<1.8E-2(before FEC)

Item Value

CB: IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2;
NRTL: CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.62368-1-12
* UL 62368-1;
FDA: 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
Notice NO.56;
Target transmission distance [km] 400G ZR: 80km/120km(with OA)

400G ZR+: 80km(single-span)/
480km(six-span)

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]

[dBm]
Number of tunable channels 48 channels (100 GHz spacing)/64

channels (75 GHz spacing)

shutdown [dBm]

Item Value
FEC mode CFEC for ZR

OFEC for ZR+
Rx optical power range [dBm] Gray light mode:

400G ZR -20 dBm ~ 1 dBm
4*100G ZR -20 dBm ~ 1 dBm
Colored light mode:
400G ZR -12~1 dBm
4*100G ZR -12~1 dBm
400G ZR+ -12~1 dBm
4*100G ZR+ -12~1 dBm
3*100G ZR+ -15~1 dBm
2*100G ZR+ -18~1 dBm
1*100G ZR+ -18~1 dBm
Minimum OSNR (back-to-back&EOL) 400ZR 26 dB/0.1nm

[dB] 400ZR+ 24 dB/0.1nm
300ZR+ 21 dB/0.1nm
200ZR+ 16 dB/0.1nm
100ZR+ 12.5 dB/0.1nm
CD tolerance [ps/nm] 400ZR 2400 ps/nm

400ZR+ 20000 ps/nm
300ZR+ 40000 ps/nm
200ZR+ 50000 ps/nm
100ZR+ 100000 ps/nm

NOTE
1. 400G ZR modes support only single-span applications. Use the 400G ZR single mode for
single-span applications.
2. The 400G ZR+ mode supports multi-span applications (six spans at most).
3. When working in 400G ZR mode, the module cannot interconnect with modules with
part numbers 02313GRH, 02313LHH, and 02313GSB.
4. The optical module supports nine working modes. The two ends must work in the same
mode. If the two ends work in different modes, the working status of the interconnected
link is abnormal.

3.7 DPD125-12-24 DC Power Distribution Box

This section describes the hardware features and installation and maintenance of
the DPD125-12-24 DC power distribution box.
3.7.1 DPD125-12-24 Product Description

This section describes the positioning, benefits, usage scenario, main components,
physical parameters, and circuit principle of the product.
Positioning
This product is designed to power devices that need a large number of power
lines. It can convert input lines into more output lines so that a few input lines in
the equipment room can meet power requirement. Therefore, this product
increases power distribution flexibility.
Benefits
● This product is a 4 U (177.8 mm) power distribution box that complies with
the IEC297 standard.
● It can convert 12 DC input lines into 24 DC output lines.
● It includes A and B power distribution areas. Each area has 6 DC input lines
and each DC input line is converted into 2 output lines.
● It can be equipped with air breakers whose output current ranges from 60 A.
Air breaker ports are pluggable bolts and easy to replace.
● The grounding copper bar in the power distribution box can provide 6 input
lines and 24 output lines.
Figure 3-359 DPD125-12-24 appearance

Usage Scenario
The power distribution box can convert 6 or 12 DC input lines into 24 output lines.
It can be used in equipment room that cannot provide enough power lines.
Main Components
Figure 3-360 DPD125-12-24 components
NOTE
The fourth channel of the input terminal cannot be wiring.
Table 3-971 list the DPD125-12-24 components and quantities.
Table 3-971 Components and Quantities
No. Component Quantity
1 Plastic panel 1
2 Circuit breaker 24
3 Handle 2
4 Mounting ear 2

No. Component Quantity
5 Grounding terminal 1
6 Power input terminal 12
7 Power output terminal 24
8 Protective plate for power input terminals 4
9 Protective plate for power output terminals 6
Physical Parameters
Table 3-972 Physical parameters

Item Description
Dimensions (H x W x D) 175 mm x 442 mm x 740 mm (6.89 in. x 17.4 in. x

29.13 in.)
BOM 02122145
Installation platform Huawei N68E and N610E cabinet
Weight 30 kg (60.15 lb)
DC input Rated -48 Vdc/-60 Vdc

voltage voltage
Maximum -40 Vdc to -72 Vdc

voltage
range
Input Maximum 6 x 125 A+6 x 125 A (no copper fitting)

current 3 x 250 A+3 x 250 A (with copper fitting)
Terminal M6 (no copper fitting)

M8 (with copper fitting)
Maximum 50 mm2 (no copper fitting)

cable
95 mm2 (with copper fitting)
diameter
Output Maximum 12×60 A+12×60 A

current
Terminal M6
Maximum 25 mm2
cable
diameter
Air breaker Changeable 60 A (default)

Item Description
Ambient Long term 0°C–45°C

temperature
Short term -5°C–55°C
Storage temperature -40°C–70°C
Ambient Long term 5% RH to 85% RH, no condensing

humidity
Short term 5% RH to 95% RH, no condensing
Relative storage humidity 0% RH to 95% RH, no condensing
NOTE
(1.31 ft.) in front of the cabinet. There should be no protection board on the front or
back of the cabinet.
● "Short-term" refers to continuous working time that does not exceed 96 hours and
accumulated working time per year that does not exceed 15 days. If the working time
exceeds either of these values, it is considered "long-term".
Circuit Principle
NOTE
● You can change the power system of the product to 6-channel input and 24-channel
output by copper fitting NEG A1(-) and NEG A2(-), NEG A3(-) and NEG A4(-), NEG
A5(-) and NEG A6(-), RTN A1(+) and RTN A2(+), RTN A3(+) and RTN A4(+), RTN A5(+)
and RTN A6(+), NEG B1(-) and NEG B2(-), NEG B3(-) and NEG B4(-), NEG B5(-) and
NEG B6(-), RTN A1(-) and RTN B1(+) and RTN B2(+), RTN B3(+) and RTN B4(+), and
RTN B5(+) and RTN B6(+).
● The changed output power must be greater than or equal to the rated power of the
device that is powered by the power distribution box.

Figure 3-361 Circuit principle
3.8 Cables
This chapter describes the structure and specifications of the external cables.

3.8.1 AC&240 V/380 V High-Voltage DC Power Cables

NOTE
The AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC chassis requires Huawei-customized high-voltage DC

connectors. Only AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC cables delivered by Huawei can be used.
Direct Connection to a PDF

AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power cables share the same part number:
04153056 (HVDC 3 straight female – OT M8, 25 m). Figure 3-362 and Figure
3-363 show the appearance and structure of such power cables, respectively.
Figure 3-362 Appearance of an AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power cable

(HVDC 3 straight female – OT M8)
Figure 3-363 Structure of an AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power cable

(connector on the device side – connector on the PDF side)
The mappings between terminals and core wires are as follows: (PE) – yellow and
green; (+) – brown; (-) – blue.
Cable Connections for Direct Connection to a PDF

An AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power cable is connected in the following
way:
● HVDC 3 straight female connector: is connected to a socket on a PEM at the
rear of the chassis.

● OT M8: is connected to a PDF. The brown wire is connected to the L terminal,

the blue wire is connected to the N terminal, and the yellow/green wire is
connected to the ground terminal. The AC power cables to be delivered may
vary according to local regulations or customer requirements.
Select AC&240 V high-voltage DC power cables based on the types of power

sockets used in your equipment room. Huawei provides power distribution unit
(PDU) power cables and country-specific power cables to suit different types of
power sockets.
Connection to a PDU
● C19 PDU power cables: HVDC straight female to C20 straight male AC power
cables, delivered with a PDU with C19 straight female sockets. Figure 3-364
shows a PDU power cable.
Figure 3-364 PDU power cable and PDU
● Huawei horizontal PDU power cables: HVDC straight female to HVDC straight
male power cables must be delivered for PDUs with HVDC ports.
Figure 3-365 Horizontal PDU power cable and PDU
● Country-specific power cables: delivered in compliance with standards of the

destination country or region. For example, AC&240 V high-voltage DC power
cables with PI angle male connectors are used in China. Figure 3-366 shows
such a power cable.

Figure 3-366 Power cable and power strip used in China
When 380 V high-voltage DC power is supplied, an appropriate Huawei horizontal

HVDC PDU is required, and HVDC straight female to HVDC straight male power
cables are delivered with the PDU.
NOTE
L indicates the negative terminal, and N indicates the positive terminal.
Figure 3-367 Structure of a C19 PDU power cable
Figure 3-368 Structure of a horizontal PDU power cable
Figure 3-369 Structure of a power cable used in China

Cable Connections for Connection to a PDU

An AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power cable transmits AC&240 V/380 V
high-voltage DC power to a chassis and is connected in the following way:
● The HVDC 3 straight female connector is connected to a socket on a PEM at
the rear of the chassis.
● The other plug is connected to a PDU or an external socket.
● Technical specifications of a PDU power cable
Table 3-973 Technical specifications of a C19 PDU power cable

Par Description Connector Connector Length
t X1 X2
Nu
mb
er
041 Power Cable,3m, C20 HVDC 3 3m

529 3*14AWG,Black,C20SM, straight straight
87 14SJT3(3C),HVDC male female
3SF,American PDU AC
Power 250V16A

530 3*2.0mm^2,Black,C20SM,H straight straight
71 VCTF3*2.0mm2(3C),HVDC male female
3SF,TAIWAN AC PDU Power
250V16A
041 Power Cable,2.5m, C20 HVDC 3 2.5m

91 VCTF-2.0mm^2(3C),HVDC male female
3SF,Japan AC Power
250V15A

72 05V2V2- male female
F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Europe AC PDU Power
250V16A

F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Australia AC PDU
Power 250V16A

Par Description Connector Connector Length

t X1 X2
Nu
mb
er

530 3*1.5mm^2,Black,C20SM,IS straight straight
75 694-3*1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC male female
3SF,India AC PDU Power
250V16A

F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Kroea AC PDU Power
250V16A

529 3*1.5mm^2,Black,C20SM, straight straight
88 227IEC57-1.5^2(3C),HVDC male female
3SF,China AC PDU Power
250V16A
Table 3-974 describes technical specifications of a horizontal PDU power

cable, and Figure 3-368 shows its structure.
Table 3-974 Technical specifications of a horizontal PDU power cable

Pa Co Description Connecto Connector Length
rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
mb Re
er gio
n
04 Chi Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 na 3*1.5mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
29 3SM, male female
89 227IEC57-1.5^2(3C),HVD
C 3SF,China 380V HVDC
PDU Power Cable
04 Uni Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 ted 3*14AWG,Black,HVDC straight straight
29 Sta 3SM,14SJT3(3C),HVDC male female
90 tes 3SF,American 380V
HVDC PDU Power Cable


rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
mb Re
er gio
n
04 Eur Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 op 3*1.5mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
30 e 3SM,H05V2V2- male female
57 F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Europe 380V HVDC
PDU Power Cable
04 Uni Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 ted 3*2.0mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
30 Kin 3SM,HVCTF3*2.0mm2(3C male female
65 gd ),HVDC 3SF,TAIWAN
om 380V HVDC PDU Power
/ Cable
Sin
ga
por
e/
Ger
ma
ny
/
Swi
tze
rla
nd
/
So
uth
Afri
ca
/
Bra
zil
04 Jap Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 an 3*2.0mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
29 3SM,HVCTF-2.0mm^2(3C male female
92 ),HVDC 3SF,Japan 380V
HVDC PDU Power Cable


rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
mb Re
er gio
n
04 Aus Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 tral 3*2.0mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
30 ia/ 3SM,HO5V2V2- male female
67 Ne F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
w 3SF,Australia 380V HVDC
Zea PDU Power Cable
lan
d
04 Ind Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 ia 3*1.5mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
30 3SM,IS male female
68 694-3*1.5mm^2(3C),HVD
C 3SF,India 380V HVDC
PDU Power Cable
04 So Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 HVDC 3 3m

15 uth 3*1.5mm^2,Black,HVDC straight straight
30 Kor 3SM,HO5V2V2- male female
69 ea F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Korea 380V HVDC
PDU Power Cable
● Technical specifications of a country-specific power cable

Use power cables complying with local standards in different countries or
regions. Select power cables according to Table 3-975. Figure 3-369 shows
the structure of a power cable used in China.
Table 3-975 Technical specifications of power cables applicable to different

countries or regions
rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
m Re
be gio
r n
04 Uni Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC NEMA5-2 HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 ted 3SF, 0P angle straight
27 Sta 12SJT(3C),NEMA5-20PA male female
19 tes M,North America AC
Power 125V20A


rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
m Re
be gio
r n
04 Uni Power Cable,3m, (HVCTF3* PB straight 3m

15 ted 3*2.0mm^2,Black,PBSM, 2.0mm2(3 male
30 Sta HVCTF3*2.0mm2(3C),HV C))-
43 tes DC 3SF,TAIWAN AC (HVDC 3
Power 125V15A straight
female)
04 Ger Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PF angle HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 ma 3SF,H05VVF-1.5^2(3C),P male straight
27 ny FAM,Europe AC Power female
21 250V16A
04 Jap Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC NEMA5-2 HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 an 3SF,HVCTF-3.5mm^2(3C) 0P angle straight
27 ,NEMA5-20PAM,Japan male female
22 AC Power Cable
125V20A
04 Eur Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PFAM 3m

15 ope 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PFAM, straight
29 HO5V2V2- female
80 F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Europe AC Power
250V16A
04 Aus Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PI straight 3m

15 tral 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PISM,H straight male
29 ia O5V2V2- female
81 F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Australia AC Power
250V16A
04 Indi Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 M-IIIAM 3m

15 a 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PM- straight
29 IIIAM,IS female
82 694-3*1.5mm^2(3C),HV
DC 3SF,India AC Power
250V16A
04 Swi Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PJ-II 3m

15 tzer 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PJ- straight straight
29 lan IISM,HO5V2V2- female male
83 d F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Switzerland AC
Power 250V16A


rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
m Re
be gio
r n
04 Sou Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PFAM 3m

15 th 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PFAM, straight
30 Kor HO5V2V2- female
62 ea F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
3SF,Korea AC Power
250V16A
04 Bra Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PN-I 3m

15 zil 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PN- straight straight
29 ISM, female male
85 227IEC57-1.5^2(3C),HVD
C 3SF,Brazil AC Power
250V16A
04 Chi Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PIAM 3m

15 na 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PIAM, straight
29 227IEC57-1.5^2(3C),HVD female
86 C 3SF,China AC Power
250V16A
04 Uni Power Cable,3m, HVDC 3 PGAM 3m

15 ted 3*1.5mm^2,Black,PGAM, straight
30 Kin HO5V2V2- female
63 gdo F-1.5mm^2(3C),HVDC
m 3SF,Britain AC Power
250V13A
04 Aus Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PI straight HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 tral 3SF,H05VV-F male straight
27 ia/ 2.5mm^2(3C),PI female
23 Ne SM,Australia AC Power
w 250V16A
Zea
lan
d
04 Indi Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PM-III HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 a 3SF,IS angle straight
27 694-1.5mm^2(3C),PM- male female
24 IIIAM,India AC Power
250V16A
04 Swi Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PJ-II HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 tzer 3SF,H05VV- straight straight
27 lan F-1.5mm^2(3C),PJ-II male female
25 d SM,Switzerland AC
Power Cable 250V16A


rt unt r X1 X2
Nu ry/
m Re
be gio
r n
04 Sou Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PM angle HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 th 3SF,H05VV- male straight
27 Afri F-1.5mm^2(3C),PMAM,S female
26 ca outh Africa AC Power
250V16A
04 Sou Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PF angle HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 th 3SF,H05VVF-1.5^2(3C),P male straight
27 Kor FAM,Europe AC Power female
21 ea 250V16A
04 Bra Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PN-I HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 zil 3SF,H05VVF-1.5^2(3C),P straight straight
27 N-ISM,Brazil AC Power male female
31 250V16A
04 Chi Power Cable,2.5m, PI angle HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 na 3*1.5mm^2,HVDC 3SF, male straight
19 227IEC53-1.5^2(3C),PIA female
63 M,For China
04 Uni Power Cable,2.5m,HVDC PG angle HVDC 3 2.5 m

15 ted 3SF,H05VV- male straight
27 Kin F-1.5mm^2(3C),PG female
20 gdo AM,Britain AC Power
m Cable 250V13A
3.8.2 DC Power Cables

Overview
DC power cables include -48 V power cables and RTN ground cables. You need to
cut the delivered DC power cables into appropriate lengths according to actual
situations in your site and make DC power cables onsite. Choose appropriate DC
power cables for different scenarios according to the following rules:
● If a switch is connected to a power distribution box or frame, use DC power
cables with a JG2 90° right angle terminal at one end and an OT terminal at
the other end.
● If a switch is directly connected to a power distribution cabinet, use DC power
cables with a JG2 90° right angle terminal at one end and determine the
terminal type at the other end and the cable length based on the site survey
result.

NOTICE
Do not bend OT terminals to 90 degrees onsite.
DC power cables with the following cross-sectional areas are available: 25 mm2
and 35 mm2. They apply to scenarios that require different power supply
distances, as listed in Table 3-976.
Table 3-976 DC power cable usage scenarios

Power Max PM Rated Input 25 mm2 35 mm2
Module Output Current Per Power Cable Power Cable
Number Power Channel Length Length
02312GDC 2200 W 46 A ≤ 27 m ≤ 38 m
02313GSP 3000 W 68 A ≤ 27 m ≤ 38 m
02312TUJ 4000 W 95 A - ≤ 27 m
Appearance and Structure

NOTE
The figures provided here are for reference only and may differ from the actually delivered
cables.
Figure 3-370 shows a DC power cable used for connection with a power
distribution box or frame.
Figure 3-370 Appearance of a DC power cable
1. JG2 90° right angle terminal 2. OT terminal
Figure 3-371 shows a DC power cable used for connection with a power
distribution cabinet.

Figure 3-371 Appearance of a DC power cable
1. JG2 90° right angle terminal
Connection
A DC power cable transmits DC power to a chassis. Terminals are crimped onsite.
A DC power cable is connected in the following way:
● When a device is connected with a power distribution box or frame, the JG2
90° right angle terminal is connected to a terminal block on a DC PEM at the
rear of the device chassis, and the OT terminal is connected to the power
distribution box or frame.
● When a device is connected with a power distribution cabinet, the JG2 90°
right angle terminal is connected to a terminal block on a DC PEM at the rear
of the device chassis, and the other end is connected to the power distribution
cabinet.
3.8.3 Console Port Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the console
interface cable.
3.8.3.1 Introduction
The console interface cable is used to connect the console interface on the
NetEngine 8000 X to the serial interface of the console to transmit configuration
data of the NetEngine 8000 X.
The console interface cable is an 8-core shielded cable. One end of the cable is an
RJ45 connector connected to the console interface on the MPU. The other end has
DB9 and DB25 connectors, either of which is connected to the serial interface on a
computer.
3.8.3.2 Structure
Figure 3-372 shows the structure of a console interface cable. Table 3-977 shows
the pin assignment on the console interface cable.

Figure 3-372 Console interface cable
1. Direction A 2. DB25 female 3. Label 4. RJ45 connector

connector
5. Direction B 6. Direction C 7. DB9 female W1 and W2

connector communication cable
Table 3-977 Pin assignment on the console interface cable
RJ45 Direction DB9 Signal
1 -> 8 CTS (Clear to Send)
2 -> 6 DSR (Data Set Ready)
3 -> 2 RXD (Receive Data)
4 - 5 GND
5 - 1 GND
6 <- 3 TXD (Transmit Data)
7 <- 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

RJ45 Direction DB9 Signal
8 <- 7 RTS (Request to Send)
3.8.3.3 Technical Specifications
Table 3-978 lists the technical specifications of the console interface cable.
Table 3-978 Technical specifications of the console interface cable

Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-

shielded plug
Connector X2 Cable connector-D type-25PIN-female
Connector X3 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,UL2464,0.32mm,28AWG,2 Pairs,PANTONE

WARM GRAY 1U,for OEM
Number of 4
cores
Fireproof VW-1
level
Available 3m
length
3.8.4 Clock Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the clock cable.
● Clock cable for a common MPU

The clock cable is used to connect the NetEngine 8000 X to the clock interface
of the external equipment. With the clock cable, the NetEngine 8000 X can
receive two channels of 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbit/s synchronous clock signals
provided by the upstream equipment and provide two channels of 2.048 MHz
or 2.048 Mbit/s synchronous clock signals for the downstream equipment.
One end of the clock cable is an SMB connector connected to the clock
interface on theMPU and the other end is connected to the clock interface on
an external device. The connector on the other end needs to be prepared as
required on site.
The SMB connector is used with the 75-ohm clock cable, and the RJ45
connector is used with the 120-ohm trunk cable. If one end is an SMB

connector and the other end is an RJ45 connector, use a 120-ohm to 75-ohm
converter box and a 120-ohm trunk cable.
● Clock cable for the 1588v2-supporting /MPU
A clock cable is used to connect the clock interface on the NetEngine 8000 X
to the clock interface on another device. In this manner, the NetEngine 8000 X
can receive 2 Mbit/s clock signals, 2 MHz clock signals, 1 PPS +ASCII time
signals, 1 PPS+RS232 time signals, or two channels of DCLS time signals from
the upstream device and provides 2 Mbit/s clock signals, 2 MHz clock signals,
1 PPS +ASCII time signals, 1 PPS+RS232 time signals, or two channels of DCLS
time signals to the downstream device.
One end of the clock cable is an SMB/RJ45 connector connected to the clock
interface on the MPU and the other end is connected to the clock interface on
an external device. The connector on the other end needs to be prepared as
required on site.
The SMB connector is used with the 75-ohm clock cable, and the RJ45
connector is used with the 120-ohm trunk cable. If one end is an SMB
connector and the other end is an RJ45 connector, use a 120-ohm to 75-ohm
converter box and a 120-ohm trunk cable.
NOTE
The wire sequence of a trunk cable used as a clock cable differs from the wire sequence of
an ordinary twisted cable.
3.8.4.2 Structure
75-ohm Clock Cable

Figure 3-373 shows the structure of the 75-ohm clock cable.
Figure 3-373 75-ohm clock cable

1. Coaxial connector-SMB 2. Label
120-ohm trunk cable

The 120-ohm trunk cable adopts the RJ-45 connector. Figure 3-374 shows the
structure of the 120-ohm trunk cable.
Figure 3-374 120-ohm trunk cable
Table 3-979 shows the pin assignments on the 120-ohm trunk cable.
Table 3-979 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm trunk cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.5 X2.2 Twisted
X1.4 X2.1
X1.2 X2.5 Twisted
X1.1 X2.4
X1.3 X2.7 Twisted
X1.6 X2.8
X1.7 X2.3 Twisted
X1.8 X2.6
Table 3-980 lists the technical specifications of the 75-ohm clock cable.

Table 3-980 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm clock cable
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector-SMB plug-75 ohm inline

female
Cable Type Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34

mm-shield
Diameter of the 3.9 mm (0.15 in.)- 2.1 mm (0.08 in.)- 0.34

protection layer - mm (0.01 in.)
diameter of the
internal insulation -
diameter of the
internal conductor
Available length 10 m (32.81 ft), 15 m (49.21 ft), 20 m (65.62

ft), and 30 m (98.42 ft)
Table 3-981 lists the technical specifications of the 120-ohm trunk cable.
Table 3-981 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm trunk cable
Item Description
120- Connector Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bit-shielded-

ohm crystal model plug
cable
Type Cable,120ohm,1E1,0.4mm,MP8-II,
120CC4P0.4P430U(S),MP8-II,Expert 2.0
Length 3 m (9.84 ft), 15 m (49.21 ft), 30 m (98.42 ft), 60 m

(196.85 ft) and 80 m (262.46 ft)
3.8.5 Ethernet Cable

Ethernet cables are classified into two types: straight-through cables and crossover
cables.
Ethernet cable is of two types: the straight-through cable and the crossover cable.
Straight-through Cable
The straight-through cable is used to connect the Ethernet interfaces between the
following devices:
● A router device and a hub

● A router device and an Ethernet switch

● A computer and an Ethernet switch
● A computer and a hub
Crossover Cable
The crossover cable is used to connect the Ethernet interfaces between the
following devices:
● A router device and a router device

● A router device and a computer
● A hub and a hub
● A hub and a switch
● A switch and a switch
● A computer and a computer
3.8.5.2 Structure
As shown in Figure 3-375, the straight-through cable and the crossover cable are
standard shielded network cables and, adopt an RJ45 connector shown in Figure
3-376.
Figure 3-375 Network cable
1. Connector - RJ45 2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Label 2

Figure 3-376 RJ45 connector
Table 3-982 and Table 3-983 show the pin assignments of the straight-through
cable and the crossover cable respectively.
Table 3-982 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Twisted
X1.1 X2.1 White/orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Twisted
X1.3 X2.3 White/green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted
X1.5 X2.5 White/blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted
X1.7 X2.7 White/brown
Table 3-983 Pin assignments of the crossover cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted
X1.3 X2.1 White/orange
X1.2 X2.6 Green Twisted
X1.1 X2.3 White/green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted
X1.5 X2.5 White/blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted
X1.7 X2.7 White/brown

Table 3-984 and Table 3-985 show the technical specifications of the straight-
through cable and crossover cable respectively.
Table 3-984 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network port connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-shield-

plug-24-26AWG-CAT 6/SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable-100±15ohm-shielded enhanced 5

types-CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 core PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof class CM
Available length 5 m (16.40 ft), 10 m (32.81 ft), 20 m (65.62 ft), and 30 m

(98.42 ft)
Table 3-985 Technical specifications of the crossover cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network port connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-shield-

plug-24~26AWG-CAT 6/SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable-100±15ohm-shielded enhanced 5

types-CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 core PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof class CM
Available length 5 m (16.40 ft) and 30 m (98.42 ft)
3.8.6 Serial Cable (RS232/RS485)

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the serial cable.
3.8.6.1 Overview
The serial cable can be RS232 cable or RS485 cable, which is used for transferring
the serial port service. One end of the serial cable is an 8-pin RJ45 connector and
the other end is an RJ45 connector or a connector of other types. The 8-pin RJ45
connector is connected to the serial port on the device. The other connector is
connected to the terminal housing a serial port.

3.8.6.2 Structure

Figure 3-377 shows the appearance of the serial cable.
Figure 3-377 Structure of the serial cable
Pin Assignments
The X1 end of the serial cable is an RJ45 connector and the other end is a
connector of other types. Connect the serial cable based on the pin assignments of
the serial cable, as shown in Table 3-986.
Table 3-986 Pin assignments of the serial cable
X1 Signal Name
1 GND
2 GND
3 RS232_TXD (connected to the peer

RXD)
4 GND
5 GND
6 RS232_RXD (connected to the peer

TXD)
7 RS485_D+
8 RS485_D-

Table 3-987 describes the technical specifications of the serial cable.
Table 3-987 Technical specifications of the serial cable

Item Specification
Connector (X1) RJ45 connector
Cable type Category-5 unshielded twisted pairs

(UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP)
Color Dark gray
Characteristic impedance 100.0 ohms
Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.510 mm
Breakdown voltage 500.0 V
DC resistance of the inner conductor 93.8 ohms
Core number 8
Frequency range 0-100 MHz
Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m @ 100 MHz
3.8.7 USB-to-Ethernet serial Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the USB-to-
Ethernet cable.
Overview
One end of a USB-to-Ethernet cable is a USB port used to connect to a client, and
the other end is split into two RJ45 connectors used to connect to routers. The two
RJ45 connectors include one standard console port and one non-standard console
port. Pin assignment for the two ports is different. For details, see Table 1.
Appearance
Figure 3-378 Structure of the USB-to-Ethernet cable

Pin Assignment
Table 3-988 Pin assignment of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Wire Rela Colo Desc Start Conv End Desc Colo Rela Wire
tion r ripti Pin erter Pin ripti r tion
on on
W3- Pair Whit +5V X1.1 USB X2.6 RS23 Blue Pair W1-
Main e DC to 2_RX Labe
Labe RS23 l1
l Blue Data X1.2 2 X2.3 RS23 Whit (RS2
- conv 2_TX e 32)
Pair Oran Data X1.3 ersio X2.5 GND Oran -
ge + n ge
Whit GND X1.4 X3.5 RS23 Blue Pair W2-

e 2_RX Labe
l2
- - - - - X3.8 RS23 Whit (Spe
2_TX e cial
- - - - - X3.4 GND Oran - RS23
ge 2)
Table 3-989 Technical specifications of the USB-to-Ethernet cable
Part Mod Description Conn Conn Leng Nu Fire

Num el ector ector th mbe Ratin
ber X1 X2 r of g
Core
s
0407 - Signal Cable,USB-to- USB- MP8- 1.5 m - -

1851 Ethernet cable, A(Ma II
1.5m,USB- le)
A(Male),CC2P0.48B(S),
2*MP8-II
NOTICE
● To use the USB-to-Ethernet serial cable, download the driver from the website
and configure the driver as required. Download the driver from http://
www.wch-ic.com/search?q=CH340&t=downloads.
● The device uses the W1 cable number and the cable label is RS232.

3.8.8 Clock Transfer Cable
Overview
Useing the clock transfer cable (120 ohms to 75 ohms).
Appearance
Figure1 shows the appearance of the clock transfer cable (120 ohms to 75 ohms).
Figure 3-379 Appearance of the clock transfer cable (120 ohms to 75 ohms).
Cable Pinouts
Table 3-990 Pinout of a cable
120-ohm Cable 75-ohm Cable
Connector Color Description Relationshi Cable Number

Pin p
X1.1 Orang Negative receive end Twisted pair W1

e of the 120-ohm
external clock
X1.2 White Positive receive end

of the 120-ohm
external clock
X1.4 Blue Negative transmit Twisted pair W2

end of the 120-ohm
external clock
X1.5 White Positive transmit end

of the 120-ohm
external clock
X1.3 Green Unspecified Twisted pair W3
X1.6 White Unspecified
X1.7 White Unspecified Twisted pair W4

120-ohm Cable 75-ohm Cable
Connector Color Description Relationshi Cable Number

Pin p
X1.8 Brown Unspecified
Table 3-991 Technical specifications of clock transfer cable

Part Mo Description Con Connec Le Nu Fire
Nu del nec tor X2 ngt mbe Rating
mb tor h r of
er X1 Cor
es
040 T-1- Single Cable,120ohm To MP - 30 - -

447 Sh- 75ohm Clock Cable, 8-II m
26 RJ45 30m,MP8-II,
-30 120CC4P0.4P430U(S)
+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S)
3.8.9 Fiber Jumpers

Overview
A fiber jumper consists of one or more optical fibers of a certain length and the
optical connectors at both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a
fiber terminal box.
Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:
1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the port type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is the same
type as the port to which it will be connected.

NOTE
In V800R012C00, 42 mm LC optical fibers with short jackets are recommended.
Figure 3-380 42 mm LC optical fiber with short jacket

Figure 3-381 shows the appearance of an LC single-mode fiber.
Figure 3-381 Appearance of an LC single-mode fiber
Figure 3-382 shows the appearance of an LC multimode fiber.

Figure 3-382 Appearance of an LC multimode fiber
Figure 3-383 shows the appearance of an MPO-MPO single-mode fiber.
Figure 3-383 Appearance of an MPO-MPO single-mode fiber
Figure 3-384 shows the appearance of an 8-core or 12-core MPO-MPO multi-

mode fiber.

Figure 3-384 Appearance of an 8-core or 12-core MPO-MPO multi-mode fiber
Figure 3-385 shows the appearance of a 16-core MPO-MPO multi-mode fiber.
Figure 3-385 Appearance of a 16-core MPO-MPO multi-mode fiber
Figure 3-386 shows the appearance of an MPO-4*DLC fiber.
Figure 3-386 Appearance of an MPO-4*DLC fiber

Pin Assignments
● Pin assignments of an 8-core MPO-MPO fiber
Figure 3-387 Structure of an 8-core MPO-MPO fiber
Table 3-992 Pin assignments of an 8-core MPO-MPO fiber

X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 12
2 11
3 10
4 9
9 4
10 3
11 2
12 1
● Pin assignments of a 12-core MPO-MPO fiber

Figure 3-388 Structure of a 12-core MPO-MPO fiber
Table 3-993 Pin assignments of a 12-core MPO-MPO fiber

X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 12
2 11
3 10
4 9
5 8
6 7
7 6
8 5
9 4
10 3
11 2
12 1
● Pin assignments of a 16-core MPO-MPO fiber

Figure 3-389 Structure of a 16-core MPO-MPO fiber
Table 3-994 Pin assignments of a 16-core MPO-MPO fiber

X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 16
2 15
3 14
4 13
5 12
6 11
7 10
8 9
9 8
10 7
11 6
12 5
13 4

X1 Pin X2 Pin
14 3
15 2
16 1
● Pin assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber
Figure 3-390 Structure of an MPO-4*DLC fiber
Table 3-995 Pin assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber

X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 1B
2 2B
3 3B
4 4B
9 4A
10 3A
11 2A
12 1A

Optical Fiber, Optical Connector, and Optical Distribution Frame

Optical Fiber
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode fibers and multimode fibers.
● Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5 μm to 10 μm and transmit laser in a
single mode with a specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide
frequency band and a large transmission capacity, so they are used for long-
distance transmission. Most single-mode fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure
3-381.
● Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 μm or 62.5 μm and transmit laser in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. These fibers have a lower
transmission capacity than single-mode fibers and are used for short-distance
transmission. Model dispersion occurs during transmission over multimode
fibers.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are
classified into four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a
large core diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light
gathering ability and bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50 μm/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a
small core diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers,
OM2 fibers provide higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce
the modal dispersion. When transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm
wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers support maximum link lengths of 220
m and 550 m, respectively. OM1 and OM2 fibers can provide sufficient
bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1 and OM2 fibers
are orange, as shown in Figure 3-382.
– OM3: next-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission
distances than OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4
is an improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth.
OM4 fibers provide 4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3
fibers provide only 2000 MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3
and OM4 fibers are light green, as shown in Figure 3-384. You can
identify OM3 and OM4 fibers by their labels or printed marks.
MPO fibers are used for 40GE and 100GE optical modules. An MPO fiber consists
of multiple multimode fiber cores, and each multimode fiber core provides one
laser transmission channel. MPO fibers may come in the following specifications:
8-core, 12-core, or 24-core.
● A 40GE optical module uses four channels to transmit laser and four channels
to receive laser. That is, a total of eight channels are required for a 40GE
optical module. 8-core and 12-core MPO fibers have the same definition of
fiber channels. Therefore, they are equivalent in functionality when
connecting to 40GE optical modules.
● When 100GE optical modules are used, choose MPO fibers according to the
optical module form factor. Choose 8-core or 12-core fibers for QSFP28
optical modules with MPO connectors.
Optical Connector

Optical connectors are used to connect optical fibers of the same type. Table
3-996 lists common optical connectors.
Table 3-996 Common optical connectors

Connector Optical Connector
Type
Square SC/PC LC/PC MTRJ/PC MPO

connector connector connector connector connector
Round FC/PC ST/PC - -

connector connector connector
Figure 3-391 shows an LC/PC optical connector.
Figure 3-391 LC/PC optical connector
NOTICE
When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector

with the optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following
points:
● To connect a fiber, align the optical connector with the optical port and gently
insert the optical fiber into the port.
● To remove a fiber, press the clip on the connector, push the connector inward
slightly, and pull the fiber out.
Ceramic Ferrule End Face

Based on the return loss, the end faces of the fiber's ceramic ferrule are classified
into three types: PC, UPC, and APC, as shown in Figure 3-392.

Figure 3-392 Polishing types of the fiber's ceramic ferrule end face
Table 3-997 Polishing types of the fiber's ceramic ferrule end face
Polishing Return Loss Characteristics Application
Type Scenario
PC -35 dB Polished with a Scenarios with no

slight curvature high requirements
on return loss
UPC -50 dB Dome-shaped Scenarios with high

requirements on
APC -60 dB Polished with an 8- return loss
degree angle
NOTICE
In principle, optical fibers with different ceramic ferrule end faces cannot be
directly connected through optical connectors. Interconnection between PC and
UPC connectors does not cause permanent physical damage to them. The
structure of APC end faces is totally different from that of PC end faces. Therefore,
if fibers with APC end faces and fibers with PC end faces are connected through
optical connectors, their ceramic ferrule end faces will be damaged. To connect
them together, use a fiber jumper. This, however, adversely affects the
transmission performance.
Figure 3-393 shows the requirements of different types of ceramic ferrule end
face of fibers.

Figure 3-393 Fiber's ceramic ferrule end faces
Table 3-998 End face requirements for fiber ceramic ferrules
Type Zone Diameter Defects Scratches
Single A. Core 0-25 μm None None

mode
conne B. Cladding 25-120 μm < 2 μm: no limit ≤ 3 μm: no limit
ctor 2-5 μm: 5 > 3 μm: 0
> 5 μm: 0
C. Adhesive 120-130 μm No limit No limit
D. Contact 130-250 μm ≥ 10 μm: 0 No limit
Multi A. Core 0-65 μm ≤ 5 μm: 4 ≤ 5 μm: no limit

mode > 5 μm: 0 > 5 μm: 0
conne
ctor B. Cladding 65-120 μm < 2 μm: no limit ≤ 5 μm: no limit
2-5 μm: 5 > 5 μm: 0
> 5 μm: 0
C. Adhesive 120-130 μm No limit No limit
D. Contact 130-250 μm ≥ 10 μm: 0 No limit
3.8.10 Ground Cable
Overview
The ground cable ensures equipotential between the chassis and cabinet. The
ground point on the chassis is at the rear of the chassis on the right side, and is
identified by a yellow grounding label.


Figure 3-394 shows the appearance of the ground cable.
Figure 3-394 Appearance of the ground cable
Figure 3-395 shows the structure of the ground cable.
Figure 3-395 Structure of the ground cable
Connection
A ground cable grounds a device to protect it from lightning and electromagnetic
interference. A ground cable is connected to a chassis in the following way:
● The OT bare crimp terminal X1 connects to the ground point on the chassis.
● The OT bare crimp terminal X2 connects to the ground bar of the cabinet.
Table 3-999 Technical specifications of the ground cable

Part Number Description X1 X2 Length
04152748 Power Cable, 14170120: 14170020: 0.85 m

0.85m,OT2-16 OT2-16-8 OT16-6
-8,H07Z-
K-16^2G&Y,O
T16-6

Part Number Description X1 X2 Length
04152748-00 Power Cable, 14170120: 14170020: 4m

1 4m,OT2-16-8, OT2-16-8 OT16-6
H07Z-
K-16^2G&Y,O
T16-6
3.9 Fiber Breakout

Fiber breakout involves breakout fiber and breakout box scenarios.
Positioning
Breakout fibers are used to flexibly allocate bandwidth resources to routers. They
cooperate with a breakout optical module to convert an MPO interface into
multiple LC interfaces to facilitate fiber layout.
Usage Scenario
The breakout function applies to a scenario where bandwidth resources are
unevenly allocated between two routers at different levels. In comparison with
breakout boxes, breakout fibers implement the following functions:
● Loosen fiber layout.
● Extend the cabling distance.
Fiber Structure
To insert a breakout optical module (multimode and short transmission distance)
into a board, use an MPO-LC fiber to directly connect the board and the optical
module.

Figure 3-396 MPO-LC fiber structure
NOTE
When using a breakout optical fiber, insert the X1 end into a 40GE QSFP+ optical module
and the X2 end into four 10GE interfaces. If the 40GE interface is Down but the four 10GE
interfaces are Up, check the 40GE interface status.
● Check whether the 40GE interface supports the breakout function. If the 40GE interface
does not support the breakout function, replace it with another interface that supports
the breakout function.
● Check whether the 40GE interface is in the breakout state. If the 40GE interface is not in
the breakout state, configure the 40GE interface to be in the breakout state.
Table 3-1000 lists the breakout fibers supported by the NetEngine 8000 X.

Table 3-1000 Breakout fibers supported

Type BOM Number Offi Mode
cial
Na
me
Optical Cable 14134759 MP Single mode

Parts,MPO/APC,MPO/ O1
APC,Single mode,10m, 2-
8 cores,GJFH-8G. MP
657A2,3.5mm,LSZH, O1
43mm Short 2-
MPO,Bending SM-
insensitive 10

Assembly,MPO/APC, O1
4*DLC/ 2-4
PC,Singlemode,GJFH DLC
8G.657A2(LSZH),15m, -
3.5mm,8 Cores,0m/1m, SM-
2mm 15
Optical Cable 14132537 SS- Multimode

Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-5
Optical Cable 14132537-005 SS- Multimode

2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
5B

PC,MULTI-MODE,30m, MP
8 CORES, O1
0/1m,GJFH-8A1A. 2-4*
2(OM3),3.5MM, DLC
2mm,LSZH,43MM -
SHORT MPO,BENDING M-3
INSENSITIVE 0


cial
Na
me

2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
00
Table 3-1001 lists the optical modules and boards mapping breakout fibers.
Table 3-1001 Optical modules and boards mapping breakout fibers

Breakout Fiber Optical Module Board
[14134759/MPO12- [02311NUA/ Check the Hardware

MPO12-SM-10] Optical OSM010N11] High Description. If the
Cable Parts,MPO/ Speed Transceiver,QSFP+, description of a board
APC,MPO/APC,Single 1310,41.25Gbps,-8.2dBm, contains QSFP28 or
mode,10m,8 0.5dBm,-12.6dBm,MPO,S QSFP+ and the value of
cores,GJFH-8G. M,10km the Whether breakout
657A2,3.5mm,LSZH, is supported field on the
43mm Short Functional Specifications
MPO,Bending insensitive tab page is displayed as
Yes, the optical module
[14132538/ and breakout fiber can
MPO12-4DLC-SM-15] be used together with
Optical Cable the board. For example, .
Assembly,MPO/APC, The description of the
4*DLC/ board contains QSFP28
PC,Singlemode,GJFH 8G. and the value of the
657A2(LSZH),15m, Whether breakout is
3.5mm,8 Cores,0m/1m, supported field on the
2mm Functional Specifications
[14132537/SS-OP- [02310WUU/ tab page is displayed as
MPO12-4*DLC-M-5] OMXD30010] Optical Yes. To enable breakout
Optical Cable Transceiver,QSFP+, interfaces, run the port
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ 850nm, split command to
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 41.25Gbps,-7.6dBm,-1dB complete breakout
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. m,-9.5dBm,MPO,MMF, configuration..
2(OM3),3.5mm, 0.15km Therefore, the optical
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short module and breakout
MPO,Bending insensitive fiber can be used
together with the board.

[14132537-005/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-15B]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a.
2(OM3),3.5mm,
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short
MPO,Bending insensitive
[14132537-006/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-30]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,MULTI-MODE,30m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1A.
2(OM3),3.5MM,
2mm,LSZH,43MM
SHORT MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE
[14132537-001/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-100]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,100m,8
2(OM3),3.5mm,
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short
NOTE
Characters in the brackets indicate the BOM number and official name that are separated
using a slash ("/") in the [BOM number/Official name] format.
3.9.1 Breakout Fibers

This section describes the positioning, usage scenario, structure, and technical
specifications of breakout fibers. In breakout fiber scenarios, no breakout box is
needed. Boards, optical modules, and breakout fibers are needed.
3.9.2 Breakout Boxes

This section describes breakout boxes. In breakout box scenarios, boards, optical
modules, breakout boxes, and jumpers are required.

Positioning
Breakout fibers are used to flexibly allocate bandwidth resources to routers. They
cooperate with a breakout optical module to convert an MPO interface into
multiple LC interfaces to facilitate fiber layout.
Usage Scenario
The breakout function applies to a scenario where bandwidth resources are
unevenly allocated between two routers at different levels. In comparison with
breakout boxes, breakout fibers implement the following functions:
● Loosen fiber layout.
● Extend the cabling distance.
Fiber Structure
To insert a breakout optical module (multimode and short transmission distance)
into a board, use an MPO-LC fiber to directly connect the board and the optical
module.
Figure 3-397 MPO-LC fiber structure

NOTE
When using a breakout optical fiber, insert the X1 end into a 40GE QSFP+ optical module
and the X2 end into four 10GE interfaces. If the 40GE interface is Down but the four 10GE
interfaces are Up, check the 40GE interface status.
● Check whether the 40GE interface supports the breakout function. If the 40GE interface
does not support the breakout function, replace it with another interface that supports
the breakout function.
● Check whether the 40GE interface is in the breakout state. If the 40GE interface is not in
the breakout state, configure the 40GE interface to be in the breakout state.
Table 3-1002 lists the breakout fibers supported by the NetEngine 8000 X.
Table 3-1002 Breakout fibers supported

cial
Na
me

Parts,MPO/APC,MPO/ O1
APC,Single mode,10m, 2-
8 cores,GJFH-8G. MP
657A2,3.5mm,LSZH, O1
43mm Short 2-
MPO,Bending SM-
insensitive 10

Assembly,MPO/APC, O1
4*DLC/ 2-4
PC,Singlemode,GJFH DLC
8G.657A2(LSZH),15m, -
3.5mm,8 Cores,0m/1m, SM-
2mm 15
Optical Cable 14132537 SS- Multimode

2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-5


cial
Na
me

2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
5B

PC,MULTI-MODE,30m, MP
8 CORES, O1
0/1m,GJFH-8A1A. 2-4*
2(OM3),3.5MM, DLC
2mm,LSZH,43MM -
SHORT MPO,BENDING M-3
INSENSITIVE 0

2(OM3),3.5mm, 2-4*
2mm,LSZH,43mm DLC
Short MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
00
Table 3-1003 lists the optical modules and boards mapping breakout fibers.
Table 3-1003 Optical modules and boards mapping breakout fibers
[14134759/MPO12- [02311NUA/ Check the Hardware

MPO12-SM-10] Optical OSM010N11] High Description. If the
Cable Parts,MPO/ Speed Transceiver,QSFP+, description of a board
APC,MPO/APC,Single 1310,41.25Gbps,-8.2dBm, contains QSFP28 or
mode,10m,8 0.5dBm,-12.6dBm,MPO,S QSFP+ and the value of
cores,GJFH-8G. M,10km the Whether breakout
657A2,3.5mm,LSZH, is supported field on the
43mm Short Functional Specifications
MPO,Bending insensitive tab page is displayed as

[14132538/ and breakout fiber can

MPO12-4DLC-SM-15] be used together with
Optical Cable the board. For example,
Assembly,MPO/APC, [03059076 /
4*DLC/ CR8D00EKNBCP]40-Port
PC,Singlemode,GJFH 8G. 100GBase-QSFP28
657A2(LSZH),15m, Integrated Line
3.5mm,8 Cores,0m/1m, Processing Unit
2mm CM(LPUI-4T-CM),
[03050BDG/
[14132537/SS-OP- [02310WUU/ CR8D00EENBC1] 20-Port
MPO12-4*DLC-M-5] OMXD30010] Optical 100GBase-QSFP28
Optical Cable Transceiver,QSFP+, Integrated Line
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ 850nm, Processing Unit
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 41.25Gbps,-7.6dBm,-1dB CM(LPUI-2T-CM) . The
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. m,-9.5dBm,MPO,MMF, description of the board
2(OM3),3.5mm, 0.15km contains QSFP28 and the
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short value of the Whether
MPO,Bending insensitive breakout is supported
[14132537-005/SS-OP- field on the Functional
MPO12-4*DLC-M-15B] Specifications tab page is
Optical Cable displayed as Yes. To
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ enable breakout
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8 interfaces, run the port
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. split command to
2(OM3),3.5mm, complete breakout
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short configuration..
MPO,Bending insensitive Therefore, the optical
module and breakout
[14132537-006/SS-OP- fiber can be used
MPO12-4*DLC-M-30] together with the board.
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,MULTI-MODE,30m,8
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1A.
2(OM3),3.5MM,
2mm,LSZH,43MM
SHORT MPO,BENDING
INSENSITIVE
[14132537-001/SS-OP-
MPO12-4*DLC-M-100]
Optical Cable
Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/
PC,Multi-mode,100m,8
2(OM3),3.5mm,
2mm,LSZH,43mm Short

NOTE
Characters in the brackets indicate the BOM number and official name that are separated
using a slash ("/") in the [BOM number/Official name] format.
3.9.2.1 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)

This section describes the appearance, components, MPO-12 jumper, and technical
specifications of this product.
Appearance
Figure 3-398 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)
Components
Figure 3-399 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box(single-mode)
1. MPO adapter 2. LC adapter 3. Mounting ear
MPO adapters map LC adapters according to their numbers displayed on the

panel. Figure 3-400 shows the mapping between MPO and LC adapters.
Figure 3-400 Mapping between MPO and LC adapters
MPO-12 Jumper
The TYPE-B MPO jumper is used. The following figure shows the MPO-12 jumper
structure and line orders of X1 and X2 ports.

Table 3-1004 describes the mappings between the lanes of the X1 and X2 ports.
Table 3-1004 Mappings between the lanes of the X1 and X2 ports

Start End Start End
X1-1 X2-12 X1-7 /
X1-2 X2-11 X1-8 /
X1-3 X2-10 X1-9 X2-4
X1-4 X2-9 X1-10 X2-3
X1-5 / X1-11 X2-2
X1-6 / X1-12 X2-1

Table 3-1005 Technical specifications of the 10-Port-MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout

Box (single-mode)
Item Description
BOM Number 02082890
Official Name ODBS10040
Dimensions (H x W x D) 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 164 mm
Mounting ear 19-inch supported
Weight 2.3 kg
Insertion loss ≤ 0.75 db
Return loss Single-mode: ≥ 30 db
Operating temperature –40°C to +65°C
Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C
Relative operating humidity ● Long term: 5% RH to 85% RH, non-

condensing
● Short term: 5% RH to 95% RH,
non-condensing
Relative storage humidity 0% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Table 3-1006 Optical modules, jumpers, and boards supported by the 10-Port-
MPO-12-40-Port-LC-Breakout Box (single-mode)
Optical Module MPO-MPO Fiber Board
[02311NUA/ [14134759/MPO12- Supported boards:

OSM010N11] Function MPO12-SM-10] Optical Check the Hardware
Module,OSM010N11,Hig Cable Parts,MPO/ Description. If the
h Speed Transceiver,QSFP APC,MPO/APC,Single description of a board
+, mode,10m,8 contains QSFP28 or QSFP
1310,41.25Gbps,-8.2dBm, cores,GJFH-8G. + and the value of the
0.5dBm,-12.6dBm,MPO,S 657A2,3.5mm,LSZH, Whether breakout is
M,10km 43mm Short supported field on the
MPO,Bending insensitive Functional Specifications
tab page is displayed as
and breakout fiber can
be used together with
the board. For example,
CR8D00EKNBCP. The
description of the board
contains QSFP28 and the
value of the Whether
breakout is supported
field on the Functional
Specifications tab page is
displayed as Yes. To
enable breakout
interfaces, run the port
split command to
complete breakout
configuration..
Therefore, the optical
module and breakout
fiber can be used
together with the board.
3.10 PDU
3.10.1 APD32-12-24 (APD32-12-24 AC Power Distribution

Unit)

Overview
Table 3-1007 Basic information about the APD32-12-24

Item Details
Description APD32-12-24 AC Power Distribution

Unit
Part Number 02354GYQ
Model APD32-12-24
Remarks ● It can distribute 12 AC single-phase

32 A (MAX) inputs into twenty-four
16 A (MAX) outputs.
● There are two power distribution
areas: A and B. Each area has six AC
inputs, and each AC input is divided
into two outputs.
NOTE
1. Onsite installation tool list (additional
preparation is required): 3# screwdriver,
used to secure screws on input power
cables and ground cables; flat-head
screwdriver with a 0.6 mm x 3.5 mm head,
used to connect output power cables.
2. The input power cable must be a power
cable that can withstand 90°C.
3. The PDU uses 32 A circuit breakers,
which are derated to 16 A.
Appearance
Figure 3-401 Appearance of the APD32-12-24

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02354GYQ&productModel=APD32-12-24#matchRelation

When the power distribution unit is used to supply power to the main equipment,
the input current of each power distribution unit does not exceed 32 A and the
output current of each power distribution unit does not exceed 16 A.
Figure 3-402 single-phase 32 A inputs
Table 3-1008 Technical specifications of the APD32-12-24
Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 130.55 mm x 442 mm x 677 mm(5.14

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.4 in. x 26.65 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)
Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 17 kg (37.49 lb) (The protective cover

on the rear panel is not included. This
cover has to be removed before the
device is installed in the cabinet.)
Cabinet installation standards · IEC 60297-1 19-inch standard cabinet

· Cabinet depth ≥ 800 mm

Item Specification
Hole distance for installing mounting 465.1mm

brackets [mm(in.)]
Installation type Horizontal installation. The positions

of mounting brackets are adjustable.
You can install front or rear mounting
brackets.
Rated input voltage [V] 200V to 240V AC
Input voltage range [V] 176V to 264V AC
Rated output voltage [V] 200V to 240V AC
Output voltage range [V] 176V to 264V AC
Maximum output current [A] 16A
Number of inputs 6+6
Number of outputs 12+12
Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] 32A
Input terminal M6 OT terminal
Output terminal Cord end terminal

[°C(°F)]
Short-term operating temperature -5°C to 50°C (23°F to 122°F)

[°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] -40°C to 70°C(-40.0°F to 158.0°F)

[RH]

[RH]
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] 0m to 5000m (When the altitude

ranges from 1800m to 5000m, the
operating temperature decreases by
1°C for each additional 220m.)
3.10.2 APD32-4-24 (APD32-4-24 AC Power Distribution Unit)

Overview

Item Details

Unit
Part Number 02354GYS
Model APD32-4-24
Remarks ● It can distribute four AC three-

phase 32 A (MAX) inputs into
twenty-four 16 A (MAX) outputs.
areas: A and B. Each area has two
AC three-phase inputs. Each AC
input is divided into two outputs.
NOTE
Appearance

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02354GYS&productModel=APD32-4-24#matchRelation

Figure 3-404 three-phase 32 A inputs
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.4 in. x 26.65 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Cabinet installation standards · IEC 60297-1 19-inch standard

cabinet,

Item Specification

brackets [mm(in.)]

brackets.
Rated input voltage [V] Three-phase , wire voltage 346V to

415V AC
Input voltage range [V] Three-phase, wire voltage:305V to

457V AC

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

[RH]

[RH]


Overview
Item Details

Unit
Part Number 02354GYV
Model APD63-2-24
Remarks ● Two AC three-phase 63 A (MAX)

inputs can be distributed into
twenty-four 16 A (MAX) outputs.
areas: A and B. Each area has one
AC three-phase input. AC input of
each channel and each phase is
distributed into four outputs.
NOTE
used to secure input power cables and
ground cable screws; flat-head screwdriver
with a head size of 0.6 mm x 3.5 mm, used
to connect output power cables.
2. The input power cable must be a 90°C
temperature-resistant power cable.
Appearance

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02354GYV&productModel=APD63-2-24#matchRelation

Figure 3-406 three-phase 63 A inputs
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.4 in. x 26.65 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Cabinet installation standards · IEC 60297-1 19-inch standard

cabinet,

Item Specification

brackets [mm(in.)]

brackets.
Rated input voltage [V] Three-phase , wire voltage 346V to

415V AC
Input voltage range [V] Three-phase, wire voltage:305V to

457V AC
Long-term operating temperature 0°C to 45°C(32°F to 113°F)

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

[RH]

[RH]


Overview
Item Details

Unit
Part Number 02354GYT
Model APD63-6-24
Remarks ● It can distribute six AC single-phase

63 A (MAX) inputs into twenty-four
16 A (MAX) outputs.
areas: A and B. Each area has three
AC single-phase inputs, and each
AC input is divided into four
outputs.
NOTE
Appearance

Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02354GYT&productModel=APD63-6-24#matchRelation

Figure 3-408 single-phase 63 A inputs
Item Specification

x D) [mm(in.)] in. x 17.4 in. x 26.65 in.)

D) [mm(in.)] in. x 25.59 in. x 33.86 in.)

Cabinet installation standards · IEC 60297-1 19-inch standard cabinet


Item Specification

brackets [mm(in.)]

brackets.
Rated input voltage [V] 200V to 240V AC
Input voltage range [V] 176V to 264V AC

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]

[RH]

[RH]

3.10.5 CR8MP2K3PHC0 (Three-phase AC Power Distribution

Unit)

Overview
Table 3-1015 Basic information about the CR8MP2K3PHC0
Item Details
Description Three-phase AC Power Distribution

Unit
Model CR8MP2K3PHC0
Appearance
Figure 3-409 Appearance of the CR8MP2K3PHC0
Figure 3-410 Appearance of the three-phase PDU
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02122537&productModel=CR8MP2K3PHC0#matchRelation


A 380 V three-phase PDU supports three-phase 346 V to 415 V AC power input
and provides three groups of power outputs A, B, and C. Each group controls two
HVDC-3Z-03 sockets. When the groups are connected to a chassis, the total
current of all sockets in each group cannot exceed 32 A.
Table 3-1016 Technical specifications of the CR8MP2K3PHC0

Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 484 mm x 60 mm (1.72 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 19.06 in. x 2.36 in.)
Maximum output current [A] 16 A
Number of inputs 1
Number of outputs 6
3.10.6 CR8MP2KHDCC0 (380VDC HVDC and 220V AC Power

Distribution Unit)
Overview
Table 3-1017 Basic information about the CR8MP2KHDCC0

Item Details
Description 380VDC HVDC and 220V AC Power

Distribution Unit
Model CR8MP2KHDCC0

Appearance
Figure 3-411 Appearance of the CR8MP2KHDCC0
Version Mapping

display.
keyword=02122538&productModel=CR8MP2KHDCC0#matchRelation

A 380 V high-voltage DC PDU supports 240 V/380 V DC and 220V AC power input
and provides two output groups A1 and B1. Each group controls four HVDC-3Z-03
sockets. When the groups are connected to a chassis, the total current of all
sockets in each group cannot exceed 63 A.
Figure 3-412 circuit principle

Table 3-1018 Technical specifications of the CR8MP2KHDCC0

Item Specification
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 484 mm x 60 mm (1.72 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 19.06 in. x 2.36 in.)
Cabinet installation standards IEC 60297-1 19-inch standard cabinet
Hole distance for installing mounting 465.1 mm

brackets [mm(in.)]
Installation type Horizontal Installation
Rated input voltage [V] HVDC: 240 V/380 V

AC: 220 V
Input voltage range [V] HVDC: 188 V–400 V

AC: 176 V–264 V
Rated output voltage [V] HVDC: 240 V/380 V

AC: 220 V
Output voltage range [V] 240 V HVDC: 192–288 V DC

380 V HVDC: 260–400 V DC
220 V AC: 176–264 V AC
Maximum output current [A] 16 A
Number of inputs 2
Number of outputs 8/4
Output terminal Customized terminal

[°C(°F)]

[°C(°F)]
Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to 70°C (–40°F to 158°F)

[RH]

[RH]

Item Specification
Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (For the altitude in the

range of 1800 m to 4000 m, every 220
m increase in the altitude reduces the
operating temperature range by 1°C.)

Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement
4 Hardware Installation and Parts

Replacement
4.1 About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to install the NetEngine 8000 X, including installing
the cabinet and device, laying out cables, powering on the device, label
regulations, grounding regulations, and power distribution instructions.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Commissioning Engineer
● Data Configuration Engineer
● Network Monitoring Engineer
● System Maintenance Engineer
Security Declaration
● Encryption algorithm declaration
The encryption algorithms DES/3DES/RSA (with a key length of less than
2048 bits)/MD5 (in digital signature scenarios and password encryption)/
SHA1 (in digital signature scenarios) have a low security, which may bring
security risks. If protocols allowed, using more secure encryption algorithms,
such as AES/RSA (with a key length of at least 2048 bits)/SHA2/HMAC-SHA2
is recommended.
● Password configuration declaration
– Do not set both the start and end characters of a password to "%^%#".
This causes the password to be displayed directly in the configuration file.
– To further improve device security, periodically change the password.

● Personal data declaration

– Your purchased products, services, or features may use users' some
personal data during service operation or fault locating. You must define
user privacy policies in compliance with local laws and take proper
measures to fully protect personal data.
– When discarding, recycling, or reusing a device, back up or delete data on
the device as required to prevent data leakage. If you need support,
contact after-sales technical support personnel.
● Feature declaration
– The NetStream feature may be used to analyze the communication
information of terminal customers for network traffic statistics and
management purposes. Before enabling the NetStream feature, ensure
that it is performed within the boundaries permitted by applicable laws
and regulations. Effective measures must be taken to ensure that
information is securely protected.
– The mirroring feature may be used to analyze the communication
information of terminal customers for a maintenance purpose. Before
enabling the mirroring function, ensure that it is performed within the
boundaries permitted by applicable laws and regulations. Effective
measures must be taken to ensure that information is securely protected.
– The packet header obtaining feature may be used to collect or store
some communication information about specific customers for
transmission fault and error detection purposes. Huawei cannot offer
services to collect or store this information unilaterally. Before enabling
the function, ensure that it is performed within the boundaries permitted
by applicable laws and regulations. Effective measures must be taken to
ensure that information is securely protected.
● Reliability design declaration
Network planning and site design must comply with reliability design
principles and provide device- and solution-level protection. Device-level
protection includes planning principles of dual-network and inter-board dual-
link to avoid single point or single link of failure. Solution-level protection
refers to a fast convergence mechanism, such as FRR and VRRP. If solution-
level protection is used, ensure that the primary and backup paths do not
share links or transmission devices. Otherwise, solution-level protection may
fail to take effect.
Special Declaration
● This document serves only as a guide. The content is written based on device
information gathered under lab conditions. The content provided by this
document is intended to be taken as general guidance, and does not cover all
scenarios. The content provided by this document may be different from the
information on user device interfaces due to factors such as version upgrades
and differences in device models, board restrictions, and configuration files.
The actual user device information takes precedence over the content
provided by this document. The preceding differences are beyond the scope of
this document.
● The maximum values provided in this document are obtained in specific lab
environments (for example, only a certain type of board or protocol is

configured on a tested device). The actually obtained maximum values may

be different from the maximum values provided in this document due to
factors such as differences in hardware configurations and carried services.
● Interface numbers used in this document are examples. Use the existing
interface numbers on devices for configuration.
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● In this document, public IP addresses may be used in feature introduction and
configuration examples and are for reference only unless otherwise specified.
● The configuration precautions described in this document may not accurately
reflect all scenarios.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Calls attention to important information, best

practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.
Device Dimension Conventions

All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions and do
not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component manufacturing, the
actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or measurement.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
4.2 Hardware Installation and Usage Precautions
Following All Safety Precautions

● To ensure human and device security, comply with all the safety precautions
marked on the device and instructed in this document before any operation.
The CAUTION, WARNING, and NOTE items in this document do not cover all
the safety precautions that must be obeyed. They are supplements to the
safety precautions.
● When operating Huawei products and equipment, comply with safety
precautions and special safety instructions relevant to the corresponding
equipment provided by Huawei. The safety precautions in this document are
only some that Huawei can predict. Huawei is not liable for any consequence
that results from violation of universal regulations for safety operations and
safety codes on design, production, and equipment use.
Complying with Local Rules and Regulations

When operating a device, comply with local laws and regulations.
Installation Personnel Requirement

Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations
correctly and safely.
Chassis
● If a NetEngine 8000 modular router chassis is not fully loaded with cards or
power modules, cover vacant slots with filler panels to ensure efficient heat
dissipation and EMC compliance.
● If the device is installed in a 600 mm wide cabinet or rack, do not install a
PDU directly facing the device. Otherwise, the installation and removal of fan
modules are affected. When installing a PDU, ensure that the PDU and the
device are installed at different heights in the cabinet or rack.
Power Module
● A power module will enter the protection state upon input overvoltage,
undervoltage, overtemperature, or output overcurrent. Note that when a
power module enters the overtemperature protection state, take measures to
lower the ambient temperature. The power module can automatically resume
power supply when the temperature falls within the normal range. After a
power module enters the protection state, the module will report a
corresponding protection state alarm to the MPU and cannot properly supply
power to the device. Note that a faulty fan module will also report fault
information to the MPU. If the power module cannot automatically resume

power supply after the triggering condition of the protection state is removed,
remove the power module from the chassis and reinstall it at least 30s later.
The power module then can work properly.
Card
● Before installing cards on a device, make sure that the device and cards are all
free from damp.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause
pins on the corresponding card connector or backplane connector to bend. If
the connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, ask Huawei
professionals whether the card can still be installed. Installing a card with
distorted connector may cause damage to the device.
● The reset button on an MPU is used to manually reset the MPU. Exercise
caution when using this button.
– If the device has only one MPU, pressing this button will cause the device
to restart.
– If the device has two MPUs:
▪ Pressing the reset button on the active MPU will trigger an active/
standby switchover.
▪ Pressing the reset button on the standby MPU will reset the standby
MPU, which does not affect running of the system.
● To remove a Switch Fabric Unit (SFU), hold down the OFL button for 6s. You
can remove the SFU until the OFL indicator is steady yellow.
Cable
● To protect personal safety, do not install power cables while the power is on.
Before connecting power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system and the device are all in OFF position.
● Each device must have at least two independent power inputs for power
redundancy. Do not connect all the AC power cables of a device to the PDUs
controlled by the same circuit breaker.
● Before connecting signal cables, take ESD protection measures, for example,
wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
● Before connecting Ethernet cables, use an Ethernet cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical
modules or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover idle optical ports and optical modules with dust plugs and cover idle
optical fibers with dust caps.
● Optical fibers routed into a cabinet must be protected by a corrugated pipe.
The bend radius of an optical fiber must be at least 20 times larger than its
diameter. Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than
40 mm.
● Bundle optical fibers with binding tape. Apply appropriate force to ensure that
the optical fibers in a bundle can be moved easily.

● Fiber connectors must be tidy and clean to ensure normal communication. If

a fiber connector is contaminated, clean it using a piece of fiber cleaning
fabric.
● Use the JG2 90° right angle terminals delivered with the device. To avoid short
circuits and poor cable connections, do not make JG2 90° right angle
terminals by yourself.
Optical Module
● NetEngine 8000 X series devices must use optical modules that are certified
for Huawei devices. Optical modules that are not certified for Huawei devices
cannot ensure transmission reliability and may affect service stability. Huawei
is not liable for any problems caused by the use of optical modules that are
not certified for Huawei devices.
● The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical
fibers of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is
smaller than the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-
distance optical module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the
receive power on the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical
module may be burnt.
4.3 Cabinet Installation
4.3.1 A610 Cabinet Installation Guide
4.3.1.1 Introduction to the A610-22 Cabinet
Overview
This document details the A610-22 cabinet. If a third-party cabinet needs to be
evaluated, see 4.4.3 Checking the Cabinet or Rack.
Naming Conventions
The cabinet name A610-22 is divided into four fields, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Table 4-1 explains the meaning of each field.
Figure 4-1 Cabinet name

Table 4-1 Cabinet naming conventions

Field Description
1 Cabinet model
2 Cabinet width: 600 mm
3 Cabinet depth: 1000 mm
4 Cabinet height: 2200 mm
Appearance
NOTE
Figures in the document are for reference only, and the actual appearance of the cabinet
may vary depending on the exact model.
Figure 4-2 shows the A610-22 cabinet appearance.

Figure 4-2 Cabinet appearance
Functions
The cabinet complies with International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
60297-1. The distance between front and rear mounting rails is adjustable in 25
mm increments. Its assembled architecture facilitates capacity expansion.

The cabinet has the following features and functions:

● Static load bearing capability: 1 ton
● Sufficient space to place and connect components.
● Ability in protecting internal components from contamination.
● Ability in preventing damage to internal components.
Physical Structure
Figure 4-3 shows components of the A610 cabinet.
Figure 4-3 Cabinet components
1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Rear door
4. Side panel 5. Mounting rail 6. Rack

Cabinet Material
The cabinet is made of class-A high-strength carbon cold rolled steel and
galvanized sheet, which complies with the Restriction of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances (RoHS). The fire endurance of interior materials complies
with Underwriter Laboratories (UL) standards.
● Sufficient space to place and connect components.
Cabling
The cabinet supports overhead or underfloor cabling.
ESD Jack
The cabinet has an ESD jack, as shown in Figure 4-4. When installing or
maintaining devices in the cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert the other
end of the ESD wrist strap in the ESD jack.
NOTE
A cabinet provides multiple grounding points. You can choose the nearest one.

Figure 4-4 ESD jack on the cabinet
Heat Dissipation
The front and rear doors of the cabinet are of mesh construction. Air enters the
chassis from the front door and base and is exhausted through the rear door.
Figure 4-5 shows the airflow.

Figure 4-5 Airflow in the cabinet
Table 4-2 lists technical specifications of the A610-22 cabinet.
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the A610-22 cabinet
Item Details
Dimensions without packaging (H x W 2200 mm x 600 mm x 1050 mm

x D) (86.61 in. x 23.62 in. x 41.34 in.)

D) (91.34 in. x 28.35 in. x 50.79 in.)
Weight (empty cabinet) 135 kg (297.62 lb)
Weight (assembly cabinet) 215 kg (473.99 lb)
Distance between the front and rear 650 mm

mounting rails
Available space 47U

Item Details
Environment parameters ● Long-term temperature: 0°C to

40°C
● Short-term temperature: –5°C to
+55°C
● Long-term relative humidity: 5% RH
to 85% RH
● Short-term relative humidity: 0%
RH to 95% RH
Installation mode Installed on an ESD floor or a concrete

floor
Static load bearing capacity 1000 kg (2204.62 lb)
NOTE
● 1U equals 1.75 in. (approximately 44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in IEC
60297.
● The net weight is the weight of a cabinet with the front door and rear door.
● The weight of an assembly cabinet is the total weight of the empty cabinet, cabinet
accessories, and the package.
● The environment parameter values are measured at 0.4 m in front of the equipment
and 1.5 m above the ground.
● Short-term means the continuous working time within 96 hours and the accumulated
working time within 15 days per year.
4.3.1.2 Cabinet Accessories
4.3.1.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand
Appearance
The cabinet stand is pictured in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Cabinet stand
Functions
The stand elevates and supports the cabinet.
Table 4-3 lists technical specifications of the cabinet stand.
Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the cabinet stand

Stand Type Sta Applicable ESD Wi Applicable Chassis
nd Floor Height (mm) dth Depth (mm)
Nu (m
mb m)
er
Stand I 211 200–270 60 1000, 1100, and

507 0 1200
47
Stand II 211 270–410

507
22
Stand III 211 410–700

507
13

NOTE
The ESD floor height is the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and the
surface of the concrete floor.
4.3.1.3 Cabinet Installation

The A610 series cabinets can be installed in fixed and or unfixed mode. Both
methods apply to installation on concrete and ESD floors.
4.3.1.3.1 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor
Perspective View After Installation

Figure 4-7 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on an ESD
floor.
Figure 4-7 Single cabinet installed on an ESD floor
Figure 4-8 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on an ESD
floor.

Figure 4-8 Multiple cabinets installed on an ESD floor
Installation Tools
Figure 4-9 lists the tools used for installing a cabinet.

Figure 4-9 Installation tools
Installation Procedure
Figure 4-10 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor.

Figure 4-10 Flowchart for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor
Pre-installation Check
Precautions
Take the following precautions before the installation:

● Be careful not to damage components and cables in the cabinet during

transportation. Check whether there is a marking-off template on the top of
the cabinet. If yes, take an underlining template first.
● If the cabinet surface is scratched, paint the scratched area with the same
painting as the other part to protect the cabinet.
● Conduct a comprehensive inspection on the cabinet before the installation. If
you find the cabinet distorted or its surfaces damaged, contact technical
support personnel immediately.
● Follow the installation instructions provided in this document and make
adjustments according to actual situations in your installation site.
Procedure
Step 1 Unpack and inspect the cabinet and accessories. The accessories include the
cabinet stand and expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
Step 2 Inspect the space inside and around the cabinet.
● Enough space must be reserved at the lower part of the cabinet for installing
expansion bolts.
● There must be enough space around the cabinet installation area for
operation and ventilation.
----End
Assembling the Cabinet Stand
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the height of the cabinet stand.
1. Measure the distance between the concrete floor and surface of the ESD floor
with a measuring tape, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Measuring the ESD floor height
2. Adjust the height of the cabinet stand according to the height of the ESD
floor. See callout 1 in Figure 4-12.
3. Tighten the height locking bolts on both sides. Do not tighten the bolts
completely; leave some space for leveling the cabinet stand. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Tightening height locking bolts
Step 2 Assemble the cabinet stand, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Assembling the cabinet stand
1. Adjust the depth of the cabinet stand according to the cabinet depth.
2. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket.
See callout 1 in Figure 4-13.
3. Secure the expandable levels on the stand with eight M8x20 bolts. Use the
torque socket to fasten all the bolts with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-13.
4. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket
with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 1 in Figure 4-13.
5. Check the stand with a level. See callout 3 in Figure 4-13.
6. If the stand leans, loosen the height locking bolts and adjust the height of the
stand until the stand is level.
7. Fasten all the locking bolts with a torque of 45 N•m. See callout 4 in Figure
4-13.
----End
Positioning the Cabinet Stand
?.1. Positioning a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)

Procedure
Step 1 Place the cabinet stand in the planned position.
Step 2 Mark the mounting hole positions, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Positioning a single cabinet stand
----End
?.2. Positioning Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)
Procedure
Step 1 Use plumb lines to position the first cabinet stand. Ensure that the outline of the
stand is in alignment with the cabinet outline drawn on the floor, as shown in
Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Positioning the first cabinet stand
Step 2 Install supporting brackets on both ends of each stand. See callout 1 in Figure
4-16.
Step 3 Connect the stands with combination plates. See callout 2 in Figure 4-16.
Step 5 Mark the mounting hole positions. See callout 3 in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Positioning cabinet stands side by side
----End
Drilling Holes

Precautions
Pay attention to the following points when drilling holes:
● If the floor is too hard and smooth to position the drill bit, use a nail punch
and hammer to create an indentation for the mounting holes. Then use the
drill bit to finish drilling holes.
● Keep the drill bit vertical with the ground and hold the drill stock with both
hands. Avoid shaking the drill stock; otherwise, the inclined drill bit will
damage the floor.
● Drill all holes to the same depth.
Procedure
Step 1 Install a Ф16 drill bit on the hammer drill.
Step 2 Use the hammer drill to drill holes in the marked positions on a concrete floor.
The hole depth is the total length of the expansion sleeve and expansion nut, in
the range from 52 mm to 60 mm.
Step 3 Remove dust inside and around the mounting holes with a vacuum cleaner, as
shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Drilling a hole
Step 4 Measure the hole depth and distance. If the hole depth or distance does not meet
requirements, drill holes again.
----End
Installing Expansion Bolts
Expansion Bolt Components

Figure 4-18 shows the components of an expansion bolt.

Figure 4-18 Components of an expansion bolt
Precautions
● Before using expansion bolts, insert the bars on the expansion nuts into the
gaps on the expansion sleeve. Otherwise, expansion bolts cannot be fastened.
● The expansion sleeve of an expansion bolt must be flush with the mounting
hole. If the expansion sleeve is above the ground, the cabinet cannot be
installed properly.
Procedure
Step 1 Place an expansion bolt in a mounting hole.
Step 2 Tighten the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt.
Step 3 Hammer the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until the expansion sleeve is
flush with the hole, as shown in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Installing an expansion bolt
Step 4 Tighten the expansion bolt clockwise with a wrench to make the expansion sleeve
expand.
Step 5 Turn the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt counterclockwise and remove them
from the expansion sleeve, as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Removing the spring washer, flat washer, and bolt
----End
Installing the Cabinet Stand
?.1. Installing a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)
Procedure
Step 1 Align mounting holes on the cabinet stand with four expansion bolt mounting
holes on the floor, and install expansion bolts. See callout 1 in Figure 4-21.
Step 2 Use a level check whether the stand is level. See callout 2 in Figure 4-21.
Step 3 If the stand leans, place spacers below the stand. See callout 3 in Figure 4-21.
Step 4 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N m.

Figure 4-21 Installing a single cabinet stand
----End
?.2. Installing Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)
Procedure
Step 1 Check the stand with a level. See callout 1 in Figure 4-22.
Step 3 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N m.

Figure 4-22 Installing cabinet stands side by side
----End
Placing the Cabinet
Precautions
Pay attention to the following points when placing a cabinet:
● Expansion bolts have insulation washers. Install all insulation parts correctly
to ensure that the cabinet is insulated from the ground before cables are
connected.
● To reduce the stress between expansion bolts and the cabinet, fix the
expansion bolts on diagonal lines.
Procedure
Step 1 Place the cabinet on the cabinet stand and align mounting holes on the cabinet
with the mounting holes on the cabinet stand.
Step 2 Take insulation washers from the expansion bolt package, and put them on the
four M12x80 bolts, as shown in Figure 4-23.
Step 3 Put the bolts into the expansion sleeves underground and tighten the bolts, as
shown in Figure 4-23. Do not tighten the bolts completely; leave some space.

Figure 4-23 Placing the cabinet
----End
Leveling the Cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the cabinet is level using a level and plumb line, as shown in
Figure 4-24.
Step 2 If the cabinet leans, use an adjustable wrench to adjust the ground anchors until
the cabinet is level.

Figure 4-24 Leveling the cabinet
NOTE
The ground anchors can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm in height.
----End
(Optional) Combining Cabinets
Context
NOTE
This section applies to installation of two or more cabinets.
After settling and leveling two adjacent cabinets, combine the cabinets with
combination plates.
Combine one cabinet with one adjacent cabinet at a time.
Procedure
Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws from combination plates on the
front and rear doors. See callout 1 in Figure 4-25.

NOTE
Each combination plate is secured with one screw on the cabinet. To combine two cabinets,
remove the screws from the posts of one cabinet. These removed screws will be used to
secure the combination plate.
Step 2 Put a combination plate through a notch on the door, and then secure the
combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout 2 in Figure 4-25.
Step 3 Callout 3 in Figure 4-25 shows the combination plate after the cabinets are
combined.
Figure 4-25 Combining cabinets

NOTE
● On a cabinet at the middle of a row, there are four points for cabinet combination at
both the front door and rear door.
● On a cabinet at the end of a row, there are two points for cabinet combination at both
the front door and rear door.
● The height difference and distance between cabinets cannot exceed 3 mm after
cabinets are combined.
----End
Securing the Cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the spring washers, flat washers, and installation covering have been
correctly installed on the expansion bolts.
Step 2 Secure four expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque
of 45 N•m. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Securing the cabinet
----End

Testing the Insulation Performance
Insulation Requirement
The impedance between the cabinet and ground must be larger than 5 Mohm.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the multimeter measurement mode to Mohm and measure the impedance
between the bolts and cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Insulation test
Step 2 View the impedance value on the multimeter.
If... Then...
The measured impedance is greater The impedance is within the allowed

than or equal to 5 Mohm range and the insulation test is
complete.
The measured impedance is smaller Go to 3.

than 5 Mohm
Step 3 Remove all the mounting accessories and check whether any insulation parts are
missing or damaged.

Step 4 Secure the cabinet and measure the impedance again.
----End
Installing Supporting Brackets on the Stand
Procedure
Step 1 Attach supporting brackets at the front and rear of the stand with M12x25 bolts,
as shown in Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 Installing supporting brackets
NOTE
Perform this step only in scenarios where a single cabinet is to be installed.
----End
4.3.1.3.2 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor

Figure 4-29 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on a concrete
floor.

Figure 4-29 Single cabinet installed on a concrete floor
Figure 4-30 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on a

concrete floor.

Figure 4-30 Multiple cabinets installed on a concrete floor
Installation Tools

Figure 4-32 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor.

Figure 4-32 Flowchart for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor
Precautions
transportation. Check whether there is a marking-off template on the top of
the cabinet. If yes, take an underlining template first.


Procedure
expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
expansion bolts.
operation and ventilation. For how much space should be reserved, see
Marking Mounting Holes.
----End
Marking Mounting Holes
Cabinet Mounting Holes

Figure 4-33 shows the mounting holes for installing a single cabinet.
Figure 4-33 Mounting holes for installing a single cabinet

Figure 4-34 shows the mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation.
Figure 4-34 Mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation
Table 4-4 provides the mounting hole distance for the cabinet.
Table 4-4 Mounting hole distance

Cabinet Width (mm) Width-wise Depth-x Depth-wise
Model Hole Spacing (mm) Hole
(mm) Spacing-y
(mm)
A610-22 600 413 1000 887
Procedure
Step 1 Use a measuring tape to determine the cabinet installation position according to
the engineering drawing, and mark the endpoints of the cabinet on the floor.

Step 2 Place the mounting hole diagram right at the position where the cabinet is to be
installed, and use a powder marker to outline the cabinet's dimensions.
Figure 4-35 Outlining the cabinet's dimensions using a powder marker
Step 3 Move the cabinet to the installation area. Open the front and rear doors, remove
screws from the mounting holes, and mark the positions for mounting holes on
the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36 Marking the positions for mounting holes
NOTE
After marking the mounting hole positions, use the measuring tape to measure the hole
distance and adjust the mounting hole positions according to the mounting hole diagram.
----End
Drilling Holes
Precautions

damage the floor.
Procedure
----End


Precautions
installed properly.
Procedure

expand.

----End
Placing the Cabinet
Precautions
connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Move the cabinet into the outline drawn in the installation area. (The cabinet's
casters enable you to move the cabinet without additional tools.)
Step 2 Use a right angle to align the outer surface of the cabinet with the outline, as


Figure 4-42 Tightening bolts
----End
Procedure
Figure 4-43.

NOTE
The ground anchors can be adjusted from 0 mm to 10 mm in height.
----End
Context
NOTE
combination plates.
Combine one cabinet with one adjacent cabinet at a time.

Procedure
NOTE
Step 2 Put a combination plate through a notch on the door, and then secure the
combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout 2 in Figure 4-44.
combined.

NOTE
----End
Procedure
Step 2 Secure expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque of
45 N•m. See Figure 4-45.

----End
Procedure

If... Then...

complete.

than 5 Mohm
missing or damaged.
----End
4.3.1.4 Installing a PDU into a Cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Mark the positions for installing PDUs on the mounting rails at the rear of the
cabinet, and install floating nuts. It is recommended that you install floating nuts
on the top of the cabinet.

Step 2 Route the power input cables of a PDU into the cabinet via the cable inlet on the
top of the cabinet, and align the mounting holes of the PDU with the floating
nuts. With another person holding the PDU, tighten the PDU using M6 screws
with a torque of 1.96 N•m.
Step 3 Connect the ground cable to the closest ground point on the cabinet using M6
screws with a torque of 1.96 N•m.
----End

4.3.1.5 Connecting PGND Cables
Connecting the Chassis PGND Cable to the Cabinet

Connect the PGND cable of the device to the equipotential terminal at the rear of
the cabinet. The equipotential terminal is identified by a white flag on the

cabinet.
Connecting the Cabinet PGND Cable to a Ground Bar

The cabinet ground point is located at the top rear of the cabinet and identified by
the mark . Connect the ground point to a nearby ground bar in the
equipment room through a PGND cable. Secure the PGND point using M8 screws
with a torque of 13 N•m.
Figure 4-47 Connecting PGND cables

4.3.2 A612 Cabinet Installation Guide
4.3.2.1 Introduction to the A612-22 Cabinet
Naming Conventions
The cabinet name A612-22 is divided into four fields, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Table 4-5 explains the meaning of each field.
Figure 4-48 Cabinet name
Table 4-5 Cabinet naming conventions

Field Description
1 Cabinet model
2 Cabinet width: 600 mm
3 Cabinet depth: 1200 mm
4 Cabinet height: 2200 mm
Appearance
NOTE
Figures in the document are for reference only, and the actual appearance of the cabinet
may vary depending on the exact model.
Figure 4-49 shows the A612-22 cabinet appearance.

Figure 4-49 Cabinet appearance
Physical Structure
Figure 4-50 shows components of the A612-22 cabinet.

Figure 4-50 Cabinet components
1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Rear door
4. Side panel 5. Mounting rail 6. Rack

The cabinet is made of class-A high-strength carbon cold rolled steel and
galvanized sheet, which complies with the Restriction of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances (RoHS). The fire endurance of interior materials complies
with Underwriter Laboratories (UL) standards.
The cabinet supports overhead or underfloor cabling.


● Space to place and connect components.

Heat Dissipation
The front and rear doors of the cabinet are of mesh construction. Air enters the
chassis from the front door and base and is exhausted through the rear door.
Figure 4-51 shows the airflow.
Figure 4-51 Airflow in the cabinet
ESD Jack
The cabinet has an ESD jack, as shown in Figure 4-52. When installing or
maintaining devices in the cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert the other
end of the ESD wrist strap in the ESD jack.

Figure 4-52 ESD jack on the cabinet
Table 4-6 lists technical specifications of the cabinet.
Table 4-6 Technical specifications of the A612-22 cabinet

Item Details
Dimensions 2200 mm x 600 mm x 1200 mm (86.61 in. x 23.62 in. x 47.24

without in.)
packaging (H x
W x D)
Dimensions with 2410 mm x 980 mm x 1455 mm (94.88 in. x 38.58 in. x 57.28
packaging (H x in.)
W x D)
Weight (empty, 160 kg

without
packaging)

Item Details
Weight 192 kg
(assembly
cabinet, with
packaging)
Standards IEC 60297-1

compliance
Distance 725 mm
between
mounting rails
Available space 47U
Installation ● Long-term temperature: 0°C to 40°C

scenario ● Short-term temperature: –5°C to +55°C
● Long-term relative humidity: 5% RH to 85% RH
● Short-term relative humidity: 0% RH to 95% RH
Installation Installed on a concrete floor or an ESD floor

mode
Static load 1200 kg

bearing capacity
NOTE
● 1U equals 1.75 in. (approximately 44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in IEC
60297.
● The net weight is the weight of a cabinet with the front door and rear door.
● The weight of an assembly cabinet is the total weight of the empty cabinet, cabinet
accessories, and the package.
● The environment parameter values are measured at 0.4 m in front of the equipment
and 1.5 m above the ground.
● Short-term means the continuous working time within 96 hours and the accumulated
working time within 15 days per year.
4.3.2.2 Cabinet Accessories
4.3.2.2.1 (Optional) Cabinet Stand
Appearance
The cabinet stand is pictured in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Cabinet stand
Functions
The stand elevates and supports the cabinet.
Table 4-7 lists technical specifications of the cabinet stand.
Table 4-7 Technical specifications of the cabinet stand

Stand Type Sta Applicable ESD Wi Applicable Chassis
nd Floor Height (mm) dth Depth (mm)
Nu (m
mb m)
er
Stand I 211 200–270 60 1000, 1100, and

548 0 1200
93
Stand II 211 270–410

548
97
Stand III 211 410–700

548
98

NOTE
The ESD floor height is the distance between the upper surface of the ESD floor and the
surface of the concrete floor.
4.3.2.3 Cabinet Installation

The A612-22 cabinet can be installed in fixed mode. This mode is applicable to
installation on concrete and ESD floors.
4.3.2.3.1 Installing Cabinets on a Concrete Floor

Figure 4-54 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on a concrete
floor.
Figure 4-54 Single cabinet installed on a concrete floor
Figure 4-55 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on a

concrete floor.

Figure 4-55 Multiple cabinets installed on a concrete floor
Installation Tools

NOTE
Meters and instruments must be tested and calibrated before use.
Figure 4-57 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor.

Figure 4-57 Flowchart for installing a cabinet on a concrete floor
Precautions
transportation.

Procedure
expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
expansion bolts.
operation and ventilation. For how much space should be reserved, see
Marking Mounting Holes.
----End
Marking Mounting Holes
Cabinet Mounting Holes

Figure 4-58 shows the mounting holes for installing a single cabinet.
Figure 4-58 Mounting holes for installing a single cabinet
Figure 4-59 shows the mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation.

Figure 4-59 Mounting holes for side-by-side cabinet installation
Table 4-8 provides the mounting hole distance for the cabinet.
Table 4-8 Mounting hole distance

Cabinet Width (mm) Width-wise Depth-X Depth-wise
Model Hole Spacing (mm) Hole
(mm) Spacing-Y
(mm)
A612-22 600 413 1200 1087
Procedure
Step 1 Use a measuring tape to determine the cabinet installation position according to
the engineering drawing, and mark the endpoints of the cabinet on the floor.
Step 2 Place the mounting hole diagram right at the position where the cabinet is to be
installed, and use a marker to outline the cabinet's dimensions.

Figure 4-60 Outlining the cabinet's dimensions using a marker
Step 3 Move the cabinet to the installation area. Open the front and rear doors, remove
screws from the mounting holes, and mark the positions for mounting holes on
the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 Marking the positions for mounting holes
NOTE
After marking the mounting hole positions, use the measuring tape to measure the hole
distance and adjust the mounting hole positions according to the mounting hole diagram.
----End
Drilling Holes
Precautions

damage the floor.
Procedure
----End


Precautions
installed properly.
Procedure

expand.

----End
Placing the Cabinet
Precautions
connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Move the cabinet into the outline drawn in the installation area.
Step 2 Use a right angle to align the outer surface of the cabinet with the outline, as


Figure 4-67 Tightening bolts
----End
Procedure
Figure 4-68.

----End
Context
NOTE
combination plates. You are advised to combine cabinets one by one.
Procedure
NOTE

Step 2 Put a combination plate via the gap between the cabinet door and the cabinet,
and then secure the combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout
2 in Figure 4-69.
combined.
NOTE
----End

Procedure
Step 2 Secure expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque of
45 N•m. See Figure 4-70.
----End

Procedure
If... Then...

complete.

than 5 Mohm
missing or damaged.

----End
4.3.2.3.2 Installing Cabinets on an ESD Floor

Figure 4-72 shows the perspective view of a single cabinet installed on an ESD
floor.
Figure 4-72 Single cabinet installed on an ESD floor
Figure 4-73 shows the perspective view of multiple cabinets installed on an ESD
floor.

Figure 4-73 Multiple cabinets installed on an ESD floor
Installation Tools

NOTE
Meters and instruments must be tested and calibrated before use.
Figure 4-75 shows the procedure for installing a cabinet on an ESD floor.

Figure 4-75 Flowchart for cabinet installation on an ESD floor
Precautions


transportation.
Procedure
cabinet stand and expansion bolts used to secure the cabinet to the floor.
expansion bolts.
operation and ventilation.
----End
Assembling the Cabinet Stand
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the height of the cabinet stand.
1. Measure the distance between the concrete floor and surface of the ESD floor
with a measuring tape, as shown in Figure 4-76.

Figure 4-76 Measuring the ESD floor height
2. Adjust the height of the cabinet stand according to the height of the ESD
floor. See callout 1 in Figure 4-77.
3. Tighten the height locking bolts on both sides. Do not tighten the bolts
completely; leave some space for leveling the cabinet stand. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-77.
Figure 4-77 Tightening height locking bolts
Step 2 Assemble the cabinet stand, as shown in Figure 4-78.

Figure 4-78 Assembling the cabinet stand
1. Adjust the depth of the cabinet stand according to the cabinet depth.
2. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket.
3. Secure the expandable levels on the stand with eight M8x20 bolts. Use the
torque socket to fasten all the bolts with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 2 in
Figure 4-78.
4. Fasten the six M8x20 bolts on the expandable levels using the torque socket
with a torque of 13 N•m. See callout 1 in Figure 4-78.
5. Check the stand with a level. See callout 3 in Figure 4-78.
6. If the stand leans, loosen the height locking bolts and adjust the height of the
stand until the stand is level.
7. Fasten all the height locking bolts using the torque socket with a torque of 45
N•m. See callout 4 in Figure 4-78.
----End
Positioning the Cabinet Stand
?.1. Positioning a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)

Procedure
Step 2 Mark the mounting hole positions, as shown in Figure 4-79.
Figure 4-79 Positioning a single cabinet stand
----End
?.2. Positioning Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)
Procedure
Step 1 Use plumb lines to position the first cabinet stand. Ensure that the outline of the
stand is in alignment with the cabinet outline drawn on the floor, as shown in
Figure 4-80.

Figure 4-80 Positioning the first cabinet stand
Step 2 Install supporting brackets on both ends of each stand. See callout 1 in Figure
4-81.
Step 3 Connect the stands with combination plates. See callout 2 in Figure 4-81.
Step 4 Place the cabinet stands in the planned positions.
Step 5 Mark the mounting hole positions. See callout 3 in Figure 4-81.
Figure 4-81 Positioning cabinet stands side by side
----End

Drilling Holes
Precautions
damage the floor.
Procedure
----End


Precautions
installed properly.
Procedure

expand.

----End
Installing the Cabinet Stand
?.1. Installing a Single Cabinet Stand (for Installation of One Cabinet)
Procedure
Step 1 Align mounting holes on the cabinet stand with expansion bolt mounting holes on
the floor, and install four expansion bolts. See callout 1 in Figure 4-86.
Step 2 Use a level to check whether the stand is level. See callout 2 in Figure 4-86.
Step 4 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N•m.

Figure 4-86 Installing a single cabinet stand
----End
?.2. Installing Cabinet Stands Side by Side (for Installation of Two or More
Cabinets)
Procedure
Step 1 Check the stand with a level. See callout 1 in Figure 4-87.
Step 3 Use a torque socket to fasten the four expansion bolts with a torque of 45 N•m.

Figure 4-87 Installing cabinet stands side by side
----End
Placing the Cabinet
Precautions
connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Place the cabinet on the cabinet stand and align mounting holes on the cabinet
with the mounting holes on the cabinet stand.

----End
Procedure
Figure 4-89.

----End
Context
NOTE
combination plates. You are advised to combine cabinets one by one.
Procedure
NOTE
Step 2 Put a combination plate via the gap between the cabinet door and the cabinet,
and then secure the combination plate with screws removed in step 1. See callout
2 in Figure 4-90.

combined.
NOTE
----End
Procedure
Step 2 Secure four expansion bolts on diagonal lines using a torque socket, with a torque
of 45 N•m. See Figure 4-91.

----End
Procedure

If... Then...

complete.

than 5 Mohm
missing or damaged.
----End
Installing Supporting Brackets on the Stand
Procedure
Step 1 Attach supporting brackets at the front and rear of the stand with M12x25 bolts,

Figure 4-93 Installing supporting brackets
NOTE
Perform this step only in scenarios where a single cabinet is to be installed.
----End
4.3.2.4 Installing a PDU into a Cabinet
Procedure
Step 1 Mark the positions for installing PDUs on the mounting rails at the rear of the
cabinet, and install floating nuts. It is recommended that you install floating nuts
on the top of the cabinet.
Step 2 Route the power input cables of a PDU into the cabinet via the cable inlet on the
top of the cabinet, and align the mounting holes of the PDU with the floating
nuts. With another person holding the PDU, tighten the PDU using M6 screws
with a torque of 1.96 N•m.

Step 3 Connect the ground cable to the closest ground point on the cabinet using M6
----End
4.3.2.5 Connecting Ground Cables

The cabinet ground point is located at the top rear of the cabinet and identified by
the mark . Connect the ground point to a nearby ground bar in the

equipment room through a ground cable. Secure the ground point using M8
screws with a torque of 13 N•m.
4.4 Preparing for the Installation
4.4.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Precautions

Before you start the installation procedure, read all safety precautions described in
this document and observe all warning labels affixed to the device. Doing so
ensures your safety and protects the device from damage.
Safety precautions provided in this document may not cover every eventuality, so
remain mindful of safety at all times.
Huawei is not liable for any consequence that results from violation of regulations
pertaining to safe operations or safety codes pertaining to design, production, and
equipment use.
Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain
the device. Familiarize yourself with all safety precautions before performing any
operation on the device.
General Safety
CAUTION
● Always take precautions against electrostatic discharge (ESD) whenever you

handle a device. For example, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. To avoid
electric shock or burn, remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch.
● Connect the ground cable first after installing the device into a cabinet or rack.
Do not remove the ground cable unless all the other cables and modules have
been removed from the device.
NOTICE
● During device transport and installation, prevent the device from colliding with
objects like doors, walls, or shelves.
● Move an unpacked device upright gently to avoid damages to the device. Do
not lay down the unpacked device and drag it.
● Do not touch uncoated metal surfaces of the device with wet or contaminated
gloves.
● Do not open the ESD bags of cards and modules until they are delivered to the
equipment room. When taking a card out of the ESD bag, do not use the
connector to support the card's weight because this operation will distort the
connector and make the pins on the backplane connector bend.

Environmental Safety
DANGER
Do not place or operate the device in an environment with flammable or explosive

gases or smoke.
NOTICE
● Keep the device away from sources of water or damp to prevent damages to
circuits.
● The installation site must be well ventilated to prevent the device from
overheating.
Electrical Safety
DANGER
● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through

damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result
in fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
● Never install or remove the device or power cables while the power is on. The
electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may
cause fire or eye damage.
● To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the device before powering it
on.
Laser Safety
CAUTION
● Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules
or optical fibers without eye protection.
● Cover fiber connectors with dust caps when they are not connected.

Mechanical Safety
CAUTION
● Wear protective gloves when you are moving the device.

● Use safe lifting practices when moving the equipment. Never attempt to lift
objects that are too heavy for one person to handle. Instead, seek help or use
appropriate tools.
● Before installing the chassis into or removing it from a cabinet, ensure there are
no objects that could fall from the cabinet and cause injury.
● If MPUs, LPUs, SFUs, and power modules have been installed on the chassis,
you are advised to remove them before moving the chassis to prevent them
from falling off and causing injury.
● Do not drill unapproved holes into a cabinet, as doing so may impair its
electromagnetic shielding and damage cables inside. In addition, drilling holes
produces metal shavings that may enter the cabinet and cause short circuits on
printed circuit boards (PCBs).
Condensation Prevention
● Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the
equipment. Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
● If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight
hours after moving devices to the equipment and then install them.
● Generally, when the outdoor humidity is greater than 80% RH and the indoor
and outdoor temperature difference is greater than 5°C, condensation forms.
In highly humid weather, before installing a device or board, you are advised
to remove the package inside an equipment room and check whether
condensation forms as follows: Touch the surface of the device or board with
dry fingers or ESD gloves to check whether water marks exist. If they do,
condensation forms, and the device or board must be kept in the equipment
room for 8 hours before being powered on.
NOTE
If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before installing the
equipment.
4.4.2 Checking the Installation Site

The NetEngine 8000 modular router must be used indoors. To ensure normal
operations and long service life of the device, the installation site must meet the
following requirements described in Table 4-9.

Table 4-9 Requirements for the installation site

Item Requirement
Cleanliness The device must be installed in a clean, dry, and well

ventilated standard equipment room with controllable
temperature. The equipment room must be free from
leaking or dripping water, heavy dew, and damp.
Dust proofing Dustproof measures must be taken in the site. Dust will
cause electrostatic discharges on the chassis and affect
connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens
service life of the device and may cause failures of the
device.
Temperature and The temperature and humidity in the installation site must
humidity be within specifications. For the operating temperature
and relative humidity ranges required by the device, see
Hardware Description. If the relative humidity exceeds
70% RH, using dehumidifiers or dehumidifying air
conditioners is recommended.
Corrosive gases The installation site must be free from acidic, alkaline, or
avoidance corrosive gases.
Heat dissipation There must be sufficient space around the device for heat
space dissipation:
● Leave at least 1000 mm of clearance for heat
dissipation at the front and rear of the device.
● Leave at least 1U (1U = 44.45 mm) of clearance above
the device.
Maintenance A610 cabinet: Leave at least 1000 mm of clearance at the

space front and rear of the device.
A612 cabinet: Leave at least 1200 mm of clearance at the
front and rear of the device.

Item Requirement
Load bearing Evaluate whether the load bearing capacity of the floor in
capacity of the the equipment room meets the deployment requirements
equipment room based on the model and number of devices to be housed
in each cabinet. If it is uncertain whether the load bearing
capacity of the floor in the equipment room meets the
device installation requirements, you are advised to
contact a local professional architecture design institute
for further evaluation and hardening solution formulation.
● When one device is installed in each cabinet, the
minimum load bearing capacity of the equipment room
is 300 kg/m2 (X4 device), 370 kg/m2 (X8 device).
● When multiple devices are installed in each cabinet, the
minimum load bearing capacity of the equipment room
is 620 kg/m2 (X4 device) and 620 kg/m2 (X8 device).
(The equivalent UDL [q] of the cabinet against the floor is
calculated using the following formula: q=p/(W*D). In the
formula, p is the total weight of a cabinet fully loaded
with fully loaded chassis; W is the cabinet width plus half
of the sum of the widths of aisles on the left and right
sides of the cabinet; D is the cabinet depth plus half of the
sum of the depths of aisles in the front and rear of the
cabinet.)
4.4.3 Checking the Cabinet or Rack

A standard 19-inch four-post cabinet or open rack is recommended for the
NetEngine 8000 modular router. To install the device in the cabinet or rack, you
can use Huawei expandable guide rails (expandable between 500 mm and 850
mm) or separately purchased guide rails or tray with sufficient load bearing
capacity. Table 4-10 describes the requirements on the cabinet or rack.
Table 4-10 Requirements on the cabinet or rack
Item Requirement
Width For the NetEngine 8000 modular router, a cabinet or rack with a
width of 600 mm (distance A in Figure 4-94) is recommended.
Depth ● When the X4 device and X8 device are installed, the depth of the
cabinet or rack must be at least 1000 mm (distance B in Figure
4-94), and a cabinet or rack with a depth of at least 1200 mm is
recommended. When a 1000 mm deep cabinet or rack is used,
the front and rear doors must be single-swing doors.
● When the NetEngine 8000 X16 is installed, the depth of the
cabinet or rack must be at least 1200 mm (distance B in Figure
4-94), and a cabinet or rack with a depth of 1200 mm is
recommended.

Item Requirement
Vertical To facilitate power cable routing, the cabinet or rack must have
space sufficient vertical space for device installation. The vertical space
requirements specific to different chassis are as follows:
● X8 device DC chassis: ≥ 13U
● X4 device AC & high-voltage DC chassis: ≥ 12U
● X8 device DC chassis: ≥ 20U
● X8 device AC & high-voltage DC chassis: ≥ 18U
● NetEngine 8000 X16 DC chassis: ≥ 37U
● NetEngine 8000 X16 AC & high-voltage DC chassis: ≥ 35U
NOTE
Vertical space refers to the space for running cables and installing both the
chassis and guide rails.
Cross- Reserve a sufficient cross-sectional area at each cable hole on the

sectional top of the cabinet (overhead cabling) or at the bottom of the
area of cabinet (underfloor cabling) based on the number of planned LPUs.
each Specifically, if a single LPU is planned, reserve a cross-sectional area
cable of at least 500 mm2; if the maximum number (16) of LPUs are
hole planned, reserve a cross-sectional area of at least 8000 mm2.
Load Select a cabinet based on the number of devices to be installed and

bearing the load bearing capacity of the cabinet. The minimum bearing
capacity capacity required for installing a single device in each cabinet is 292
kg (X4 device), 466 kg (X8 device), 870 kg (NetEngine 8000 X16).
For the NetEngine 8000 modular router, a small vehicle can be
selected to assist transportation.
NOTICE
If the cabinet or rack has posts inside, the guide rails delivered with the
NetEngine 8000 modular router cannot be installed in the cabinet or rack. In
this situation, use a tray that has sufficient load bearing capacity instead.
Groundin The cabinet or rack must have reliable ground points for grounding
g the device.
Cabinet CAUTION
door If a 1000 mm deep cabinet is required, Huawei A610 cabinet whose front
door is convex is recommended. If you use a third-party 1000 mm deep
cabinet, the cabinet must have a convex door. If you use a 1000 mm deep
cabinet with a flat front door, QSFP-DD+standard/short-jacket LC optical
fibers, QSFP-DD+MPO optical fibers, and QSFP28+MPO optical fibers are not
supported. However, QSFP-DD+ultra-short-jacket optical fibers with 30 mm
long connectors are supported.
A 1200 mm deep cabinet does not have any door requirement.

Item Requirement
Air filter ● If an open rack or a cabinet without a front door is used, a

chassis door is required.
● If a cabinet with a front door is used, the front door of the
cabinet must be equipped with an air filter. If the front door is
not equipped with an air filter, you need to use Huawei air filter
suites. For details, refer to Air Filter Installation Instructions.
CAUTION
The front door of the cabinet must be equipped with an air filter, but the rear
door of the cabinet cannot be equipped with any air filter. (If an air filter is
installed on the rear door, uninstall it.)
Distance If a device is installed in a 1000 mm deep cabinet or rack, the

between distance (distance C in Figure 4-94) between the front mounting rail
front and and the outer side of the front door must be 150 mm, and the
rear distance between the rear mounting rail and the outer side of the
mountin rear door must be between 200 mm and 250 mm. If a device is
g rails installed in a 1200 mm deep cabinet or rack, the distance (distance
C in Figure 4-94) between the front mounting rail and the outer
side of the front door must be between 165 mm and 175 mm, and
the distance between the rear mounting rail and the outer side of
the rear door must be between 200 mm and 300 mm.
Heat The cabinet must meet the requirements for front-to-back airflow,
dissipatio and the front and rear doors must have a porosity rate of more than
n 55%.
Filler The X4 device and X8 device require 1U and 2U filler panels. The
panel NetEngine 8000 X16 requires 1U filler panels. The part number of
the 1U filler panel is 21141166, and that of the 2U filler panel is
21141167. Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots of a cabinet
to isolate airflows; otherwise, heat dissipation of devices will be less
effective. Huawei cabinets must be equipped with filler panels. If
another vendor's cabinet with no filler panels is used, filler panels
must also be prepared. Filler panels of Huawei cabinets are
recommended.

Item Requirement
Other CAUTION
requirem Horizontal PDUs are recommended for 600 mm wide cabinets. Vertical PDUs
are not recommended. Otherwise, the fan modules and SFUs may fail to be
ents
properly installed or removed. If a vertical PDU is installed in the cabinet, the
sockets need to be staggered with the chassis to prevent cables and sockets
from affecting the installation and removal of fan modules and SFUs.
● The PDUs in the cabinet must provide enough 16 A standard or
C19 straight female power sockets. Specifically, power cables
dedicated to Huawei PDUs will be delivered together with the
PDUs. Huawei delivers power cables with matching connectors
according to the type of the power sockets.
● If AC power cables provided by Huawei are used, the cabling
distance between the PDU and the device must be within 3000
mm and the cabling distance between each AC socket and the
device must be within 2500 mm.
● If necessary, use an earthquake-proof cabinet complying with
GR63 Zone4 or Zone3 standard.
● The cabinet must be installed (placed or fixed using expansion
bolts) on a concrete or ESD floor.
● If a third-party cabinet is used, you are advised to use the guide
rails delivered with the device. If you want to use the tray
delivered with the third-party cabinet, make sure the following
requirements are met:
1. The front edge of the cabinet tray does not protrude from the
front surface of the chassis or exceed the front mounting rail.
2. The rear edge of the cabinet tray is at least 100 mm shorter
than that of the chassis. 1U space (including the cabinet tray
height) is reserved below the device to install a tool box for
storing SFU wrenches.
3. For details about the load-bearing capacity of the cabinet tray,
see "Load bearing capacity".

Figure 4-94 Perspective view of a cabinet or rack (600 mm wide cabinet)
4.4.4 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Table 4-11 lists the tools required for installing a device.

Table 4-11 Installation tools

Tool Description Picture
Electrostatic Used to
discharge prevent ESD
(ESD) damage. They
gloves are included
in the
mandatory
accessory
package of
the chassis.
Protective Used to
gloves protect hands
during
operation.
ESD wrist Used to

strap prevent ESD
damage. Wear
the strap on
your wrist and
insert the
other end into
the ESD jack
on the
cabinet. It is
included in
the
mandatory
accessory
package of
the chassis.
Utility knife Used to cut

cartons or
paper.
Scissors Used to cut

the Quick
Installation
Guide.

Tweezers Used to
unplug
Ethernet
cables and
optical fibers.
Measuring Used to
tape measure
distances.
Marker Used to mark

component
installation
positions.
Flat-head Used to turn

screwdriver slotted-head
screws and
bolts.
Phillips Used to turn

screwdriver cross-head
screws and
bolts.
Torque Used to turn

screwdriver slotted-head
or cross-head
screws and
bolts. It allows
for torque
adjustment to
avoid over-
torque.

Combinatio Used to clamp

n pliers or bend metal
sheets, cut
metal wires,
strip off
coating of
cables, and
unplug nails.
Diagonal Used to cut

pliers insulation
tubes and
cable ties.
Wire Used to strip

stripper off the
insulation
coating and
shields of
communicatio
n cables with
small cross-
sectional
areas.
RJ45 Used to crimp

crimping Ethernet
tool cables.
COAX Used to crimp

crimping the metal
tool shield at the
end of a
coaxial cable.

Ethernet Used to test

cable tester Ethernet cable
connectivity.
Multimeter Used to test

cabinet
insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators,
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.
Adjustable Used to
wrench tighten or
loosen hex or
square bolts
and nuts. The
span can be
adjusted to
suit bolts or
nuts in
different sizes.
Table 4-12 lists the accessories required for installing a device.

Table 4-12 Installation accessories

Insulation Used to
tape insulate
electrical
wires and
other
conductors.
Corrugated Used to
pipe protect optical
fibers.
Table 4-13 lists the installation accessories delivered with the device.
Table 4-13 Installation accessories (applicable to the NetEngine 8000 modular

router)
Accessory Quantity Descriptio Part Number
n
Expandab 1 pair Expandable 21242246-001

le guide in the
rail range of
500 mm to
850 mm.
Quick 1 Used to 31500GPH

Installatio guide
n Guide device
installation.


n
Serial 1 pair Used to 04040838

cable connect the
console
port of the
device to a
serial port
of a
maintenanc
e terminal
for local
commission
ing or
maintenanc
e of the
device.
Ground 1 Used to 04152748

cable ground the
device.
Panel 10 Used to fix 26020141

screw expandable
(M6x12) guide rails
and the
device.
Floating 10 Installed on 26020075

nut (M6) mounting
rails of a
cabinet or
rack and
used with
M6 screws
to secure
the
expandable
guide rails
and the
device in
the cabinet
or rack.
Floating 1 Used to 63120191

nut install
mounting floating
bar nuts.


n
ESD wrist 1 Used to 28050001

strap prevent
ESD
damage
when you
touch or
operate the
device or
component
s.
ESD 2 pairs Used to 02210177

gloves prevent
ESD
damage
when you
touch or
operate the
device or
component
s.
Die- 1 Used to 21123221

casting install or
tweezers remove
optical
fibers on
optical
ports.
Fiber 2m Used to 21101258

binding bundle
tape optical
fibers.
Cable tie 100 Used to 21100041

(100 x 2.5 bundle
mm) cables.
Cable tie 200 Used to 21100144

(300 x 3.6 bundle
mm) cables.


n
Label 100 Used to 21200708

cable tie bundle
cables and
attach the
power
cable label
(29041061)
to the
cables.
Signal 30 Used to 29041060

cable identify
label locations of
signal
cables.
Power 2 Used to 29041061

cable identify
label locations of
power
cables.
Bare 1 Used to 14170024

crimp replace an
terminal M6 bare
(M8) crimp
terminal
when M8
screws are
used to
connect the
ground
cable to the
ground
point on
the cabinet.
Heat 5 cm Used to 28040011

shrink provide
tubing insulation
protection
for power
cables.
Switch 1 pair Used to ● X4 device: 21125663

Fabric install SFUs ● X8 device: 21125452
Unit in the
(SFU) chassis or
wrench remove
SFUs from
the chassis.


n
Cable 1 pair Used to ● X4 device: 21125467

managem route ● X8 device: 21125469
ent frame cables
connected ● NetEngine 8000 X16: 21125471
to Line
Processing
Units
(LPUs).
4.4.5 Inspecting the Optical Fiber Link

This section describes the insertion loss and reflection requirements of optical links
and the method of checking the quality of optical links for the application of 50G
optical modules with the PAM4 coding technology.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Tools and instruments for checking optical fiber links are as follows:
● OTDR meter
● Fiber microscope
Precautions
CAUTION
Because the transmit optical power of the OTDR meter is much higher than the
damaged optical power threshold at the receive end, the optical fiber must be
removed from the optical module when the OTDR meter is used to test the optical
path quality.
Currently, the Ethernet port rate is increasing. Since the 50G optical module link
uses the PAM4 encoding technology, there are higher requirements on the optical
fiber and cable quality and the link is more sensitive to multipath reflection
interference of signals. If the fiber link connector, fiber section, or fiber splicing
surface is dirty, optical signals are reflected back and forth on the fiber link,
causing interference due to co-channel noise on the receive side. As a result, the
optical link is unstable or intermittently disconnected.
According to the national standard (GBT50312-2016), the loss of the optical fiber
link connector must meet the requirements described in Table 4-14.

Table 4-14 Maximum attenuation of the optical fiber connector
Type Maximum attenuation of an optical fiber

connector (dB)
Fiber splicing connector 0.3
Optical mechanical connector 0.3
Optical connector 0.75
NOTE
Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.
Table 4-15 describes requirements for the reflection of the optical fiber connector
when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4 encoding to double the
rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the reflection.
Table 4-15 Maximum reflection of connectors
Number of Maximum Reflection of Each Connector (dB)

Optical Fiber
Connectors 50GBASE-FR 50GBASE-LR 50GBASE-ER
1 -25 -22 -19
2 -31 -29 -27
4 -35 -33 -32
6 -38 -35 -35
8 -40 -37 -37
10 -41 -39 -39
Procedure
1. After the optical fiber at the peer end is disconnected, use the OTDR meter to
test the local end. Check whether the loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal. (The loss of a fiber splicing connector should be less than
0.3 dB, the loss of a connector should be less than 0.75 dB, and the reflection
of a connector should be less than -30 dB.) If the test result is not within the
required range, process the abnormal port.
2. Locate the equipment room where the port resides based on the distance
between abnormal points in the OTDR test result. Preliminarily determine the
port location, disconnect the port, and perform an OTDR test on the port that
reports alarms. Check whether the distance is consistent with that in the
previous test. If not, continue to test other ports.

3. After the abnormal port is found, test the port using a fiber microscope. If the
port is dirty, clean it. For details, see "Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters".
4. After the port is cleaned, restore the port, and ensure that the connector is
tightened. Perform an OTDR test on the port to check whether loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange and perform an OTDR test on the port
that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
port that reports alarms to check whether loss and reflection of each link and
node are normal.
7. If multiple abnormal points exist on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.
4.4.6 Checking the Power Distribution System
4.4.6.1 Introduction to the Power Distribution System

The NetEngine 8000 modular router supports AC, high-voltage DC (240 V DC/380
V DC), and DC power supply modes.
● AC power supply mode: Generally, an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains power outlet and
transmits 380 V AC power to an AC power distribution frame. A NetEngine
8000 modular router chassis receives power from the AC power distribution
frame through the power distribution unit (PDU) installed in the cabinet.
● High-voltage DC (240 V DC/380 V DC) power supply mode: Generally, a

rectifier system obtains three-phase 380 V AC power input from a mains
power outlet and transmits 240 V DC/380 V DC power to a DC power
distribution frame. A NetEngine 8000 modular router chassis receives power
from the DC power distribution frame through the PDU installed in the
cabinet.

● DC power supply mode: Generally, a rectifier system obtains three-phase 380

V AC power input from a mains power outlet and transmits -48 V DC power
to a DC power distribution frame. The NetEngine 8000 modular router
obtains power from the DC power distribution frame.
Power modules of the NetEngine 8000 modular router support N+1 redundancy
configuration and N+0 configuration. Different configuration modes provide
different reliability levels.
As core devices, NetEngine 8000 modular router series devices carry important
services. Therefore, the N+1 mode is recommended to ensure high power
reliability. This document provides power distribution instructions based on dual-
system N+1 configuration of power modules.
The following compares the power reliability of different power module
redundancy modes used on the NetEngine 8000 modular router:
● Input redundancy and N+1 power module redundancy (shown in Figure 4-95)
– N power modules provide power for the device, and one power module
works as a backup to provide power redundancy.
– The two power inputs of the device are isolated and back up each other.
– If any power module of the device fails, the device can still work
normally.
– The fault of any power supply system of input A or B does not affect the
normal operation of the device.

Figure 4-95 Input redundancy and N+1 power module redundancy
● N+1 redundancy (shown in Figure 4-96)

– N power modules provide power for the device, and one power module
works as a backup to provide power redundancy.
– The device is powered by one power input (no input redundancy).
– If any power module of the device fails, the device can still work
normally.
– Any single-point failure in the power supply system (including a power
supply failure caused by a faulty power module) will cause the device
unable to work normally.

Figure 4-96 N+1 power module redundancy
● N+0 no redundancy (shown in Figure 4-97)

– All the N power modules provide power for the device.
– The two power inputs of the device are isolated and back up each other.
– If any power module of the device fails, the device cannot work normally.
– The fault of any power supply system of input A or B does not affect the
normal operation of the device.
Figure 4-97 N+0 no redundancy
● N+0 no redundancy (shown in Figure 4-98)

– All the N power modules provide power for the device.

– The device is powered by one power input (no input redundancy).

– If any power module of the device fails, the device cannot work normally.
– Any single-point failure in the power supply system (including a power
supply failure caused by a faulty power module) will cause the device
unable to work normally.
Figure 4-98 N+0 no redundancy
4.4.6.2 NetEngine 8000 X4
4.4.6.2.1 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (AC)
Power Distribution Requirements

NOTE
● The power distribution frame (PDF) uses the 1+1 redundancy mode.
● If the chassis has a low power consumption, a small number of power modules in N+1
redundancy mode need to be configured. The vacant power module slots do not need to
connect to the PDF.
● The NetEngine 8000 modular router must be reliably grounded. Circuit breakers with
the current leakage protection function are not recommended for the devices.
Table 4-16 Power distribution requirements (X4 device chassis)

Cabling Distance ≤ 2.5 m (Determine this distance according to site survey
from the PDF to results.)
the Device's PEM
Number of Power 6+6 input redundancy (outputs from the PDF)

Inputs

Rated Current of ● ≥ 16 A: The phase voltage is greater than or equal to

Connected Circuit 200 V AC, for example, the circuit breaker is connected
Breakers to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
● ≥ 20 A: The phase voltage is greater than or equal to
170 V AC, for example, the circuit breaker is connected
to a public mains power outlet.
NOTE
Circuit breakers with rated current of 16 A or 20 A are
recommended for the PEM's power sockets A1 to A6 and B1 to B6.
Output Terminal Power sockets complying with local standards

Type in the PDF
Power Distribution Schemes
Figure 4-99 X4 device chassis directly connected to the PDF
4.4.6.2.2 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (DC)

NOTE
● The PDF uses power modules in 1+1 redundancy mode.

connect to the PDF.


Cabling Distance Determine this distance according to site survey results.
from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
Rated Current of ≥ 63 A
Connected Circuit NOTE
Breakers Circuit breakers with rated current of 63 A are recommended for
the PEM's terminal blocks A1 to A6 and B1 to B6.
Output Terminal Naked Crimping

Type in the PDF Connector,JG2,25mm^2/35mm^2,M6,80A,Tin Plating,Right
angle (cables are made onsite)

4.4.6.2.3 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (High-Voltage DC)

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
Breakers A circuit breaker with rated current 16 A is recommended for each
channel of output A1 to A6 and B1 to B6.

Type in the PDF

4.4.6.2.4 Connecting a X4 device to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU

(PDU2000-32-3PH-1)
PDU Overview
Figure 4-102 shows the appearance of a 380 V three-phase PDU.
Figure 4-102 380 V three-phase PDU
A 380 V three-phase PDU supports three-phase (L1, L2, and L3) 380 V to 415 V AC
input, and provides two groups of outputs on each phase line. L1 provides outputs
A1 and A2; L2 provides outputs B1 and B2; L3 provides outputs C1 and C2. A1
controls two C13 sockets and one C19 socket. A2, B1, B2, C1, and C2 control one
C19 socket. Each group is controlled by a 16 A circuit breaker. When the groups
are connected to a chassis, the total current of all sockets in each group cannot
exceed 16 A.
CAUTION
A 600 mm wide cabinet supports only horizontal PDUs. If vertical PDUs are
installed on such cabinets, fan modules and SFUs may fail to be properly installed
or removed.

NOTE
● The PDF uses the 1+1 redundancy mode and three-phase 32 A or 40 A.

connect to the PDF.

from the PDU to
the Device's PEM
Number of Power 1+1 three-phase 32 A/40 A input redundancy (outputs

Inputs from the PDF)

Breakers to the UPS.
to a mains power outlet.
NOTE
The rated current of 32 A or 40 A is the recommended
specification for circuit breakers A1 and B1.
Output Terminal IEC 309 industrial connectors

Type in the PDU

A X4 device is installed in the cabinet/rack. The device can house up to six power
modules. Under full configuration of the six power modules, two three-phase
PDUs are required.

Figure 4-103 X4 device chassis connected to a PDF through a three-phase PDU
4.4.6.2.5 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC PDU

(CR8MP2KHDCC0)
PDU Overview
A 380 V high-voltage DC PDU is used to supply power to a device through a 240 V
or 380 V high-voltage DC power distribution system. Figure 4-104 shows the
appearance of a 380 V high-voltage DC PDU.
Figure 4-104 380 V high-voltage DC PDU
A 380 V high-voltage DC PDU supports 240 V/380V DC power input and provides
two output groups A1 and B1. Each group controls four HVDC-3Z-03 sockets.
When the groups are connected to a chassis, the total current of all sockets in
each group cannot exceed 63 A.

CAUTION
or removed.
NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDU to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
Breakers The rated current of 63 A is the recommended specification for
circuit breakers A1 and B1.
Output Terminal HVDC-3Z-03 socket

Type in the PDU

A X4 device is installed in the cabinet/rack. The device can house up to six power
modules. Under full configuration of the six power modules, two 380 V high-

voltage DC PDUs are required, and the output terminals of the PDUs are partially
used.
Figure 4-105 X4 device chassis connected to the PDF through a 380 V high-
voltage DC PDU
4.4.6.3 NetEngine 8000 X8
4.4.6.3.1 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (AC)

NOTE
connect to the PDF.

Cabling Distance ≤ 2.5 m (Determine this distance according to site survey
from the PDF to results.)
the Device's PEM

Inputs


Breakers to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
to a public mains power outlet.
NOTE
Circuit breakers with rated current of 16 A or 20 A are
recommended for the PEM's power sockets A1 to A10 and B1 to
B10.

Type in the PDU

4.4.6.3.2 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (DC)

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
the PEM's terminal blocks A1 to A10 and B1 to B10.


4.4.6.3.3 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Directly (High-Voltage DC)

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs

the PEM's power sockets A1 to A10 and B1 to B10.

Type in the PDF
4.4.6.3.4 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU

(CR8MP2K3PHC0)
PDU Overview

power input, and provides three groups of outputs on each phase line, namely, A,
B, and C. Groups A, B, and C each control two HVDC-3Z-03 sockets. When the
groups are connected to a chassis, the total current of all sockets in each group
cannot exceed 32 A.
CAUTION
or removed.
NOTE

connect to the PDF.


from the PDU to
the Device's PEM


NOTE
specifications for circuit breakers of the three-phase outputs A1,
A2, B1, and B2.

Type in the PDU

A X8 device is installed in the cabinet/rack. The device can house up to 10 power
modules. Under full configuration of the 10 power modules, four three-phase
PDUs are required, and the output terminals of two PDUs are partially used.
Figure 4-110 X8 device chassis connected to a PDF through a three-phase PDU

4.4.6.3.5 Connecting the X8 device to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC PDU

(CR8MP2KHDCC0)
PDU Overview
CAUTION
or removed.

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDU to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
Breakers The rated current of 63 A is the recommended specifications for
circuit breakers A1, A2, B1, and B2.

Type in the PDU

A X8 device is installed in the cabinet/rack. The device can house up to 10 power
modules. Under full configuration of the 10 power modules, three 380 V high-
voltage DC PDUs are required. For reliability purposes, you are advised to use four
PDUs. In this case, the output terminals of two PDUs are partially used.

Figure 4-112 X8 device chassis connected to the PDF through a 380 V high-
voltage DC PDU
4.4.6.4 NetEngine 8000 X16
4.4.6.4.1 Connecting the NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (AC)

NOTE
connect to the PDF.

Figure 4-113 NetEngine 8000 X16 chassis directly connected to the PDF

4.4.6.4.2 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (DC)

NOTE

connect to the PDF.
Table 4-26 Power distribution requirements (NetEngine 8000 X16 chassis)

from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs
circuit breakers A1 to A20 and B1 to B20.



4.4.6.4.3 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Directly (HVDC)

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDF to
the Device's PEM

Inputs

Type in the PDF



4.4.6.4.4 Connecting a NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Through a Three-Phase PDU

(CR8MP2K3PHC0)
PDU Overview
power input, and provides three groups of outputs on each phase line, namely, A,
B, and C. Groups A, B, and C each control two HVDC-3Z-03 sockets. When the
groups are connected to a chassis, the total current of all sockets in each group
cannot exceed 32 A.
CAUTION
or removed.

NOTE

connect to the PDF.

from the PDU to
the Device's PEM


NOTE
specification for circuit breakers A1 to A4 and B1 to B4.

Type in the PDU

A NetEngine 8000 X16 is installed in the cabinet/rack. The device can house up to
20 power modules. Under full configuration of the 20 power modules, seven
three-phase PDUs are required. For reliability purposes, you are advised to use
eight PDUs. In this case, the output terminals of four PDUs are partially used.

Figure 4-117 NetEngine 8000 X16 chassis connected to a PDF through a three-
phase PDU
4.4.6.4.5 Connecting the NetEngine 8000 X16 to a PDF Through a High-Voltage DC

PDU (CR8MP2KHDCC0)
PDU Overview

CAUTION
or removed.
NOTE

connect to the PDF.


from the PDU to
the Device's PEM

Inputs

Type in the PDU

When one NetEngine 8000 X16 is installed in the cabinet/rack, 20 power modules
(full configuration) are configured for the device. In this case, five 380 V high-
voltage DC PDUs are required. For reliability purposes, you are advised to use six
PDUs. Here, the output terminals of two PDUs are partially used.

Figure 4-119 NetEngine 8000 X16 chassis connected to the PDF through a 380 V
high-voltage DC PDU
4.4.7 Unpacking a Device
4.4.7.1 Unpacking a Carton

Context
Cartons are used to pack NetEngine 8000 modular router, power cables, cards,
power modules, and other modules. When a device is delivered, unpack the carton
and check the device and accessories in the carton.
NOTICE
● Do not turn a carton upside down; otherwise, the device in the carton will be
damaged.
● Wear protective gloves or take other protection measures to prevent hand
injuries when unpacking a carton.
● Move the carton into or near the equipment room before unpacking (if space is
sufficient). Moving an unpacked device over a long distance may damage the
device.
NOTE
If the device is found eroded or damped, stop unpacking, check for the reason, and contact
the equipment supplier.
Tools
● Flat-head screwdriver
● Phillips screwdriver
● Diagonal pliers
● Adjustable wrench
● Protective gloves
Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the carton. If the tilt indicator label on the carton is red (see Figure
4-120), the carton is damp, or the seals on the carton are damaged, check for the
reason and contact the equipment supplier immediately. If no exception is found,
start the unpacking.

Figure 4-120 Tilt indicator label
Step 2 Use a pair of diagonal pliers to cut the strapping band on the carton.
Step 3 Remove the top cover of the carton and then the side panels.

Step 4 Remove the box of accessories and packaging.

Step 5 Remove the fixtures at both sides of the device. Use an adjustable wrench to
remove the bolts jointing the fixtures and the base (a), and then use a Phillips
screwdriver to remove the bolts jointing the fixtures and sides of the device (b).
After removing all the bolts, remove the fixtures.

Step 6 For the X4 device and X8 device, use a pallet truck, lifter, or flat cart to move the
device near the cabinet or rack where it will be installed.
The X4 device and X8 device have an optional flat cart (whose part number is
21244111 from Huawei). If you have purchased a flat cart, perform the following
steps to move the device onto the flat cart.
1. Move the flat cart near the device, and step on the brakes of all the casters of
the flat cart to prevent the flat cart from moving.
2. At least four persons are required to move the device onto the flat cart. Move
the device by only the load bearing handles at both sides of the device. Do
not lift or drag the device by the handles of any modules on the device;
otherwise, the device and modules will be damaged.

Step 7 For the NetEngine 8000 X16,use a pallet truck, lifter, or flat cart to move the
device near the cabinet or rack where it will be installed.
The NetEngine 8000 X16 have an optional flat cart (whose part number is
21244111 from Huawei). If you have purchased a flat cart, perform the following
steps to move the device onto the flat cart.
1. Move the flat cart to the rear of the device, and hang the hooks on both sides
of the flat cart to the pallet. See callout 1 in the figure.
2. Step on the brakes of all the casters of the flat cart to prevent the flat cart
from moving. See callout 2 in the figure.
3. One person pulls the metal handles at the rear of the device to pull the
device and adjust the device direction, and at least two persons push the
device horizontally in the front of the device, until the device cannot move
forward.
4. Loosen the bolts on the flat cart. See callout 3 in the figure. Secure the bolts
to fix the device. See callout 4 in the figure.

----End
4.4.7.2 Unpacking a Card
Context
A card is packed in an ESD bag, which is placed in a carton with foam packaging.
You are advised to open the ESD bag only when the card needs to be installed in a
chassis.

NOTICE
● Electronic components are vulnerable to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Before

touching a card, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end
inserted into an ESD jack). Do not touch electronic components on the card.
● If a card is moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, humid place, wait more
than 30 minutes before unpacking the card. Otherwise, the humidity will
damage the card.
Tools
● ESD gloves or ESD wrist strap
● Utility knife
Procedure
Step 1 Inspect the carton. If the carton or the seals on the carton are damaged, contact
the equipment supplier immediately. If the carton is intact, go to the next step.
Step 2 Wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure
that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert the other
end into the ESD jack of the cabinet or rack.
Step 3 Unpack the carton.

1. Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape on the carton with a utility knife.
2. Open the carton, remove the foam packaging, and take out the ESD bag.
3. Open the ESD bag and take out the card.

Step 4 Inspect the card. If any damage is found on the card, analyze the cause and
contact the equipment supplier immediately.
----End
4.5 Chassis Installation
4.5.1 (Optional) Adjusting Mounting Brackets
Context
The procedures and methods for adjusting mounting brackets on the NetEngine
8000 modular router are the same. This section uses the mounting brackets on the
X8 device as an example.
Tools
Procedure
1. Measure the distance (A) between the front mounting rail and the outer side
of the front door, and adjust the mounting brackets to proper positions
according to the mapping between distance A and mounting bracket
installation positions. (The first half of the mounting bracket is connected to a
cable management frame and cannot be adjusted.)
Table 4-30 Mapping between distance A and mounting bracket installation

positions
Distance A Distance A (1100 mm Mounting Bracket Installation

(1000 mm to 1200 mm deep Position
deep cabinet)
cabinet)
150 mm 175 mm Default position (callout 1 in the

figure)
165 mm 190 mm Position shown in callout 2 in the

figure

Distance A Distance A (1100 mm Mounting Bracket Installation

(1000 mm to 1200 mm deep Position
deep cabinet)
cabinet)
175 mm 200 mm Position shown in callout 3 in the

(recommende figure
d)
NOTE
When a 1000 mm deep cabinet is used, the distance between the front mounting rail and
the outer side of the front door must be 175 mm. In this case, adjust the positions of the
mounting brackets according to the position shown in callout 3 in the figure. Otherwise, the
cabling space of the cabinet may be insufficient.
Figure 4-121 Mapping between distance A and mounting bracket installation

positions
4.5.2 Installing the X4 device

Context
NOTE
● Move the device near the cabinet or rack before the installation.
● A610: Leave at least 1000 mm of clearance at the front and rear of the device.
● Keep the tweezers and wrenches delivered with the device for future use.
● For the X4 device, reserve sufficient space on the top of the X4 device for power cable
routing.
● X4 device DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 2U
● X4 device AC & high-voltage DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 1U
● A maximum of three X4 device devices can be installed in each cabinet.
● You can use Huawei expandable guide rails (expandable between 500 mm and 850
mm) or separately purchased guide rails or tray with sufficient load bearing capacity.
Tools and Accessories

● Scissors
● Marker
● X4 device installation template (NetEngine 8000 X4 and X8 Quick Installation
Guide)
● Floating nuts and matching screws
● Floating nut mounting bar
● Expandable guide rails and matching screws
Procedure
Step 1 Mark the mounting holes for the expandable guide rails and mounting brackets
on the guide rails.
NOTE
Positions of mounting brackets only need to be marked on the front mounting rails,
whereas positions of expandable guide rails must be marked on both the front and rear
mounting rails. Keep the mounting holes on the front and rear mounting rails on the same
horizontal plane.
1. Use a pair of scissors to cut the installation template along the X4 device
cutting line.

Figure 4-122 Cutting the installation template
2. Determine the device installation position in the cabinet or rack. Two persons
hold the installation template, align the mounting holes on the installation
template with those on the mounting rails of the cabinet or rack, and fix the
installation template on the mounting rails. Mark the mounting holes for the
mounting brackets and expandable guide rails, and then remove the
installation template.

Figure 4-123 Marking the mounting holes for floating nuts
Step 2 Install floating nuts in the marked mounting holes.

NOTE
● You can use a floating nut mounting bar to facilitate installation of floating nuts.
● When installing the X4 device, eight floating nuts are used to secure the mounting
brackets, and 10 floating nuts are used to secure the guide rails (two for the front end
and three for the rear end of each guide rail).

Figure 4-124 Installing floating nuts
Step 3 Install expandable guide rails.

NOTE
● When installing expandable guide rails, ensure that the front and rear ends of each
guide rail are on the same horizontal plane.
● For a third-party cabinet or rack, if you do not use the expandable guide rails delivered
with the device, use a tray (with a minimum load bearing capacity of 324 kg) instead.
1. Adjust the length of the guide rails and place them in marked positions on
the mounting rails by the plate at the front end and hook at the rear end. The
bottom edges of the guide rails must be aligned with scale lines on the
mounting rails. Then secure the guide rails with M6 screws. See callout 1 in
Figure 4-125. Tighten the M6 screws with a torque of 1.96 N m.
2. Use M6 screws to secure the air baffle to the guide rails. See callout 2 in

Figure 4-125 Installing expandable guide rails
Step 4 Install the device in the cabinet or rack.

1. Move the device into the cabinet. See callout 1 in Figure 4-126.
NOTICE
When moving the device into the cabinet, move the device by the load
bearing handles at both sides of the device. Do not lift or drag the chassis by
the handles of any modules in the chassis; otherwise, the device and modules
will be damaged. Place the rear bottom of the device on the guide rails, and
then horizontally push the chassis in a gentle and smooth manner until the
mounting brackets on the chassis are completely attached to the front
mounting rails. When pushing the chassis, prevent the chassis from colliding
with the captive screws on the mounting brackets.
2. Tighten the captive screws on mounting brackets. See callout 2 in Figure

4-126. Tighten the captive screws with a torque of 1.76 N·m.

Figure 4-126 Installing the device in the cabinet or rack
----End
4.5.3 Installing the X8 device
Context
NOTE
● For the X8 device, reserve sufficient space on the top of the X8 device for power cable
routing.
● X8 device DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 3U
● X8 device AC & high-voltage DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 1U
● A maximum of two X8 device devices can be installed in each cabinet.


● Marker
● X8 device installation template (NetEngine 8000 X4 and X8 Quick Installation
Guide)
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the device installation position in the cabinet or rack. Two persons hold
the installation template, align the mounting holes on the installation template
with those on the mounting rails of the cabinet or rack, and fix the installation
template on the mounting rails. Mark the mounting holes for the mounting
brackets and expandable guide rails, and then remove the installation template.
NOTE
horizontal plane.


NOTE
● When installing the X8 device, 10 floating nuts are used to secure the mounting
brackets, and 10 floating nuts are used to secure the guide rails (two for the front end
and three for the rear end of each guide rail).


NOTE


1. Use a pallet truck or lifter to move the device into the cabinet or rack. See
callout 1 in Figure 4-130.
NOTICE
– The X8 device chassis is heavy, so lifting it manually is not recommended.

– If no pallet truck or lifter is available and the chassis has to be moved into
the cabinet or rack manually, move the chassis by the load bearing handles
at both sides of it. Do not lift or drag the chassis by the handles of any
modules in the chassis; otherwise, the chassis and modules will be
damaged. Place the rear bottom of the chassis on the guide rails, and then
push the chassis horizontally and gently until the mounting brackets on
the chassis are completely attached to the front mounting rails. When
pushing the chassis, prevent it from colliding with the captive screws on
the mounting brackets.


----End
4.5.4 Installing the NetEngine 8000 X16
Context
NOTE
● If the device is delivered with MPUs, LPUs, SFUs, and power modules installed, you are
advised to remove them before installing the device into a cabinet or rack.
● When installing the NetEngine 8000 X16, reserve sufficient space for power cabling
routing above the NetEngine 8000 X16.
● NetEngine 8000 X16 DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 3U
● NetEngine 8000 X16 AC & high-voltage DC chassis: reserved space ≥ 1U


● Adjustable wrench
● Marker
● NetEngine 8000 X16 installation template (NetEngine 8000 X16 Switch Quick
Installation Guide, delivered with the chassis)
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the device installation position in the cabinet or rack. Two persons hold
the installation template, align the mounting holes on the installation template
with those on the mounting rails of the cabinet or rack, and fix the installation
template on the mounting rails (with the bottom edge of the template at the
bottom of the cabinet or rack). Mark the mounting holes for the mounting
brackets and expandable guide rails, and then remove the installation template.
NOTE
horizontal plane.


NOTE
● When installing the NetEngine 8000 X16, 18 floating nuts are used to secure the
mounting brackets, and 10 floating nuts are used to secure the guide rails (two for the
front end and three for the rear end of each guide rail).


NOTE


1. Push the flat cart with the device to the front of the cabinet or rack (with the
rear of the device facing the cabinet or rack). Remove the screws and bolts
that fix the device on the flat cart. See callout 1 in Figure 4-134.
2. Place the bottom edge of the device on the guide rails. One person pulls the
metal handles at the rear of the device to pull the device and adjust the
device direction, and at least two persons push the device horizontally and
gently in the front of the device, until the mounting brackets on the device
are completely attached to the front mounting rails. When pushing the device,
prevent the device from colliding with the captive screws on mounting
brackets. See callout 2 in Figure 4-134.

CAUTION
Be careful to ensure personal safety when you are pulling the metal handles
at the rear of the device.
----End

4.6 Other Modules Installation
4.6.1 Installing Filler Panels in a Cabinet or Rack
Context
If the top of the chassis is vacant, you need to install filler panels in the cabinet or
rack for front and rear airflow isolation. If a cabinet accommodates multiple
chassis, filler panels must be installed in the space between the chassis.
Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure
end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
Step 2 Install a 1U filler panel directly above the chassis. Place the bottom of the 1U filler
panel against the top of the chassis. Then install 2U filler panels above the 1U
filler panel. The following figure uses the X8 device as an example.
NOTE
For the X4 device and X8 device, 1U and 2U filler panels are required. Part numbers of 1U
and 2U filler panels are 21141166 and 21141167, respectively. Filler panels must be
installed in vacant slots of a cabinet to isolate airflows; otherwise, heat dissipation of
devices will be less effective. Huawei cabinets must be equipped with filler panels. If
another vendor's cabinet with no filler panels is used, filler panels must also be prepared.
Filler panels of Huawei cabinets are recommended.
For the NetEngine 8000 X16, only 1U filler panels are required.

Figure 4-135 Installing filler panels in a cabinet or rack
----End
4.6.2 Installing Cable Management Frames

Context
The procedures and methods for installing cable management frames of all the
NetEngine 8000 modular router models are the same. The following figure shows
the installation of cable management frames on the X8 device as an example.

Procedure
Step 2 Install cable management frames on the device. Insert the positioning pins of a
cable management frame into mounting holes on the device, slide the cable
management frame up and down to fit the positioning pins in the recess of the
mounting holes, and tighten the captive screws on the cable management frame.
Tighten the captive screws with a torque of 0.54 N·m.
Figure 4-136 Installing cable management frames
----End

4.6.3 Installing a Power Module Enclosure

Context
The procedures and methods for installing a power module enclosure are the
same on all the NetEngine 8000 modular router models. The figure below uses X8
device as an example for installing a power module enclosure.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure
Step 2 Slowly open the power module enclosure to a position at an angle of 95 degrees.
When you hear a clip sound, the power module enclosure is opened to the
maximum extent. In this case, do not further open the power module enclosure.
Step 3 Hold the power module enclosure with both hands, align the positioning pins on
the power module enclosure with the mounting holes besides the power module,
and insert the positioning pins into the mounting holes. See callout 2 in Figure
4-137
NOTE
For the NetEngine 8000 X16, align the mounting pegs on the power module enclosure with
the mounting holes, and slide the power module enclosure downwards to secure it in place.
Step 4 Hold one side of the power module enclosure with one hand, and use the other
hand to secure the power module enclosure to the device using captive screws
with a torque of 0.54 N·m, as shown in callout 3 in Figure 4-137.
Step 5 Close the power module enclosure.

Figure 4-137 Installing a power module enclosure on the device
----End
4.6.4 Installing a Tray

Context
The procedures and methods for installing the tray on all the NetEngine 8000
modular router models are the same. The following figure shows tray installation
on the X8 device. The tray is used to keep the wrenches of LPUs.
NOTE
Do not install a tray when installing the chassis on the ground or on a desk. This is because
the tray juts out at the bottom of the chassis. In this case, you are advised to keep the
wrenches properly.
Tools
Procedure
1. Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
2. Align the tray with positioning pins, securely insert the tray, and tighten the
captive screws with a torque of 0.54 N·m.

Figure 4-138 Installing a tray on the device
4.6.5 Installing a Tool Box for Storing SFU Wrenches

Context
The procedures and methods for installing a tool box for storing SFU wrenches on
all the NetEngine 8000 modular router models are the same. The following figure
shows how to install a tool box for storing SFU wrenches on the NetEngine 8000
modular router as an example.
NOTE
You are advised to safekeep the wrenches after use.
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
Procedure
1. Tilt the tool box to the bottom of the chassis, place it flat, and secure it to the
chassis by tightening three M3 screws with a torque of 0.54 N m. Before
installing SFUs, cut off cable ties with the cutting pliers and take out SFU
wrenches from the tool box. After installing the SFUs, place the wrenches in
the tool box.

Figure 4-139 Installing a tool box for storing SFU wrenches
4.6.6 Installing SFUs
Context
NOTICE
● Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic
shielding and heat dissipation.
● Before removing the filler panel from the fan slots, ensure that all M3 screws
on the filler panel have been removed. If some M3 screws are not removed
when the filler panel is removed, the screws will be bent.
● Before installing SFUs on a device, make sure that the device and SFUs are all
free from damp.
● When installing an SFU, gently push the SFU along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause pins
on the backplane connector to bend.
● If the connector of an SFU has collided with the slot or other objects, ask
Huawei professionals whether the SFU can still be installed. Installing an SFU
with distorted connector may cause damage to the device.
● Before installing an SFU, remove latches from the back-flow preventer on the
SFU.
● Before installing an SFU, remove the filler panel from the fan slots.
● When eight SFUs are configured, slots 1 to 8 are used by default. Slot 9 cannot
be used and its filler panel cannot be removed.
● When four SFUs are configured (1T bundle scenario), slots 3, 5, 6, and 8 are
used by default. Slots 1, 2, 4, 7, and 9 cannot be used and their filler panels
cannot be removed.
● On devices delivered early, SFU wrenches are placed in the SFU tool box. On
devices delivered later, the SFU wrenches are placed in the wrench-
accommodating slots at the rear of the chassis. This appearance difference
does not affect normal device running.
Tools

Procedure
Step 2 Remove the filler panel from the fan slots at the rear of the chassis and from the
slot where an SFU is to be installed.
Step 3 Hold the top of the SFU with both hands and stand the SFU upright. Take the SFU
out from the ESD bag.
Step 4 Open the handle on the left side of the SFU. Grasp the handle with one hand and
the top of the SFU with the other hand to stabilize the SFU.

NOTE
For the X4 device and X8 device, use one hand to support the bottom of the SFU, use the
other hand to grasp the panel of the SFU, and place the SFU in the slot.
Step 5 Remove latches on the SFU. See callout 1 in Figure 4-140.

Step 6 Use one hand to support the bottom of the SFU and use the other hand to grasp
the panel of the SFU. Place the SFU in the slot and gently push the SFU along the
guide rails. See callout 2 in Figure 4-140.
WARNING
For the SFU of NetEngine 8000 X16, do not carry an SFU horizontally by one
person because it is heavy and long. Two persons are required when moving an
SFU for a long distance. To prevent personal injury or damage to the SFU, follow
the preceding steps.
Step 7 Take out the wrenches for SFUs, and install the wrenches on the SFU. The
wrenches of SFU see Figure 4-141. A wrench is successfully installed until you
hear a click. Grasp the wrenches with both hands, and gently push the SFU until
the hooks of the wrenches are attached to the interior sides of the slot (see Figure
4-142). Close the wrenches until the SFU is securely installed in the chassis. See
callouts 3 and 4 in Figure 4-140.

NOTICE
Do not use a tool other than the wrenches to install or remove an SFU.
Figure 4-140 Installing an SFU in the chassis
Figure 4-141 Wrenches of SFU
NOTICE
SFUs and LPUs use different ejector levers. Ensure you use the correct one.

Figure 4-142 Installing the SFU in place
Step 8 Remove the wrenches. Press and hold down a round button on the SFU with one
hand and hold one wrench with the other hand to remove it downwards. See
Figure 4-143. Remove the other wrench in the same way.
Figure 4-143 Removing wrenches from an SFU

----End
4.6.7 Installing Fan Modules
Context
Fan module slots of the NetEngine 8000 modular router are outside SFUs. Install
SFUs before installing fan modules. The procedures and methods for installing fan
modules on all the NetEngine 8000 modular router models are the same. The
figure shows fan module installation on the X8 device as an example.
NOTICE
● Do not stand a fan module upright to avoid it falling over and causing damage
or injury.
● To prevent a fan module from falling down, hold both handles while removing
it.
Tools
Procedure
Step 2 Take a fan module out from the ESD bag, and press the release buttons on the
right side of the two fan module handles. See callout 1 in Figure 4-144.
Step 3 Turn the fan module handles out and then turn the handles into the fan module
to lock them. See callout 2 inFigure 4-144.
Step 4 Hold the handles with both hands and gently push the fan module into the slot
along the guide rails until the fan module cannot move forward. See callout 3 in
Figure 4-144.
Step 5 Press the release buttons on the right side of the fan module handles to fold the
handles. See callout 4 in Figure 4-144.
Step 6 Tighten the captive screws on the fan module. See callout 5 in Figure 4-144.
Tighten the captive screws with a torque of 0.54 N m.

Figure 4-144 Installing a fan module on a device
----End
4.6.8 Installing Power Modules
Context
The NetEngine 8000 modular router supports pluggable power modules. The
procedures and methods for installing power modules on all the NetEngine 8000
modular router models are the same. The following figure shows power module
installation on a X8 device as an example.
NOTICE
● Do not remove the filler panel on a power module slot if no power module
needs to be installed in the slot.
● Do not install DC power modules and AC & high-voltage DC power modules on
the same device.
● When installing a power module, ensure that the indicator on the power
module is on the top.

Tools
ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
Procedure
Step 2 Install a power module on the device, with the silkscreen of the power module
being presented in the upper left corner.
1. Remove the filler panel from the slot where the power module will be
installed. Keep the filler panel in an appropriate place for later use.
2. Grasp the power module handle with one hand and use the other hand to
support the bottom of the power module. Slowly push the power module into
the slot along the guide rails, until you hear a click and the power module
cannot move forward.
Figure 4-145 Installing a power module on the device
----End
4.6.9 Installing MPUs and LPUs
Context
MPUs and LPUs of the NetEngine 8000 modular router are installed in different
slots, but their installation methods are similar. This section uses an LPU as an
example to describe the installation procedure of MPUs and LPUs. The procedures

and methods for installing LPUs are the same on all the NetEngine 8000 modular
router models. The following figure shows LPU installation on the X8 device.
NOTICE
● Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic
shielding, heat dissipation, and dustproof performance of the device.
● Before installing a card, ensure that the device and card are not damped, and
that the backplane and card connectors are not damaged or have foreign
objects.
● When installing a card, ensure that its ejector levers are at the bottom to
avoid incorrect installation. Incorrect card installation will damage the
connector at the rear of the card.
● When installing a card, gently push the card along the guide rails, and be
careful not to crash the card connector. Distorted card connector will cause
pins on the backplane connector to bend.
● If the connector of a card has collided with the slot or other objects, confirm
with Huawei personnel whether the card can still be installed. Installing a
card with a distorted connector may damage the device.
● Before removing or inserting a card using ejector levers, remove the optical
modules. Otherwise, the ejector levers will interfere with the optical modules
and optical fibers.
● After the installation is complete, remove the ejector levers and place them in
the specified position on the tray.
● The ejector levers of the early-delivered devices are placed in trays, and those
of the later-delivered devices are bound to the mounting brackets of the
chassis using anti-lost ropes. This difference does not affect the normal
operation of devices.
Tools
Procedure
that the wrist strap remains in close contact with your wrist, and that the
connector is inserted into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
Step 2 (Optional) If the slot where the card will be installed has a filler panel, remove the
filler panel first.
Step 3 Remove an LPU from its ESD bag and verify that the captive screws on the LPU
panel are loose. Take the ejector levers delivered with the LPU from the tray, press
the latches on the levers, and then connect the levers to the connectors on both
sides of the LPU. See callouts 1 and 2 in Figure 4-146. Rotate the LPU's ejector
levers 45 degrees outward. Using both hands to hold the two sides of the LPU,
slowly slide the LPU into the slot along the guide rails, until the LPU cannot move
forward. See callout 3 in Figure 4-146. Always ensure that the card is properly

installed or removed. For details about how to perform the operations, see
(Video) LPU Installation and Removal Guide.
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on both ends of the LPU
panel. See callout 4 in Figure 4-146. Tighten the captive screws with a torque of
1.18 N m.
Figure 4-146 Installing a card on the device
Figure 4-147 Ejector lever of the LPU
NOTE
SFUs and LPUs use different ejector levers. Ensure you use the correct one.
----End

4.6.10 Installing an Optical Module
NOTICE
● Huawei-certified optical modules are strongly recommended because non-

Huawei-certified optical modules cannot ensure transmission reliability and
may affect service stability.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves before installing optical modules.
● Install dust-proof caps on optical ports without optical modules.
● Do not insert an optical module reversely. If an optical module cannot be
completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port. Turn the
optical module over and try again.
Tools
● Dust caps
● (Optional) Optical port dust plug
Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in close contact with your wrist, and insert
the other end into the ESD jack of the device or cabinet/rack.
2. Insert the optical module into the optical port until the optical module is
secured in the optical port.
Figure 4-148 Installing an optical module

Follow-up Procedure
If the optical module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for
technical support.
4.6.11 (Optional) Installing a Chassis Door

Context
Chassis doors of the NetEngine 8000 modular router are optional. The cable
management frames matching chassis doors have rubber components. A chassis
door is installed at the front side of a chassis to shield electromagnetic noise. The
procedures and methods for installing chassis doors are the same for all the
NetEngine 8000 modular router models. The following figures show chassis door
installation on the X8 device.
The chassis door can be installed after cables are connected.
NOTE
● Components of the chassis door include dedicated cable management frames and a
lower enclosure frame tray. The power module enclosure is integrated with the chassis
door. When installing the chassis door components, you do not need to install the cable
management frames, lower enclosure frame tray, and power module enclosure that are
delivered with the chassis.
● The chassis door and cabinet door cannot be installed together.

Procedure
Step 2 Install cable management frames on the device. Insert the positioning pins of a
cable management frame into mounting holes on the device, insert the cable
management frame horizontally, and tighten the captive screws on the cable
management frame with a torque of 0.54 N m.

Figure 4-149 Installing cable management frames on the device
Step 3 Install upper and lower enclosure frames on the device. Align the upper and lower
enclosure frames with mounting holes on the device, insert the upper and lower
enclosure frames horizontally, and tighten the captive screws on the upper and
lower enclosure frames with a torque of 0.54 N m.
Figure 4-150 Installing the upper and lower enclosure frames on the device
Step 4 Install a chassis door on the device.

1. Align the buckles at the bottom of the chassis door with the lower enclosure
frame and insert the buckles.

2. Push the chassis door to the upper enclosure frame until you hear a click
indicating that hooks of the chassis door clasp in the upper enclosure frame.
Figure 4-151 Installing a chassis door
----End
4.6.12 (Optional) Installing a Noise Reduction Module
Context
The noise reduction module is optional to the NetEngine 8000 modular router.
The noise reduction module is installed at the rear of the chassis to reduce noise.
The procedures and methods for installing a noise reduction module are the same
for all the NetEngine 8000 modular router models. The following figures show
noise reduction module installation on the X8 device.
NOTE
● A noise reduction module consists of the left and right mounting brackets as well as the
main body of the module.

Procedure

Step 2 Install the left and right mounting brackets into the corresponding locations at the
rear of the chassis. Then, tighten the captive screws on the mounting brackets
with a torque of 0.54 N·m.
Step 3 Install the main body of the noise reduction module onto the device. Align the
buckles at the bottom of the main body of the noise reduction module with the
slots at the bottom of the left and right mounting brackets, and click the buckles
into the slots. Push the main body to ensure that the buckles at the top of the
main body are aligned with the slots at the top of the mounting brackets. Then,
further push the main body until the buckles are securely clicked into the slots.
----End
4.7 Installing DPD125-12-24 DC Power Distribution Box
4.7.1 Installing the DPD125-12-24

This section describes how to install the DPD125-12-24 into a cabinet and route
cables.
DANGER
Install power cables when the power is off to avoid personal injury.
NOTE
● Cables that have proper length and are equipped with terminals are required.
CAUTION
A power distribution box (PDB) is equipped with a guide rail. To install the PDB in
a third-party cabinet, the third-party cabinet must be equipped with a guide rail.
Procedure
1. Remove the temporary protective cover of the DPD125-12-24.

2. Install guide rails.

Install the guide rails 4 U below the top of the cabinet and align the bottom
of guide rails with the corresponding scale line. See (1) in Figure 4-152.
3. Install floating nuts.
Install two floating nuts into the third and tenth holes from the bottom of the
guide rail. See (2) in Figure 4-152.
4. Install the power distribution box into the cabinet.
Push the power distribution box into the cabinet along the guide rails, and
use four screws to fix the power distribution box. See (3) and (4) in Figure
4-152.
NOTE
The power distribution box is heavy and needs to be carried by four persons. Avoid
stepping on the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet during installation.
Figure 4-152 Installing guide rails and floating nuts
5. Install ground cables.

Install ground cables for the equipment room, and connect the peer end of
the ground cables to the grounding copper bar of the equipment room.

6. Install power cables.

a. Attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable.
b. Lay external power input cables of the DPD125-12-24.
i. Lay power cables along the cable ladder to the device.
ii. Remove the plastic protective cover from the connection box of the
DPD125-12-24 input end. Connect one end of each DC power cable
to the corresponding port and the other end to the PDF.
iii. After connecting power cables, re-install the protective cover.
c. Lay power cables between the DPD125-12-24 and device.
i. Remove the plastic protective cover from the connection box of the
DPD125-12-24 output end. Connect one end of each DC power cable
to the corresponding port and the other end to an input port of the
device.
ii. After connecting power cables, re-install the protective cover.
d. Use cable ties to bundle the cables every 150 mm (5.91 in.) upwards
from the bottom end, and fasten the cables to the cable tray.


NOTE
DPD125-12-24 supports 24 output lines, the maximum diameter of each output cable
is 25 mm2. DPD125-12-24 input terminals support both short-circuit and non-short-
circuit modes.
● In short-circuit mode, the maximum number of inputs is 6 (3+3), the maximum
diameter of each input cable is 95 mm2, M8 terminals are used, and the
diameter of the corresponding ground cable is 50 mm2.
● In non-short-circuit mode, the maximum number of inputs is 12 (6+6), the

maximum diameter of each input cable is 50 mm2, M6 terminals are used, and
the diameter of the corresponding ground cable is 25 mm2.
After removing the short-circuiting copper bars, reserve the screws for installing
the power cables.
7. Attach permanent labels 20 mm (0.79 in.) from both ends of each power
cable.
4.8 Line planning
4.8.1 AC & High-Voltage DC Power Cable Routing Planning of

the X4 device

Context
To ensure that power cables are connected in order, you are advised to plan power
cable routing in advance.
NOTE
● If only one power source is available in the equipment room, connect all power modules
to power source A (terminal blocks or power sockets A1 to An) or power source B
(terminal blocks or power sockets B1 to Bn).
● When both power sources A and B are available:
● In AC or high-voltage DC scenarios, power source A is used by default. If power
source A is faulty, the system automatically switches to power source B.
● In DC scenarios, if the two power sources have different voltages, the power source
with a higher voltage provides a higher current.
● If AC & high-voltage DC inputs are available to both power sources A and B, the
220 V AC input is used by default. If the 220 V AC input is faulty, the system
automatically switches to the high-voltage DC input.
● Requirements for the power distribution of a customer's cabinet: The output power of
power sources A and B must be greater than the maximum input power of the device.
● The cabinet supports overhead cabling and underfloor cabling, and the cabling
scenarios of third-party cabinets need to be evaluated separately.
Mapping Between Power Sockets of the PEM and Power Modules

One power module at the front of the chassis corresponds to two power sockets.
For example, the power module in PM1 slot corresponds to power sockets A1 and
B1.
Figure 4-153 Power sockets of the AC & high-voltage DC PEM on the X4 device
Power Cable Routing Planning

To facilitate power cable routing, reserve at least 1U space on the top of the X4
device AC & high-voltage DC chassis.
On the X4 device, six power cables from A1 to A6 are routed from the right side of
the cabinet or rack (when the installation personnel is opposite to the rear of the
cabinet or rack, as mentioned below), and six power cables from B1 to B6 are
routed from the left side of the cabinet or rack, as shown in Figure 4-154.

Figure 4-154 Routing of AC & high-voltage DC power cables of the X4 device
PDU Power Cable Routing Planning

The distance between the X4 device AC & high-voltage DC chassis is 1U.
● The following figure shows the input power cable of a 380 V three-phase AC
PDU.

● The following figure shows the input power cable of a 240 V/380 V high-
voltage DC PDU.
The following figure shows the cable routing of a 380 V AC PDU with a five-pin
input power cable.

Figure 4-155 Cable routing of a 380 V AC PDU with a five-pin input power cable
The following figure shows the cable routing of a 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC
PDU with a three-pin input power cable.

Figure 4-156 Cable routing of a 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC PDU with a three-
pin input power cable
4.8.2 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a X4 device

Context
NOTE
Mapping Between Terminal Blocks of the PEM and Power Modules

One power module at the front of the chassis corresponds to two terminal blocks.
For example, the power module in PM1 slot corresponds to terminal blocks A1
and B1.
Figure 4-157 Terminal blocks of the DC PEM on the X4 device

device DC chassis.
On the X4 device, 12 power cables from A1 to A6 are routed from the right side of
the cabinet or rack (when the installation personnel are opposite to the rear of
the cabinet or rack, as mentioned below), and 12 power cables from B1 to B6 are
routed from the left side of the cabinet or rack, as shown in .

Figure 4-158 Routing of DC power cables of the X4 device

the X8 device

Context
NOTE

B1.
Figure 4-159 Power sockets of the AC & high-voltage DC PEM on the X8 device

device AC & high-voltage DC chassis.
On the X8 device, 10 power cables connected to the PEM's power sockets A1 to
A10 are routed from the left side of the cabinet or rack and 10 power cables
connected to the PEM's power sockets B1 to B10 are routed from the right side of
the cabinet or rack (when facing the rear of the cabinet or rack), as shown in
Figure 4-160.

Figure 4-160 Routing of AC & high-voltage DC power cables of the X8 device
Power Cable Routing Planning of a PDB


Figure 4-161 Cable routing of a PDB
Power Cable Routing Planning of PDUs


● The following figure shows the input power cables of a 380 V three-phase AC
PDU.
● The following figure shows the input power cables of a 240 V or 380 V high-
voltage DC PDU.
The following figure shows the cable routing of a 380 V AC PDU with a five-pin
input power cable.

Figure 4-162 Cable routing of a 380 V AC PDU with a five-pin input power cable
The following figure shows the cable routing of a 240 V or 380 V high-voltage DC
PDU with a three-pin input power cable.

Figure 4-163 Cable routing of a 240 V or 380 V high-voltage DC PDU with a

three-pin input power cable
4.8.4 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a X8 device

Context
NOTE

and B1.
Figure 4-164 Terminal blocks of the DC PEM on the X8 device

device DC chassis.
On the X8 device, 20 power cables connected to the PEM's terminal blocks A1 to

A10 are routed from the left side of the cabinet or rack and ten power cables
connected to the PEM's terminal blocks B1 to B10 are routed from the right side
of the cabinet or rack (when facing the rear of the cabinet or rack), as shown in
Figure 4-165.

Figure 4-165 Routing of DC power cables of the X8 device

a NetEngine 8000 X16

Context
NOTE

B1.
Figure 4-166 Power sockets of the AC and high-voltage DC PEM on the NetEngine
8000 X16

To facilitate power cable routing, reserve at least 1U space on the top of the
NetEngine 8000 X16 AC & high-voltage DC chassis.

On the NetEngine 8000 X16, 20 power cables from A1 to A20 are routed from the
left side of the cabinet or rack, and 20 power cables from B1 to B20 are routed
from the right side of the cabinet or rack, as shown in Figure 4-167.

Figure 4-167 Routing of AC or high-voltage DC power cables of the NetEngine

8000 X16

4.8.6 DC Power Cable Routing Planning of a NetEngine 8000

X16
Context
NOTE

and B1.

Figure 4-168 Terminal blocks of the DC PEM on the NetEngine 8000 X16

To facilitate power cable routing, reserve at least 3U space on the top of the
NetEngine 8000 X16 DC chassis.
On the NetEngine 8000 X16, 40 power cables from A1 to A20 are routed from the
left side of the cabinet or rack, and 40 power cables from B1 to B20 are routed
from the right side of the cabinet or rack, as shown in Figure 4-169.

Figure 4-169 Routing of DC power cables of the NetEngine 8000 X16

4.8.7 Signal Cable Routing Planning

Context
To route signal cables properly, you are advised to plan signal cable routing in
advance.
NOTE
The cabinet supports overhead cabling and underfloor cabling, and the cabling scenarios of
third-party cabinets need to be evaluated separately.
Cabling Capability Baseline of the A612/A610 Cabinet
Table 4-31 Cabling capability baseline of the cabinet

Cabinet Distance Optical Fiber Single-Side Cabinet
Model from the Type Cabling Cabling
Front Capability Capability
Mounting (PCS) (PCS)
Rails to the
Front Door
(mm)
A612 175 LC 936 1872
MPO 288 576
Cat5e 96 192
shielded
network cable
A610 150 LC 1152 2304
MPO 312 624
Cat5e 80 160
shielded
network cable
Signal Cable Routing Planning

To facilitate signal cable routing, you are advised to route signal cables based on
the cabinet's cabling capability baseline. Figure 4-170 takes optical fiber
connections on the X8 device as an example.

Figure 4-170 Connecting optical fibers
4.9 Connect a Device
4.9.1 Connecting Power Input Cables of a 380 V Three-Phase

AC PDU
Procedure
Step 1 Disassemble the connector of the three-phase PDU to separate the male
connector from the female connector.

Step 2 Remove part A and part B from the female connector.

1. Open the top cover of the female connector, use a Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the screw at the front of part A, and remove part A from the female
connector.
2. Rotate part B at the bottom of the female connector counterclockwise, and
then unplug part B from the female connector.
Step 3 Peel the insulation coating at the end of the power cable, insert the wires of the
power cable into cord end terminals, and crimp the cord end terminals on the
power wires with a crimping tool.
NOTE
The methods for installing cord end terminals to the five power wires are the same. This
figure illustrates installation of a cord end terminal on the neutral wire (N) as an example.
Step 4 Insert wires of the three-phase five-pin power cable in the holes at the rear of part
A.
1. Put the three-phase five-pin power cable through part B, female connector,
and part C in turn.

2. Insert the three live wires L1 (yellow), L2 (green), and L3 (red), neutral wire N
(blue), and protection ground cable (yellow-green) into the L1, L2, L3, N, and
PGND holes at the rear of part A respectively.
3. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws on the side of part A.
Step 5 Install part A back to the female connector and tighten the screw at the front of
part A.
Step 6 Connect the male connector and female connector to assemble the three-phase
PDU.
----End
4.9.2 Connecting Power Input Cables of a 240 V/380 V High-

Voltage DC PDU
Procedure
Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen screws on the cover plate of the input terminal
block on the 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC PDU, and lift the cover plate.
On the cover plate, POS indicates the positive pole, NEG indicates the negative
pole, and PE indicates the ground cable.

Step 2 Open the plastic protection covers on the PE and NEG input terminal blocks, as
shown in callout 1 in the figure below. Connect power cables to the terminal
blocks, as shown in callout 2 in the figure below. Close the plastic protection
covers. The other ends of the power cables are connected to the PDU. Tighten the
NOTE
● Yellow-green cables are ground cables, blue cables are negative (–) cables, and black or
red cables are positive (+) cables. In the figure, blue and black cables are used as an
example. The cable color may vary depending on the local regulations or customer
requirements.
● Connect the ground cables in yellow-green, negative (–) cables in blue, and positive (+)
cables in black or red in sequence.
● Ensure that all the input terminal blocks are connected with power cables and the
screws are tightened.

Step 3 Put down the cover plate and tighten the screws on the cover plate with a torque
of 0.54 N•m.
----End
4.9.3 Connecting the Ground Cable
Context
The ground cable of a device can be connected in either of the following ways:

● If the device is installed close to a ground bar in the equipment room, connect
the ground cable to this ground bar.
● If the device is installed far from available ground bars, connect the ground
cable to the equipotential terminal or ground point on a cabinet or rack.
(Ensure that the cabinet or rack is reliably grounded.)
The following procedure connects the ground cable to the ground point on a
cabinet.
NOTE
● Use the ground cable delivered with the device.

● The ground point of a NetEngine 8000 modular router is located at its rear and
supports a ground cable with a two-hole OT terminal.
● When using a ground cable with a one-hole OT terminal, route the ground cable
properly to prevent it from hindering installation and removal of fan modules.
● The procedures and methods for connecting ground cables of all the NetEngine 8000
modular router models are the same. The following figure shows the ground cable
connection for a X8 device as an example.
Tools
● Multimeter
Procedure
Step 2 Connect the two-hole OT terminal (OT2-16-8 terminal) of the ground cable to the
ground point of the device. See callout 1 in Figure 4-171. Tighten the M8 screws
with a torque of 12 N m.
Step 3 Connect the one-hole OT terminal (OT16-6 terminal) of the ground cable to the
ground point on the cabinet/rack. See callout 2 in Figure 4-171. Tighten the M6
screws with a torque of 4.8 N m.

Figure 4-171 Connecting the ground cable
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the ground cable is connected, verify that the electrical resistance between
the ground terminal and ground point is no more than 0.1 ohm on a multimeter.

4.9.4 Connecting High-Voltage DC Power Cables
Context
High-voltage DC power cables can be connected directly to an EoR or to a PDU.
For details about how to directly connect high-voltage DC power cables to an EoS,
see Connecting AC Power Cables. The following describes how to connect high-
voltage DC power cables to a PDU. A high-voltage DC power cable can transmit
240 V/380 V high-voltage DC power.
NOTE
● The AC or 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC chassis requires Huawei-customized high-

voltage DC connectors. Only AC or 240 V/380 V high-voltage DC cables delivered by
Huawei can be used.
● In high-voltage DC scenarios, if both power sources A and B are connected to power
supplies, power source A is used by default. If power source A is faulty, power source B
is used.
● If you use high-voltage DC PDU power cables delivered from Huawei, ensure that a DC
power source is available within 3000 mm (cable distance) away from the device.
● It is recommended that you divide all cables in the cabinet into two equal bundles and
route them from left and right sides of the cabinet respectively.
● Bundle high-voltage DC PDU power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power
cables are not crossed or twisted.
● The procedures and methods for connecting high-voltage DC PDU power cables of all
the NetEngine 8000 modular router models are the same. The following figure shows
the high-voltage DC PDU power cable connection for the X8 device.
DANGER
Do not install high-voltage DC power cables while the power is on.
NOTICE
● Before connecting DC PDU power cables, make sure that the power switches
of the external power supply system are all in OFF position.
● The connector types and maximum input current of high-voltage DC PDU
power cables used on a device must meet requirements of the device. Use the
power cables delivered with the device.
redundancy. Do not connect all the high-voltage DC PDU power cables of a
device to the PDUs controlled by the same circuit breaker.
● Only horizontal PDUs are applicable to AC or high-voltage DC cabinets. If
vertical PDUs are installed on such cabinets, fan modules may fail to be
properly installed or removed.

Tools
● Diagonal pliers
● Cable ties
Procedure
Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of each high-voltage DC PDU power cable.
Step 3 Connect the HVDC-3T-01 straight female connector of the high-voltage DC PDU
power cable to the power socket on the PEM of the power module, and connect
the HVDC-3T-03 straight male connector of the high-voltage DC PDU power cable
to the PDU, as shown in Figure 4-172.
Step 4 After connecting all the high-voltage DC PDU power cables, bundle them from
bottom to top with cable ties, at intervals of 250 mm. Fix the power cables on the
rack and use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties.
Step 5 Replace the temporary labels with formal labels.

Figure 4-172 Connecting high-voltage DC PDU power cables

----End
4.9.5 Connecting DC Power Cables
Context
DC power cables of a device include a -48 V power cable and an RTN ground
cable. You need to cut the delivered DC power cables into appropriate lengths
according to actual situations in your site and make DC power cables onsite.
DANGER
Do not install DC power cables while the power is on.
NOTICE
● Before connecting DC power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system are all in OFF position.
● Connect power cables to terminal blocks of the power modules at the rear of
the chassis.
CAUTION
Use the JG2 90° bent terminals delivered with the device. To avoid short circuits
and incorrect cable connections, customers are not advised to make JG2 90° bent
terminals.
NOTE
● In DC scenarios, when both power sources A and B are connected to power supplies, the
circuit with a higher voltage provides a larger current if the voltages of the two power
sources are different.
● For the X8 device, to facilitate cable connections, connect terminal blocks on the upper
row and lower row in sequence. Before removing power cables, loosen terminal blocks
on the lower row and upper row in sequence.
● Bundle DC power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not
crossed or twisted.
● The procedures and methods for connecting DC power cables of all the NetEngine 8000
modular router models are the same. The following figure shows the DC power cable
connection for the X8 device.

Tools
● Diagonal pliers
● Cable ties
Procedure
Step 2 Measure the distance that the power cables will go through, cut the DC power
cables into an appropriate length accordingly, and make power cables.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to both ends of each DC power cable.
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the plastic cover of the terminal
block unit, and then open the cover. See callout 1 in Figure 4-173.
Step 5 Identify the positive (black/red) and negative (blue) power cables, and connect
them to the RTN (+) and (NEG-) terminals respectively. See callout 2 in Figure
4-173. Connect the other end to a DC power distribution box. Tighten screws with
a torque of 4.9 N m.
NOTE
Different DC power cables may be delivered in compliance with local regulations or user
requirements.
Ensure that terminal blocks of the PEM are connected to power cables and screws are
tightened.
Step 6 After connecting the DC power cables, close the plastic cover of the terminal block
unit and tighten the screw on the cover. See callout 3 in Figure 4-173. Tighten
screws with a torque of 0.54 N m.
Step 7 After connecting all the DC power cables, bundle them from bottom to top with
cable ties, at intervals of 250 mm. Fix the power cables on the rack and use
diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties.

Figure 4-173 Connecting DC power cables
----End
4.9.6 Connecting AC Power Cables
Context
AC power cables can be connected directly to an EoR or to a PDU. Select AC
power cables based on the types of power sockets used in your equipment room.
Huawei offers PDU power cables and country-specific power cables to suit types
of power sockets.

NOTE
● The AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC chassis requires Huawei-customized high-voltage

DC connectors. Only AC&240 V/380 V high-voltage DC cables delivered by Huawei can
be used.
● In AC scenarios, if both power sources A and B are connected to power supplies, power
source A is used by default. If power source A is faulty, power source B is used.
● If you use AC power cables delivered from Huawei, ensure that an AC power source is
available within 2500 mm (cable distance) away from the device.
● Bundle AC power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not
crossed or twisted.
● The procedures and methods for connecting AC power cables of all the NetEngine 8000
modular router models are the same. The following figure shows the AC power cable
connection for the X8 device.
DANGER
Do not install AC power cables while the power is on.
NOTICE
● Before connecting AC power cables, make sure that the power switches of the
external power supply system are all in OFF position.
● The connector types and maximum input current of AC power cables used on
a device must meet requirements of the device. Use the power cables
delivered with the device.
redundancy. Do not connect all the AC power cables of a device to the PDUs
controlled by the same circuit breaker.
● UK-specific cables are not recommended for cabinets that house AC and high-
voltage DC chassis. This is because the through-current capability of the UK-
specific cables is just 13 A, failing to meet the 16-A requirement of 3000 W
AC power modules.
● Only horizontal PDUs are applicable to cabinets that house AC and high-
voltage DC chassis. If vertical PDUs are installed on such cabinets, fan
modules will fail to be installed or removed.
Tools
● Diagonal pliers

● Cable ties
Procedure
Step 2 Attach temporary labels to both ends of each AC power cable.
Step 3 Connecting AC power cable.
● Direct connection to an EoR: Connect the HVDC straight female connector of
the AC power cable to the power socket on the PEM corresponding to the
power module, and directly connect the OT terminal of the AC power cable to
the EoR.
● Connection to a PDU: Connect the HVDC straight female connector of the AC
power cable to the power socket on the PEM corresponding to the power
module, and connect the HVDC straight male connector of the AC power
cable to the PDU.
Step 4 After connecting all the AC power cables, bundle them from bottom to top with
cable ties, at intervals of 250 mm. Fix the power cables on the rack and use
diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties.

Figure 4-174 Connecting AC power cables

Figure 4-175 Connecting AC PDU power cables
----End
4.9.7 Connecting Signal Cables
Context
Signal cables used on the NetEngine 8000 modular router series devices include
door status monitoring cables, network cables, and optical fibers.
NOTICE
Before connecting signal cables, take ESD protection measures, for example, wear
ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
NOTE
● To connect cables in a cabinet or rack more conveniently, you can remove the side
panels of the cabinet or rack before connecting cables.
● Keep power cables and ground cables more than 30 mm away from signal cables.
Connecting Door Status Monitoring Cables

NOTE
The door status monitoring cable has been pre-installed in the cabinet. You can directly
connect the cable to the ALM IN interface on the MPU.
Connecting Ethernet Cables
NOTICE
Before connecting Ethernet cables, use an Ethernet cable tester to test cable
connectivity.
Connecting Optical Fibers
CAUTION
Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules or
optical fibers without eye protection.

NOTICE
● Cover idle optical ports and optical modules with dust plugs and cover idle
optical fibers with dust caps.
● Before deploying optical fibers, test optical fiber connectivity.
● Optical fibers routed into a cabinet must be protected by a corrugated pipe.
The bend radius of an optical fiber must be at least 20 times larger than its
diameter. Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 40
mm.
● Bundle optical fibers with binding tapes using the appropriate force. Ensure
that the optical fibers in a bundle can be moved easily.
● Fiber connectors must be tidy and clean to ensure normal communication. If a
fiber connector is contaminated, clean it using a piece of fiber cleaning fabric.
Tools
● Corrugated pipe
● Diagonal pliers
● Cable ties
● Fiber binding tape
● Marker
● Signal cable labels
● (Optional) Tweezers
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling
routes.
Step 2 Select signal cables of appropriate quantity and lengths according to the number
of ports and measured cabling distances.
NOTE
Select optical fibers of appropriate modes, quantity, and lengths according to the optical
module types, number of ports to be connected, and measured cabling distances.
Step 3 Attach temporary labels to both ends of each signal cable and write numbers on
the labels to identify the cables.
● For details on how to number Ethernet cables, see engineering labels for
Ethernet cables.
● For details on how to number optical fibers, see engineering labels for
Ethernet cables.

Step 5 Route signal cables. Unroll the signal cables and arrange them into a bundle.
Route the bundle of signal cables to the cabinet/rack along the cable tray, and
lead the power cables into the cabinet/rack from both sides.
Step 6 Connect signal cables to ports of the device.
● Connect the door status monitoring cable to the ALM IN interface on the
MPU, as shown in Figure 4-176.
● To connect a pair of optical fibers, find the optical port matching the number
on the optical fibers, install an optical module matching the optical fibers on
the optical port, and then insert the fiber connector into the optical module. If
you hear a click when inserting the fiber connector, the optical fibers have
been securely seated in the optical module. See callout 1 in Figure 4-177.
After verifying that all optical fibers are correctly connected, go to Step 7.
To remove optical fibers from an optical module, gently push the fiber
connector, and then pull the fiber connector while pressing the locking clips.
Do not directly pull the fiber connector with force. See callout 2 in Figure
4-177.

Figure 4-176 Connecting door status monitoring cables and network cables

Figure 4-177 Connecting optical fibers
NOTE
If many signal cables are connected to a device, use the tweezers delivered with the device
to remove signal cables.
Step 7 Bundle signal cables. Arrange the signal cables and put them through the cable
management frames of the corresponding slots orderly. Use cable ties to bundle
the signal cables at an interval of 200 mm to 300 mm. Fix the bundled signal
cables on the cabinet/rack and cut redundant cable ties with a pair of diagonal
pliers.
Step 8 Replace all the temporary labels with formal labels on the signal cables.
----End

4.10 Post-Installation Check
CAUTION
Before starting the post-installation check, make sure that the power switches of
the external power supply system are in OFF position.
After completing installation of a device, check the items listed in the following
table. If any item fails the check, check for the reason, reinstall the related
component, and check again. Ensure that all the items pass the check.
Check cabinets according to Table 4-32.
Table 4-32 Cabinet checklist
No. Item Method
1 The cabinet installation location complies Observe

with the engineering design document.
2 Components are correctly installed in a Observe

cabinet. No component is loose or damaged.
3 All the screws are correctly fixed. The chassis Observe

bottom is completely attached to the guide
rails or tray.
4 The vertical deviation of a cabinet is less Measure

than 3 mm. You can use a plumb bob to
measure the vertical deviation.
5 The cabinets on the sides of the main path Measure

are aligned in a line, with a deviation of less
than 5 mm.
6 The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row Observe

are on the same plane. The cabinets are
deployed close to each other.
7 The front door of a cabinet can be opened Observe

and closed easily.
8 The cable outlets on the top and bottom of Observe

a cabinet are properly sealed.
9 Metal components in a cabinet have good Observe

electrical connections with the rack. Screw
mounting holes, guide rails, and mounting
brackets are not covered with insulation
painting.

No. Item Method
10 Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are Observe

connected through busbar cables.
Check cables according to Table 4-33.
Table 4-33 Cable checklist

No. Item Method
1 Routes of signal cables comply with the Observe

engineering design document.
2 Signal cables are not damaged or broken Observe

and have no splices.
3 Signal cable connectors are clean, intact, and Observe

correctly connected. Wires of each signal
cable are securely clamped in the
connectors.
4 Signal cables do not cross each other and Observe

have sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal
cables can be crossed within 1 m outside the
cabinet.)
5 Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a Observe

protection pipe or trough and are not
squeezed by other cables or objects.
6 Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through Observe and

a corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe measure
should be no longer than 100 mm and be
bundled on the cabinet.
7 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times Observe and

larger than their diameters. Generally, the measure
bend radius of optical fibers should be no
less than 40 mm. The path of optical fibers is
not blocked by any components.
8 Optical fibers are bundled by binding tape Observe

with appropriate force.
9 Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy Observe

labels attached on both ends.
10 The routes of power cables and ground Observe

cables conform to the engineering design
document, facilitating future maintenance
and system expansion.

No. Item Method
11 All power cables and ground cables are Observe

complete copper wires without splices.
Coatings of power cables and ground cables
are intact.
12 Power cables and ground cables are Observe

connected properly.
13 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe

in compliance with the engineering design
document, meeting power distribution
requirements.
14 Power cables and ground cables are Observe

separated from signal cables.
15 Power cables and ground cables are routed Observe

straightly and properly bundled, with
sufficient slack at the bend part.
16 Power cables, ground cables, and power Observe

switches on power distribution boxes and
power distribution frames are identified by
correct, clear, and tidy labels.
17 The yellow-green ground cables are correctly Observe

connected. One end of a ground cable is
connected to the PGND ground bar in the
power distribution cabinet, and the other
end is connected to the ground point on a
cabinet. Screws at both ends of a ground
cable are securely fastened.
4.11 (Optional) Checking Optical Power

The following table describes comparison between the transmit optical power of
50 Gbps optical modules and damaged optical power threshold at the receive end:
Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description

Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End
50GBASE-FR 3 -4.1 5.2 The damaged

optical power
threshold is
greater than

Optical Maximum Minimum Damaged Description

Module Type Average Average Optical
Transmit Transmit Power
Optical Optical Threshold at
Power Power the Receive
End
50GBASE-LR 4.2 -4.5 5.2 the maximum

average
transmit
optical power,
posting low
self-loop risks.
50GBASE-ER 6.6 0.4 -2.4 The damaged

optical power
threshold is
9dBm lower
than the
maximum
average
transmit
optical power
and 2.8dBm
lower than
the minimum
average
transmit
optical power,
posing high
self-loop risks.
In this case,
an optical
attenuator
must be
configured for
self-loop.
For applications of the 50 Gbps optical module supporting a distance of 40 km:
1. To ensure that the optical module runs stably for a long time, adjust the
receive optical power of the optical module to a value lower than -4 dB.
According to the IEEE 802.3 standard, if the receive optical power of the
optical module exceeds -2.3 dB, the optical module may be permanently
damaged.
2. Before connecting to the optical module, use an optical power meter to
measure the receive optical power (P). If P is less than -4 dB, the optical
module can be directly connected. If P is greater than -4 dB, add an optical
attenuator at the receive end to ensure that the receive optical power is less
than -4 dB. Alternatively, add an optical attenuator (no less than 10 dB is
recommended) before the interconnection, and then adjust the optical

attenuator based on the site requirements to prevent the optical module from
being damaged.
3. If a loopback occurs on the pigtail of the optical module or the optical
module is connected for a short distance, an optical attenuator must be
added. It is recommended that the optical attenuator be no less than 10 dB.
4.12 Powering on Devices

This chapter describes to the procedures for powering on and powering off a
device.
4.12.1 Checking the Installation

After you complete the hardware installation, you need to check the installation of
the devices and cables.
Prerequisite
All hardware devices and cables must be installed.
Background Information
A check before power-on is performed to ensure that the hardware is installed
properly. This is mainly to check the appearance of the devices, and also the
cabinet, cables, plugs, sockets, labels, and environment.
4.12.1.1 Device Installation Checklist

This section provides a checklist for checking an installed device before power-on.
NOTICE
Before power-on, make sure that the switches of all power distribution units
(PDUs) and power distribution frames (PDFs) are in the "OFF" state.
Table 4-34 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed device.
Table 4-34 Checklist for the installed device

No. Check Item and Description Method
1 The cabinet is placed as required Check this according to the

in the design drawing. engineering design document.

2 The expansion bolts used to fix Check this according to the

the cabinet or holder to the following figure.
ground are fastened firmly. Flat
washers and spring washers are
used and spring washers are
placed on top of flat washers.
3 The installation holes on the Check this by measuring the

support and feet are fit for the megohm range of a multimeter.
expansion bolts. The support is The resistance of each insulating
insulated from the ground; the point must be greater than 5
floor holder is insulated from the megohms.
guide rails.
4 The cabinets in the same row are -

evenly aligned with each other.
Rows of cabinets are aligned
along the main aisle, with a
deviation of up to 5 mm (0.20
in.).
5 The accessories on the front and -

back doors of the cabinet are
present. A connecting plate is
installed if two cabinets are
attached to each other.

6 The front door of the cabinet can Check this by unlocking the door
be opened and closed smoothly. according to the following figure.
Check this by locking the door

according to the following figure.
7 The boards can be plugged and -

removed smoothly. Screws on the
board panels, if any, are fastened
properly. The steel wires on the
screws are intact.
8 The surfaces of the device are -

clean and tidy. No component of
the cabinet is deformed.
Otherwise, it will affect the
appearance of the entire device.
All labels are correct, clear, and
complete.
9 The cabinet is clean and there are -

no dust particles inside the
cabinet. There are no extra
bundling straps, cable ends, or
other foreign objects inside the
cabinet.

10 The electrostatic discharge (ESD)- Check this according to the

preventive wrist strap is inserted following figure.
into the ESD hole on the cabinet.
11 Blank filler panels are installed in -

all empty slots.
4.12.1.2 Cable Installation Checklist

This section provides a checklist for checking the installed cables.
Power Cables and Ground Cables

Table 4-35 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed power cables
and ground cables.
Table 4-35 Checklist for the installed power cables and ground cables
1 Each power cable or ground cable -

must be a single cable with a
copper wire inside it. The cables
must be connected reliably
according to the standards.
2 The power cables and ground -

cables of the devices are connected
reliably. For each grounding
terminal, the spring washer is
placed on top of the flat washer.

3 The lug of a power cable or a -

ground cable are welded or pressed
firmly.
4 The power cables and ground Check this according to the

cables outside the cabinet are following figure.
straight. They are bundled
separately from other types of
cables.
5 The extra ends of the power cables -

and ground cables are cut off
instead of being coiled.
6 The ground cable for the cabinet -

door is connected reliably and
firmly.
7 Each power cable or ground cable -

must be labeled according to the
standards. The labels are stuck on a
fixed position on the cables and
they face the same direction
(including the label on the power
distribution switch). It is
recommended that the labels be
stuck at 20 mm away from the
plugs.
8 The power cables and ground -

cables outside the cabinet are at
least 30 mm (1.18 in.) away from
the signal cables.
Cables Inside the Cabinet

Table 4-36 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed cables inside
the cabinet.

Table 4-36 Checklist for the installed cables inside the cabinet
1 The cables are connected properly -

and firmly.
2 The cable ties do not overlap. They -

are cut smoothly and evenly at
both ends without any burr or
sharp edge.
Signal Cables
Table 4-37 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed signal cables.
Table 4-37 Checklist for the installed signal cables

1 All the signal cables have passed -

the continuity test before they are
laid.
2 The signal cables are not laid over -

the heat-dissipation mesh of the
cabinet.
3 Adequate space is provided for the Check this according to the

cables at the turning points. The following figure.
cables cannot be compressed at the
turning points.
4 The cables are straight and smooth. -

The cables inside the cabinet are
not crossed and the cables outside
the cabinet are bundled.

5 Each signal cable is clearly labeled -

at both ends. The labels face the
same direction.
6 The screws on the cables, if any, -

are fastened firmly.
4.12.2 Powering on a Device
Turn on all the switches on the power module.
4.12.3 Checking After Powering on a Device
After powering on a device, you need to check:
● Whether you can hear that the fans are rotating and the air is exhausted from
the airway after the device is powered on.
● Whether the indicator of the power module is normal. In normal cases, the
green indicators PWR IN and PWR OUT are steady on, and the red indicator
ALM is always off.
● Whether the indicator of the fan module is normal. In normal cases, the green
indicator RUN flashes (frequency: 1 Hz), and red indicator ALM is always off.
● Whether the indicator of the board is normal. In normal cases, the indicator
RUN flashes, and the indicator ALM is always off.
4.12.4 Powering off a Device
Turn off all the switches on the power module.
4.13 Maintaining a Device
NOTICE
Unauthorized field maintenance on electronic components such as fuses in a

device is not allowed. The problematic component or device must be returned for
repair. Faulty fuses and other electronic components can only be replaced by
professionals authorized by Huawei.
4.13.1 Replacing a Power Module

Context
The power modules on the NetEngine 8000 modular router are hot swappable.
The procedures and methods for replacing power modules on all the NetEngine
8000 modular router models are similar. Any operation difference between
different models will be noted. The following illustrates how to replace a power
module on the X8 device.
CAUTION
● Do not install DC power modules and AC & high-voltage DC power modules on

the same device; otherwise, the device may be damaged.
● The power module can get very hot. Be careful when replacing it.
Tools
Procedure
Step 1 Before replacing a power module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the
power module is installed, find the power module in the chassis, and attach a
label to the panel of the power module.
Step 3 Remove the power module.
Slowly open the power module enclosure to a position at an angle of 95 degrees.
When you hear a clip sound, the power module enclosure is lifted into place. Use
one hand to hold the handle of the power module and slowly pull it out of the
slot while supporting the bottom of the power module with the other hand.
Figure 4-178 Removing a power module

Step 4 Install the new power module. For details, see 4.6.8 Installing Power Modules.
Step 5 Verify whether the new power module functions normally:

● Observe indicators on the power module panel. If the Input and Output
indicators are steady green and the Alarm indicator is off, the power module
is working normally. If the Alarm indicator is steady red, the power module
does not work normally.
● Run the display device command to check whether the new power module is
running properly. If the Alarm field is Normal, the power module is running
properly.
If the new power module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier
for technical support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the replacement is complete, tidy up all tools. If the replaced power module
is confirmed to be faulty, you need to fill in the Fault Tag, and mail the tag
together with the faulty power module back to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.13.2 Replacing a Fan Module
Context
Fan modules on the NetEngine 8000 modular router are hot swappable. The
methods for replacing fan modules on the NetEngine 8000 modular router are
similar. The following illustrates how to replace a fan module on the X8 device.
CAUTION
● To prevent a fan module from falling down, hold both handles while removing
it.
● Do not stand a fan module upright to avoid it falling over and causing damage
or injury.
● The fan module can get very hot. Be careful when replacing it.
● Only one fan module can be replaced at a time. Do not remove two or more
fan modules at the same time when the device is running.
● To ensure stable running of the device, replace the fan module within 10
minutes .
Tools

Procedure
Step 1 Before replacing a fan module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the fan
module is installed, find the fan module in the chassis, and attach a label to the
panel of the fan module.
Step 3 Remove the fan module to be replaced from the device.
1. Loosen the captive screws on the fan module. See callout 1 in Figure 4-179.
2. Press the release buttons on the right side of the two fan module handles. See
callout 2 in Figure 4-179.
3. Turn the handles out and rotate them to the left until they click into place.
4. Hold the handles with your hands, and evenly pull the fan module slowly
along the guide rails. See callout 4 in Figure 4-179.
Figure 4-179 Removing a fan module
Step 4 Install the new fan module. For details, see 4.6.7 Installing Fan Modules.
Step 5 After the new fan module is installed, fans run at a low speed for about 10
seconds. The fan module then works in intelligent fan speed adjustment mode.

Use either of following methods to check whether the new fan module works
normally:
● Observe the indicator on the fan module. If the indicator blinks green slowly,
the fan module is working normally. If the indicator is steady red, the fan
module does not work normally.
● Run the display device fan command to check the running status of the fan
module.
If the fan module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for
technical support.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the replacement is complete, tidy up all tools. If you confirm that the
replaced fan module is faulty, fill in the Fault Tag, and mail the tag together with
the faulty power module back to Huawei for timely maintenance.
4.13.3 Replacing an Optical Module

Context
CAUTION
Laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical modules or
optical fibers without eye protection.
NOTICE
● Huawei-certified optical modules are strongly recommended because non-

Huawei-certified optical modules cannot ensure transmission reliability and
may affect service stability.
● Optical modules are hot swappable, and you do not need to power off the
device when replacing optical modules.
● Optical modules are electrostatic-sensitive components. Therefore, you must
take ESD protection measures when replacing optical modules.
● Do not insert an optical module reversely. If an optical module cannot be
completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port. Instead,
turn the optical module over and try again.
● Only external optical modules can be replaced and pluggable. Built-in optical
modules cannot be replaced.
Follow these guidelines when replacing an optical module:

● Replacing an optical module interrupts service transmission. Therefore,
replace an optical module only when you confirm that the optical module has
failed.

● Ensure that the new optical module has the same center wavelength and
complies with the same standards as the old one.
● When replacing an optical module, ensure that no optical fiber is connected
to the optical module. Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid
damages to fiber connectors. Exercise caution when installing or removing
optical fibers to prevent damage to the optical module.
● After removing the optical fibers from an optical module, cover the fiber
connectors with dust caps. Place the optical fibers in an appropriate place to
prevent them from swinging.
● Use assistant tools like the tweezers delivered with the device to remove an
optical module in a confined space.
● After removing a copper module, wait at least 2 seconds before inserting a
new one. Otherwise, the port may fail to go Up. If the port cannot go Up,
remove the copper module and install it 2 seconds later.
● If the LINK indicator on an optical port with two optical fibers is off, swap the
two optical fibers.
● During the replacement, keep the bores of the optical module and fiber
connectors clean, protecting them from dust and other contamination
sources. Install dust plugs on idle optical ports.

● Spare optical module
● Dust caps
● (Optional) Optical port dust plug
● (Optional) Tweezers
Procedure
Step 2 Before replacing an optical module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the
optical module is installed, find the optical module in the chassis, and attach a
label to the optical module.
Step 3 Record optical fiber locations on the optical module to be replaced and check
whether the labels on the optical fibers are correct and clear. If any label is
unclear, make and attach a new label to the optical fiber to ensure correct
connection.
Step 4 Remove the optical fibers from the optical module and cover them with dust caps.
Step 5 Rotate the handle of the optical module down, gently push the optical module,
and then pull out the optical module by the handle, as shown in Figure 4-180.
When installing a CFP optical module, hold the screw rods with both hands, and
slightly pull out the optical module from the optical port.

Figure 4-180 Replacing an optical module
Step 6 Perform the following steps to insert the spare optical module into the optical
port.
1. Take out the new optical module from the packing box and check whether
any part of the module is damaged or missing. Ensure that the type of the
new optical module is the same as that of the optical module to be replaced.
2. Insert the new optical module fully into the optical port. When the optical
module clicks, it has been seated correctly in the optical port. If the new
optical module is a CFP one, insert the new optical module into the optical
port of the card, push the module panel horizontally into the connector using
even force with both thumbs. After the module is inserted, push the module
slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop position. Pull out the two screw
rods slightly to ensure that they can properly function. Pre-tighten one of the
screw rods. Then, tighten the other screw rod. After that, tighten the first
screw rod. To prevent the optical module from getting loosened due to
vibration or collision, you are advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the
screw rods.
Step 7 Connect the optical fibers to the marked positions.
Step 8 Check the LINK indicator on the corresponding optical port. If the LINK indicator is
steady green, the new optical module is working normally.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the replacement is complete, tidy up all tools. If the replaced optical module
is confirmed to be faulty, you need to fill in the Fault Tag, and mail the tag
together with the faulty optical module back to Huawei for timely maintenance.
Configuration requirements for copper modules, high-speed cables, and optical
modules differ depending on their models. When a module is replaced by a
module of a different type, configuration on the corresponding port may be
changed. In this case, check the port configuration after the replacement.
If the new optical module fails to function properly, connect the local office of
Huawei for timely technical support.
4.13.4 Replacing an LPU

Context
All the LPUs on the NetEngine 8000 modular router are hot swappable. The
procedures and methods for replacing an LPU are the same on the NetEngine
8000 modular router. The following illustrates how to replace an LPU on the X8
device.
NOTICE
● During the replacement, pull or push the LPU slowly and horizontally to
prevent it from colliding with adjacent cards. Collisions may cause damages to
the adjacent running cards.
● Do not touch the electronic components on the LPU during the replacement.
● After an LPU is powered off, if the remaining power of the entire device meets
requirements, the LPU will be automatically powered on after the device is
restarted. The LPU power-off scenarios include:
● The power off command is run to manually power off the LPU.
● The device does not support the LPU.
● The current version does not support the LPU.

CAUTION
● Use the prepared materials and tools to replace the target LPU as soon as
possible.
● Only one LPU can be replaced at a time. If multiple LPUs need to be replaced,
replace the next LPU only after the previous LPU has been replaced. Otherwise,
the LPU in the adjacent slot will experience an abnormal temperature increase
or even is powered off due to over-temperature.
● If a new LPU cannot be installed in time, install a filler panel in the
corresponding slot after removing the original LPU. Otherwise, the LPU in the
adjacent slot will experience an abnormal temperature increase or even is
powered off due to over-temperature.
● When removing or inserting an LPU using ejector levers, remove the
corresponding optical modules. Otherwise, the ejector levers will squeeze the
optical modules.
Figure 4-181 An ejector lever is squeezing optical modules
Tools
Procedure
Step 1 Before replacing an LPU, determine in which cabinet and chassis the LPU is
installed, find the LPU in the chassis, and attach a label to the LPU panel.
Step 3 Select an LPU of the same model for replacement. If the new LPU is of a different
model, ensure that it can replace the old one. Inspect the new LPU to ensure that
no component is damaged or detached, and record the bar code on the new LPU.
Step 4 Unplug cables from the LPU to be replaced and attach labels to the cables to
identify the ports to which they are connected.
Step 5 Remove the LPU to be replaced from the chassis.

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on both ends of the
LPU panel. See callout 1 in Figure 4-182.

2. Take out the ejector levers delivered with the LPU, press the latches on the
ejector levers, and then connect the ejector levers to the connectors on both
sides of the LPU. Rotate the ejector levers of the LPU outward to release the
LPU from the backplane. See callout 2, callout 3, and callout 4 in Figure
4-182.
3. Grasp the ejector levers and slowly pull out the LPU along the guide rails. See
in Figure 4-182. Place the LPU in an ESD bag or on an ESD pad.
Figure 4-182 Removing an LPU
CAUTION
Before removing an LPU, remove the optical modules close to the card edges. This
prevents these optical modules from being damaged when we rotate the ejector
levers on the card.
Step 6 Install the new LPU. For details, see 4.6.9 Installing MPUs and LPUs.
Step 7 Observe the RUN/ALM indicator on the new LPU.
NOTE
It takes some time for the new LPU to start and operate normally.
● If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the new LPU is loading the
software or resetting.
● If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the new LPU is running
normally.

Step 8 Connect cables to the LPU according to labels on the cables. For details, see 4.9.7
Connecting Signal Cables.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
replaced LPU is faulty, fill in the Fault Tag and send the faulty LPU and the fault
tag to Huawei.
4.13.5 Replacing the Only MPU on a Device (Services Have

Been Interrupted)
Context
If a device has only one MPU, the MPU replacement procedure varies depending
on whether the MPU has completely or partially failed:
● If the MPU has completely failed, services on the device are interrupted and
the command line interface (CLI) cannot be used.
● If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run
commands on the CLI.
NOTICE
● If the MPU has stopped working, no commands can be executed on the CLI.
Perform the following operations after the replacement:
● Check the software version of the new MPU. Ensure that the software
version of the new MPU is the same as that of the old MPU or is the
required version.
● (Optional) If the configuration file cannot be exported from the old MPU
or the exported configuration file is not the latest, reconfigure services on
the new MPU.
● During the replacement, pull or push the MPU slowly and horizontally to
● Do not touch the electronic components on the MPU during the replacement.
Tools
Procedure

Step 2 Enter the BIOS menu on the MPU from the serial port and copy the configuration
file and license file from the MPU.
● If the configuration file and license file are copied successfully, perform steps
3 to 9.
● If the configuration file and license file fail to be copied, perform steps 3 to 8.
Step 3 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no component on
the new MPU is damaged or detached.
Step 4 Unplug cables from the MPU to be replaced and attach labels to the cables to
Step 5 Remove the MPU from the chassis and install the new one. For details on how to
remove and install a card, see 4.13.4 Replacing an LPU.
NOTE
Ensure that the new MPU uses the same software version as the old one.
Step 6 Observe the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator on the new MPU.

NOTE
After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start
and registration process takes a few minutes.
● If the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator blinks green fast, the new MPU is
loading the software or resetting.
● If the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator blinks green slowly, the new MPU is
running normally.
Step 7 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU according to labels on the
cables.
Step 8 After the replacement is complete, perform the following operations to verify
whether the replacement is successful:
● Run the display device command to check whether the new MPU is running
properly. If the Alarm field is Normal, the MPU is running properly.
● Run the display startup command to view the system software name and
configuration file name for next startup. The system software name and
configuration file name on the new MPU must be the same as those on the
old MPU.
● Run the display current-configuration command to check the current
parameter settings. The parameter settings must be the same as those before
the replacement.
NOTE
The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the
software using the CLI.
Step 9 (Optional) If the configuration file has been copied from the old MPU, upload the
configuration file to the new MPU.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
replaced MPU is faulty, fill in the Fault Tag and send the faulty MPU and the fault
tag to Huawei.
4.13.6 Replacing the Only MPU on a Device (Services Are Not

Interrupted)
Context
If a device has only one MPU, the MPU replacement procedure varies depending
on whether the MPU has completely or partially failed:
● If the MPU has completely failed, services on the device are interrupted and
the CLI cannot be used.
● If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run
commands on the CLI.
NOTICE
● After the new MPU is installed and powered on, it automatically synchronizes
the system software from the active MPU.
● After replacing the MPU, ensure that the new MPU uses the same software
version as the old one.
Tools
Procedure
Step 3 Install the new MPU into the standby MPU slot. For details on how to install a
card, see 4.6.9 Installing MPUs and LPUs.
Step 4 Observe the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator on the new MPU.

NOTE
After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start
running normally.
Step 5 Run the dir command to check whether the configuration file names and sizes on
the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU.
● If the configuration file names and sizes on the two MPUs are the same, the
file synchronization is successful. Go to step 7.
● If the configuration file names or sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to
step 6 to manually synchronize the configuration file to the new MPU.
Step 6 (Optional) Save data.
1. Log in to the device from a client.
2. Copy the configuration file to the standby MPU using either of the following
methods:
– Method 1:
<HUAWEI> copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg
NOTE
XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.

– Method 2:
Run the save command to save the configuration file to the standby
MPU.
3. Copy the license file to the standby MPU.
<HUAWEI> copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat
NOTE
XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.
Step 7 Run the display switchover state command to check the active/standby
switchover status. When the Switchover State field displays Ready, go to the next
step.
Step 8 Run the slave switchover command in the system view to perform an active/
standby switchover.
Step 10 Remove the MPU from the chassis. For details on how to remove a card, see
4.13.4 Replacing an LPU.
cables.
Step 12 Perform the following operations to verify whether the replacement is successful:

old MPU.
the replacement.
NOTE
----End
Follow-up Procedure
tag to Huawei.
4.13.7 Replacing One of MPUs on a Device
Context
If a device has double MPUs, the MPU replacement procedure varies depending on
whether the MPU to be replaced is the active or standby one. If it is the active
MPU, perform an active/standby switchover first. If it is the standby MPU, replace
it directly.
NOTICE
● The system software has been loaded to the flash storage of a new MPU before
the delivery.
● After replacing the MPU, ensure that the new MPU uses the same software
version as the old one.
Tools
Procedure

Step 3 If the MPU to be replaced is the active MPU, perform an active/standby
switchover. Run the display switchover state command to check the active/
standby switchover status. When the Switchover State field displays Ready, go to
the next step. If it is the standby MPU, go to step 5.
Step 4 Run the slave switchover command in the system view to perform an active/
standby switchover.
Step 6 Remove the MPU from the chassis and install the new one. For details on how to
replace a card, see 4.13.4 Replacing an LPU.
Step 7 After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically.
The start and registration process takes less than 10 minutes. Observe the
RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator on the new MPU.
loading the software, resetting or performing batch backup. Do not insert or
remove the active MPU in this case..
running normally.
Step 8 Run the dir command to check whether the configuration file names and sizes on
the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU.
● If the configuration file names and sizes are the same, the file synchronization
is successful. Go to step 10.
● If the configuration file names or sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to
step 9 to manually synchronize the configuration file to the new MPU.
Step 9 (Optional) Save data.
1. Log in to the device from a client.
2. Copy the configuration file to the standby MPU using either of the following
methods:
– Method 1:
<HUAWEI> copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg
NOTE
XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.

– Method 2:
Run the save command to save the configuration file to the standby
MPU.
3. Copy the license file to the standby MPU.
<HUAWEI> copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat
NOTE
XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.
cables.

whether the replacement is successful:
old MPU.
the replacement.
NOTE
----End
Follow-up Procedure
tag to Huawei.
4.13.8 Replacing an SFU
Context
All the SFUs on the NetEngine 8000 modular router are hot swappable. The
procedures and methods for replacing an SFU on the NetEngine 8000 modular
router are the same. The following illustrates how to replace an SFU on the X8
device.
CAUTION
Before replacing an SFU, remove the fan module corresponding to the SFU. Note:
● Prepare the materials and tools for replacing the SFU in advance, and ensure
that the SFU is replaced and the fan module is inserted back within 10
minutes.
● Before installing a new SFU, remove latches from the back-flow preventer on
the SFU. For details, see "Installing SFUs".
● Only one fan module can be removed at a time.
● If two or three SFUs matching one fan module need to be replaced, remove
the fan module, replace the SFUs one by one, and install the fan module
back. Ensure only one SFU is removed at a time; otherwise, the corresponding
LPU will be powered off due to overheating.

NOTICE
● During the replacement, pull or push the SFU slowly and horizontally to
● Do not touch the electronic components on the SFU during the replacement.
● To ensure that services are not affected when a running SFU is replaced, press
and hold down the OFL button on the SFU for at least 6s before removing the
SFU. Remove the SFU when the SFU is isolated from the system (its OFL
indicator is steady yellow). You can directly replace an unregistered SFU
without having to press and hold down the OFL button. Figure 4-183 shows
the OFL button and indicator.
● After an SFU is powered off, if the remaining power of the entire device meets
requirements, the SFU will be automatically powered on after the device is
restarted. The SFU power-off scenarios include:
● The power off command is run to manually power off the SFU.
● The device does not support the SFU.
● The current version does not support the SFU.
Figure 4-183 RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator and button on an SFU
Tools
Procedure
Step 1 Before removing the SFU to be replaced, you should first determine the location of
the SFU, for example, the cabinet and chassis where the SFU resides and the
location of the fan module corresponding to the SFU.
Step 3 Take out a new SFU from the package, and check that no component on the SFU
is damaged or detached.

Step 4 Then, remove the fan module corresponding to the SFU to be replaced from the
chassis. Locate the SFU to be replaced and attach a label on the front panel of the
SFU to prevent misoperations. See callout 1 in Figure 4-184.
Step 5 Take out SFU ejector levers.
Step 6 Remove the SFU to be replaced from the chassis.

1. Power off the SFU to be replaced.
You can power off an SFU using either of the following methods:
– Press and hold down the OFL button on the panel of the SFU for at least
6 seconds until the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator is steady yellow,
indicating that the SFU is powered off.
– Run the power off slot slotid command in the user view.
2. Install the ejector levers on the SFU to be replaced, and press and hold the
square buttons on the ejector levers to rotate them outward and release the
SFU from the chassis. See callouts 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 4-184.
3. Grasp the ejector levers with both hands and pull the SFU out slowly along
the guide rails. When most part of the SFU is out of the chassis, use one hand
to support the bottom of the SFU and the other hand to grasp its panel, while
pulling the SFU out of the chassis. Place the SFU in an ESD bag or on an ESD
pad.
4. Press and hold the round button on the SFU to remove the ejector levers.
NOTICE
Do not use a tool other than the ejector levers to install or remove an SFU.
Figure 4-184 Removing an SFU
Step 7 Install the new SFU. For details, see 4.6.6 Installing SFUs.
Step 8 Insert a fan module.

whether the replacement is successful.
NOTE
After the new SFU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start
● Observe the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator on the new SFU.
– If the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator blinks green fast, the new SFU is
– If the RUN(G)/ALM(R)/OFL(Y) indicator blinks green slowly, the new SFU
is running normally.
● Run the display device board command to check whether the new SFU is
running properly. If the Alarm field is Normal, the SFU is running properly.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
replaced SFU is faulty, fill in the Fault Tag and send the faulty SFU and the fault
tag to Huawei.
4.13.9 Replacing and Clearing Air Filters
Context
The environment of an equipment room must conform to relevant national or
industrial standards. Keep the room clean, tidy, dustproof, and moistureproof.
Prevent rodents and insects from entering the room. Perform routine maintenance
to maintain the environment of the equipment room.
● Clean the equipment room periodically. You can clean the equipment room
during daily or monthly maintenance.
● Periodically clean the dust-proof sponges of devices. Clean or replace the air
filters every three to six months. If the dust is heavy, clean or replace the air
filters at least once every three months.
NOTICE
● To prevent dust from falling off, remove the air filters slowly.
● Clean the air filters gently. Otherwise, the dust-proof sponges may be pulled,
causing unrecoverable stretching and deformation.
● If the air filters cannot be washed or cannot be dry in cloudy days, take the air
filters out of the equipment room and pat them gently to reduce dust.
● The air filters may be deformed after being cleaned for multiple times. You are
advised to replace them at least once a year.

Tools
Procedure
Step 2 Remove the air filter to be replaced from the inner side of the cabinet door or
chassis door (optional).
Step 3 Wash the air filter with clean water. Add detergent if necessary. After cleaning,
place it in a well-ventilated place for drying.
Step 4 Align the cleaned air filter with the cabinet door or chassis door (optional). Gently
press the contact positions between the air filter and sponge fixing strips to secure
the air filter. Check whether the air filter covers holes on the door plate.
Figure 4-185 Replacing an air filter
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the replacement is complete, tidy up all tools. Handle the replaced air filter
in compliance with local safety regulations.

4.14 Appendix A Indicators

NOTE
This section only provides the status and meanings of some indicators for quick query. To
check detailed status and meanings of indicators on modules, see the NetEngine 8000
modular router Series Switches Hardware Description.
Power Module Indicators

Table 4-38 describes the status and meanings of indicators on a 3000 W AC
power module.
Table 4-38 Description of indicators on a 3000 W AC power module

Silkscre Name Color Description
en
Input Power Green ● Steady on: The input power of the

indicator power module is in the normal range.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The input
voltage of the power module is out of
the normal range.
● Off: The power module receives no
input power.
Output Alarm Green ● Steady on: The output power of the

● Off: The power module has no output
power or the output power is
abnormal.
Alarm Fault Red ● Off: The power module is working

indicator properly.
● Steady on: The power module has
failed. Possible causes include internal
short circuit, fan failure, output
overvoltage, overtemperature-
triggered shutdown, system loading
failure, communication failure, and
severely uneven current.
Table 4-39 describes the status and meanings of indicators on a 2200 W DC

power module.

Table 4-39 Description of indicators on a 2200 W DC power module

en
INPUT Power Green ● Steady on: The input power of the

● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The input
voltage of the power module is out of
the normal range.
● Off: The power module receives no
input power.
OUTPU Alarm Green ● Steady on: The output power of the

T indicator power module is in the normal range.
● Off: The power module has no output
power or the output power is
abnormal.
AlARM Fault Red ● Off: The power module is working

indicator properly.
● Steady on: The power module has
failed. Possible causes include internal
short circuit, fan failure, output
overvoltage, overtemperature-
triggered shutdown, communication
failure, and severely uneven current.
MPU Indicators
Table 4-40 describes the status and meanings of indicators on MPUs.
Table 4-40 Description of indicators on MPUs

Silkscr Name Color Description
een
RUN(G Running Green ● Steady on: The card has been

)/ status powered on but the system software
ALM(R) indicator is not running.
/OFL(Y) NOTE ● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The card is
This indicator running properly.
only shows the
running status ● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The card is
of the local loading the system software or is
card. resetting.

Silkscr Name Color Description

een
Red ● Steady on: A fault that affects

services has occurred and it cannot
be rectified automatically (critical
alarm about hardware), or the card
has generated an alarm because the
memory size is not equal to the
standard specification.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The system
power is insufficient.
Yellow Steady on: The card is in power-off

state. (For example, the card has been
forcibly powered off using the power
off command or is about to start.)
ACT Active/ Green ● Steady on: The card is the active

Standby status MPU.
indicator ● Off: The card is the standby MPU.
M/S CSS status Green ● Steady on: The Cluster Switch

indicator System (CSS) function is enabled,
and the card is the master MPU in
the CSS.
● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The CSS
function is enabled, and the card is
not the master MPU in the CSS.
● Off: The CSS function is disabled.
LPU Indicators
Table 4-41 describes the status and meanings of indicators on LPUs.
Table 4-41 Description of indicators on LPUs

en
RUN/AL Running Green ● Steady on: The card has been

M status powered on but the system software
indicator is not running.
● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The card is
running properly.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The card is
loading the system software or is
resetting.


en
Red Steady on: The card has a fault that

affects services and cannot be rectified
automatically (critical alarm about
hardware).

SFU Indicators
Table 4-42 describes the status and meanings of indicators on SFUs.
Table 4-42 Description of indicators on SFUs

en
RUN(G) Running Green ● Steady on: The card has been

ALM(R) status powered on but the system software
indicator is not running.
OFL(Y)
● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The card is
running properly.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The card is
loading the system software or is
resetting.
Red Steady on: The card has a fault that

affects services and cannot be rectified
automatically (critical alarm about
hardware).

Fan Module Indicators

Table 4-43 describes the status and meanings of indicators on fan modules.

Table 4-43 Description of indicators on fan modules

en
Fan status Green ● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The fan module

indicator has not established communication
with the MPU or communication loss
occurs.
● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The fan module
is working properly and
communicating with the MPU
normally.
Red Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): An alarm is

generated, and the fan module is faulty.
Yellow Steady on: The fan module is abnormal.

The possible cause is that the software of
the fan monitoring unit (FMU) on the fan
module is abnormal or the fan module
fails.
SFU SFU status Green Steady on: The SFU is working properly.
indicator
Red Steady on: A fault that affects services has
occurred. The fault cannot be rectified
automatically and requires manual
intervention.
Yellow Steady on: The fan module software is not

loaded, or the communication fails, and
the SFU indicator cannot be properly
displayed.
4.15 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and

Installation
4.15.1 Cable Assembly Precautions
Checking the Appearance of Cables

● If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing,
or other defects, do not use the cable.
● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.
● If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted,
discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If
other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors

● Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust, or scuffing.
● Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven
plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.
● Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there
are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.
Precautions for Assembly

● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods
given here during assembly.
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the
coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be
larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets
that do not need to be stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure
that the cross sections are arranged neatly.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate
exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that
the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.
NOTE
The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The
figures in this document are for your reference only.
4.15.2 Assembling Power Cables
4.15.2.1 Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable

Context
NOTICE
Do not bend OT terminals to 90 degrees onsite.
Figure 4-186 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.
Figure 4-186 Components of an OT terminal and a power cable
A. Heat-shrinkable B. Bare crimping C. Insulation D. Conductor

tubing terminal
Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of
insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in Figure
4-187. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 4-44.
Figure 4-187 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)

NOTICE
● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is 1
mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.
Table 4-44 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm

Sectional (in.)) Area of Conductor (in.))
Area of (mm2 (in.2))
Conductor
(mm2 (in.2))
1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)
1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)
2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)
4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)
6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)
NOTE
If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the value
of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.
Step 2 Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in
Figure 4-188.
Figure 4-188 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal

Step 3 Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT
terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure
4-188.
NOTICE
After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor, or L2 in Figure 4-188, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).
Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 4-189.
NOTE
The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.
Figure 4-189 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (OT terminal)
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure
4-190.
Figure 4-190 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)

NOTICE
Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the shrink
tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the insulation
coating.
----End
4.15.2.2 Assembling the JG2 Terminal and Power Cable
Context
Figure 4-191 shows the components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable.
Figure 4-191 Components of a JG2 terminal and a power cable
A. Heat shrink tubing B. JG2 terminal C. Insulation layer of a D. Conductor of a

power cable power cable
Procedure
Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L, as
shown in Figure 4-192. The recommended values of L are listed in Table 4-45 1.
NOTICE
● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the
value of L as required.

Figure 4-192 Stripping a power cable (JG2 terminal)
Table 4-45 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L
Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm (in.))

(mm2 (in.2))
25 (0.039) 21~23 (0.83~0.91)
35 (0.054) 30~32 (1.18~1.26)
Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure
4-193.
Figure 4-193 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal
Step 3 Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the
bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power cable,

Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 4-194.
Figure 4-194 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (JG2 terminal)
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure
4-195.
Figure 4-195 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG2 terminal)
----End
4.15.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables
4.15.3.1 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable

Context
Figure 4-196 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded
Ethernet cable.
Figure 4-196 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable
A. Jacket of connector B. Metal shell of C. Wire holder of D. Plug of connector

connector connector
E. Jacket of Ethernet F. Shield layer of G. Twisted-pair wires -

cable Ethernet cable
Procedure
Step 1 Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 4-197.
Figure 4-197 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable
Step 2 Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine
inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket, as

NOTICE
● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer of
the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.
Figure 4-198 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 3 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by the
metal shell, as shown in Figure 4-199.
Figure 4-199 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable
Step 4 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered
completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield
layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-pair
cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 4-200.

Figure 4-200 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 4-201 and Figure 4-202. Ensure that the colored wires are in the correct
location in the cable.
Figure 4-201 Leading wires through the wire holder
Figure 4-202 Cable locations in a wire holder

Step 6 Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 4-203. The
connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 4-204 and listed
in Table 4-46.
Figure 4-203 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder
Figure 4-204 Connections between wires and pins
Table 4-46 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as
an example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color
1 White-Orange

2 Orange
3 White-Green
4 Blue
5 White-Blue
6 Green
7 White-Brown
8 Brown
Step 7 Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 4-205.
Figure 4-205 Cutting off surplus cables
Step 8 Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°, as
NOTE
Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.
Figure 4-206 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder

Step 9 Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the
connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
4-207.
Figure 4-207 Crimping the connector
Step 10 Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This
completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 4-208.
Figure 4-208 Pushing the metal shell
Step 11 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 10.
----End
4.15.3.2 Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable
Context
Figure 4-209 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

Figure 4-209 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable
A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires
Procedure
Step 1 Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure 4-210.
NOTICE
When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-
pair cable.
Figure 4-210 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 2 Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure 4-211.
The connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table 4-47.

Figure 4-211 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))
Table 4-47 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as
an example)
1 White-Orange
2 Orange
3 White-Green
4 Blue
5 White-Blue
6 Green
7 White-Brown
8 Brown
Step 3 Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 4-212.
NOTE
When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the cable
is completely seated in the plug.
Figure 4-212 Crimping the connector

Step 4 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 3.
----End
4.15.3.3 Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips
Context
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors,
the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.
● The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than
± 5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector,
with an offset of less than ± 10°.
● To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
● The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
separators must remain intact and be aligned.
● The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends
of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance
between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check whether the
contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02 ± 0.13 mm (0.237
± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can compare the connector with
a standard connector. Figure 4-213 shows an unqualified piece, and Figure 4-214
shows a qualified piece.
NOTE
All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.
Figure 4-213 Contact strips of different heights

Figure 4-214 Contact strips of the same height
Step 2 Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contact strips. Figure 4-215 shows an unqualified piece.
Figure 4-215 Unparallel contact strips of different heights
Step 3 Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 4-216 shows an
unqualified piece.
Figure 4-216 Dirt on a contract strip
Step 4 Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned and
intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new RJ45
connector. Figure 4-217 shows an unqualified piece.

Figure 4-217 Skewed plastic separators
Step 5 Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you can
see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are in good
contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade extends
beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not, replace the
connector. Figure 4-218 shows an unqualified piece.
Figure 4-218 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45
----End
4.15.3.4 Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables
Context
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and
crossover cables.
● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used

to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table
4-48 lists the connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 4-48 Connections of core wires in a straight-through cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted or Not
1 2
2 2 Orange Twisted
1 1 Orange-White
6 6 Green Twisted
3 3 Green-White
4 4 Blue Twisted
5 5 Blue-White
8 8 Brown Twisted
7 7 Brown-White
● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to

connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table 4-49 lists the
connections of core wires in a crossover cable.
Table 4-49 Connections of core wires in a straight crossover cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted or Not
1 2
6 2 Orange Twisted
3 1 Orange-White
2 6 Green Twisted
1 3 Green-White
4 4 Blue Twisted
5 5 Blue-White
8 8 Brown Twisted
7 7 Brown-White
Figure 4-219 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-219 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Procedure
Step 1 Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.
Step 2 After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators from
1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally and the
wires are correctly connected.
NOTE
Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you can see
the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 4-220.
Figure 4-220 Testing the conduction and connections of wires
Step 3 Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal contact
strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as shown in
Figure 4-221.

Figure 4-221 Checking the reliability
The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a
straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn on,
which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable.
The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following sequence:
At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of
1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.
If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is
unqualified.
NOTE
If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as shown in
Figure 4-222.
Figure 4-222 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable

----End
4.15.4 Installing Cable Accessories
4.15.4.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

NOTE
The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation
methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors
have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on
equipment.
Tools
Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation
procedure described here.
Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the
requirements listed in Table 4-50.
Table 4-50 Bending radius of cables or fibers

Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)
Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the

cable is connected with a connector, R
≥ 5d.
Fiber R ≥ 40 mm (1.57 in.); Bending angle >

90°
NOTE
The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.
Precautions for Installation

● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a
dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you
check that the pins are inserted properly.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are
properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force
using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric
screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine

the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or
adapter may be damaged.
● When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated
pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
● Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before
using the fiber connectors.
Requirements for Cable Routing

● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install
protective rings in the holes.
● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After
connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep
the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.
4.15.4.2 Installing Power Adapters
4.15.4.2.1 Installing the OT Terminal
Procedure
● Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting
hole, as shown in Figure 4-223.
Figure 4-223 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole

NOTE
When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in

Figure 4-224, where A is correct and B is incorrect.
Figure 4-224 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of

crimping sleeve
b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw,
and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 4-225.
Figure 4-225 Installing two terminals back to back
NOTICE
Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or

metal components.
c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown
in Figure 4-226.

Figure 4-226 Installed OT terminal
● Install two OT terminals on a post.

Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals
can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a
large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these
methods:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 4-227.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 4-228.
Figure 4-227 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle

Figure 4-228 Crossing two terminals
NOTICE
If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the
bigger one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.
● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.
----End
4.15.4.3 Installing Ethernet Adapters
4.15.4.3.1 Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female
connector, as shown in Figure 4-229.
Figure 4-229 Holding the male and female shielded connectors
Step 2 Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 4-230.

Figure 4-230 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded
connector
Step 3 When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port. (The
clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure
4-231.
Figure 4-231 Installed shielded Ethernet connector
Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector,

Figure 4-232 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector
----End
4.15.4.3.2 Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female
connector, as shown in Figure 4-233.
Figure 4-233 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors
Step 2 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 4-234.

Figure 4-234 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded connector
Step 3 A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 4-235 shows an
installed Ethernet connector.
Figure 4-235 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector
Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector,

Figure 4-236 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector
----End
4.15.4.4 Installing Fiber Connectors
Context
NOTICE
● After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and
install them as soon as possible.
● When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the
connectors are densely installed. Do not pull fiber protection pipes to remove
fiber connectors.
4.15.4.4.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors
Procedure
Step 1 Clean the pins of a fiber connector by using lint-free cotton and alcohol.
Step 2 Clean the pins again by using dust-free cotton. If necessary, clean the pins by
using an air gun. Ensure that the pins are free from any fiber or debris.
----End
4.15.4.4.2 Installing an FC Fiber Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
Figure 4-237 Aligning the male connector with the female connector
Step 3 Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as shown in Figure
4-238.
Figure 4-238 Feeding the male connector into the female connector
Step 4 Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely
installed, as shown in Figure 4-239.

Figure 4-239 Fastening the locking nut
Step 5 To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut counterclockwise,

and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-240.
Figure 4-240 Disassembling an FC fiber connector
----End
4.15.4.4.3 Installing an LC Fiber Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future use.

Step 3 Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in Figure
4-242.
Figure 4-242 Feeding the male connector into the female connector
Step 4 A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in Figure
4-243.
Figure 4-243 Installed LC connector
Step 5 To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the locking
clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-244.

Figure 4-244 Disassembling an LC fiber connector
----End
4.15.4.4.4 Installing the SC Fiber Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future use.
Step 3 Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding the
shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the fiber
connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the figure). Pull
the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the installation is
complete. See Figure 4-246.

Figure 4-246 Installed SC fiber connector
Step 4 To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not hold
the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the adapter.
Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as shown in
Figure 4-247.
Figure 4-247 Disassembling an SC fiber connector
----End
4.15.4.4.5 Installing an MPO Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future use.

Step 3 Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors are
securely installed, as shown in Figure 4-249.
Figure 4-249 Installed MPO fiber connector
Step 4 To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and remove
the male connector, as shown in Figure 4-250.

Figure 4-250 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector
----End
4.15.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening
screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 4-251.
Figure 4-251 Loosening two fastening screws
Step 2 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking mechanism.
The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as shown in Figure
4-252.

Figure 4-252 Pliers jaw opening automatically
Step 3 Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 4-253.
Figure 4-253 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools
Step 4 Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and align
the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-254.

Figure 4-254 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool
NOTICE
Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the
teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.
Step 5 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and the
jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-255.
Figure 4-255 Aligning the screw holes
Step 6 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two
fastening screws clockwise. Figure 4-256 and Figure 4-257shows the mold
installed in the COAX crimping tool.

Figure 4-256 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool
Figure 4-257 An installed mold
----End
4.16 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for

Device Operation
4.16.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room
4.16.1.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room

When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and
technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological,
seismic, power supply, and transportation factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-
proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized

construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The

equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial
construction, environmental protection, fire safety, and civil air defense.
Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other
requirements.
The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment
room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer
stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as
follows:
● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located
at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources
such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a
distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as
packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the
livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as
the equipment room.
● The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment
room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment
room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.
● The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt
lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities.
In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material.
Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.
● The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to
maintain an airtight room.
● Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
● No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on
the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that
they are smooth, wear-resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated,
heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.
● The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive
pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room
and corroding components and circuit boards.
● It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in.) above the maximum flood level.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
● The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face
pollution sources.

● Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow
directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the
equipment.
● Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.
4.16.1.2 Equipment Room Layout

An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment,
telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary
equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, place the equipment
in different rooms. Figure 4-258 shows the layout of the equipment room.
Figure 4-258 Layout of the equipment room
The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:

● It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication
cables and power cables.
● It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.
4.16.1.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 4-51 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.
Table 4-51 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements
Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.
Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less
than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room
is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Item Requirements
Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and

dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended.
Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal
tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08
in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-
conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 107
ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised
floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm
current-limiting resistor and connection line.
Load-bearing Evaluate whether the load bearing capacity of the floor in the
capacity equipment room meets the deployment requirements based on
the model and number of devices to be housed in each cabinet.
If it is uncertain whether the load bearing capacity of the floor
in the equipment room meets the device installation
requirements, you are advised to contact a local professional
architecture design institute for further evaluation and
hardening solution formulation.
● When one device is installed in each cabinet, the minimum
load bearing capacity of the equipment room is 300 kg/m2
(X4 device), 370 kg/m2 (X8 device).
● When multiple devices are installed in each cabinet, the
minimum load bearing capacity of the equipment room is
620 kg/m2 (X4 device) and 620 kg/m2 (X8 device).
Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and
windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in
the windows and seal them tightly.
Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use
treatment pulverized paint.
Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable
trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the
cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the
holes must comply with the requirements of device
arrangement.
Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through
the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the
staircase.
Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside
dust.
Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly
position of on equipment.
the air
conditioner

Item Requirements
Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like
requirements mice).
Figure 4-259 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room
4.16.1.4 Equipment Room Environment

Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for
connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of
devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-
permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 4-52 lists the requirement for dust
concentration in the equipment room.
Table 4-52 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room

Mechanical active Unit Concentration
material
Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104

(no visible dust
accumulated on a
workbench in three
days)
Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2
Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5

Mechanical active Unit Concentration

material
Description
● Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
● Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
● 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm
Take the following measures to meet the requirements:

● Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.
● Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows
should be dust-proof.
● Clean the equipment room and clean devices' air filters monthly.
● Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.
4.16.1.5 Requirements for Corrosive Gases

The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and
NH3. Table 4-53 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.
Table 4-53 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration
Chemical
active material Unit Concentration
SO2 mg/m3 ≤0.30
H2S mg/m3 ≤0.10
NOx mg/m3 ≤0.50
NH3 mg/m3 ≤1.00
Cl2 mg/m3 ≤0.10
HCl mg/m3 ≤0.10
HF mg/m3 ≤0.01
O3 mg/m3 ≤0.05
Take the following measures to meet the requirements:

● Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction
from any pollution source.

● Place batteries in different rooms.

● A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.
4.16.1.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.
Take the following measures to meet this requirement:

● Train operators about ESD prevention.
● Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact
of static electricity.
● Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.
● Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.
● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least
30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
4.16.1.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause
equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic
wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling.
Prevent the interference using these approaches:
● Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply
system.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for
surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.
● Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units,
and high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.
4.16.1.8 Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding

Table 4-54 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.
Table 4-54 Requirements for lightning proof grounding
Item Requirements
Capital ● Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.

construction ● Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside
the room.
● The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding
body with the protective ground of the room.

Item Requirements
Power cables ● After the low-voltage power cables are led into the room,
leading in the install the surge protector for the power cables in the AC
equipment voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel
room need to (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby.
be equipped ● For an equipment room in urban area, install a power
with a surge supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
protector of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built
in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in
a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes,
or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 100 kA.
● The ground cable of the surge protector should be no
longer than 1 m (3.28 ft).
Grounding for ● Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V
DC power DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
distribution supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
● The power equipment must have a DC working ground
cable, which can connect the power equipment to the
collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or
the protective ground bar of the equipment room).
Equipotential ● Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the

connection room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching
equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution
frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective
ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment
room to one protective ground bar.
● Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective
ground of devices, which means the two share one
grounding network.
● The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.
General ● Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with
requirements the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the
for grounding equipment room.
● Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
● All ground cables should be as short as possible, and
arranged in a straight line.

Item Requirements
Grounding ● The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.

resistance ● The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7
m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the
grounding body below the frozen ground.
● Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.
Routing of ● Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the

signal cable equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site
underground.
● Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a
metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room.
● Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
● Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not
deploy outdoor aerial cables.
● Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge
protection devices.
Collective ● Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
● Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
connecting different metal parts together.
● Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a
cross-sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or
use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate
the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars
of the building.
Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42

lead-in ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area
of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm
(1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).
Leakage A 100 mA residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB) is

current test recommended for a leakage current test.
4.16.2 Requirements for Power Supply
4.16.2.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply

An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power
supplies (UPSs), and self-supplied electric generators, and should use a centralized
power supply mode. In addition to meeting the requirements of the server load,

the AC power supply must have a simple connection line, safe operation, flexible
scheduling, and easy maintenance.
The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-
wire mode. This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50
Hz.
The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the
power mains. The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than
10 ms; otherwise, the networking devices will reboot or reset.
For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current
and fault current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC
power supplies protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying
capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room for more than that of the
devices.
Table 4-55 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices.
Table 4-55 Voltage range of AC power supply

Item Requirements
AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage

support the devices
AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage

support the power
modules and important
buildings
Frequency of alternating -4% to +4% of the rated value

current
Voltage wave shape sine Within 5% of the rated voltage

distortion
The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports
telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control.
AC power cables should meet the following specifications:
● AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase
line.
● AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables
should comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms
should comply with local regulations.
4.16.2.2 Recommendations for AC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the AC power supply.
● If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices
exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that
devices can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device
is required.

● If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains
voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input
voltage range of the DC power supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage
stabilizing device is required.
● A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted
AC power to support the telecommunication load.
● If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be
equipped with a self-supplied electric generator to support the key
telecommunication load. The capacity should be not less than 150% to 200%
of the total uninterruptible power supply.
● Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups.
UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy
required for the UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When
an inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the
maximum power and a backup inverter is required.
4.16.2.3 Requirements for DC Power Supply

The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the
power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder
as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.
● A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on
each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on
the respective floor.
● A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for
centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
● A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its
equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released
from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.
Table 4-56 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.
Table 4-56 Specifications for the DC power supply

Item Requirements
DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current

capacity to
support the
surge current
Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the

voltage rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to
precision 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier
ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage
precision less than or equal to 1%.
Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%

amplitude of
switch on/off

Item Requirements
Peak noise ≤200 mV

voltage
Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.
4.16.2.4 Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
● Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems
and put power equipment in multiple locations.
● Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
● Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary
capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of
storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply
system.
● The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or
fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are
more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10
active modules.
● Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by
the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most
offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.
4.17 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications
4.17.1 General Grounding Specifications

Table 4-57 shows the general grounding specifications.
Table 4-57 General grounding specifications
No. Description
1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded

ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame
should share the same grounding conductor.
2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows
in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.
3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in

normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

No. Description
4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground

bar of the equipment room.
5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical

connection.
4.17.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room

The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be
less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary
communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in
an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.
4.17.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

Table 4-58 lists the equipment grounding specifications.
Table 4-58 Equipment Grounding Specifications

No. Description
1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base

stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in
the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all
protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and
then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the
protective ground (PGND) of the device.
2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar

provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a
yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-
sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).
3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of
the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the
grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection
cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq.
in.).
4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No

insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal
components.

No. Description
5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and
gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a
rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around
the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and
nut to ensure good electrical contact.
6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are

required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq.
in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends
of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of
neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.
4.17.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power

Supply
Table 4-59 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.
Table 4-59 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies

No. Description
1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharge current no less than 20 kA.
2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication
equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and
the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same
protective ground bar for them if possible.
3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.
4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V

DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power
supply.
5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply

equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective
ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment
are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar
for them if possible.
6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

4.17.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 4-60 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.
Table 4-60 Grounding specifications for signal cables
No. Description
1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both
ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room,
install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The
PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as
possible.
2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and
unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.
3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when
going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to
the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same
grounding conductor as the cabinet.
4 Do not route signal cables overhead.
4.17.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 4-61 shows the specifications for the ground cable.
Table 4-61 Specifications for laying out ground cables
No. Description
1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal
cable.
2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground

cables overhead.
3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add
any switches or fuses.
4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic

insulated one with a copper core.
5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the

protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the
equipment room.
6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more

than 45 m (147.64 ft).

4.18 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables

An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and
maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and
orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation.
Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:
● Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
● Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.
NOTE
Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the

equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.
4.18.1 Introduction to Labels
4.18.1.1 Label Materials

Features:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
● Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
● Pass UL and CSA authentication
4.18.1.2 Type and Structure
Label for Signal Cables

The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
4-260.

Figure 4-260 Label for signal cables
To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label.
For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis
number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each
dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02
in.).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is
1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).
The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label
is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.
Power Cable Label

The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed
area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and
the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 4-261.

Figure 4-261 Power cable label
4.18.1.3 Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for
the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.
Template for Printing

You can obtain a template from the Huawei local office to print labels.
The template is made in Microsoft Word. Follow these instructions to use the
template:

● You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of
centered characters, direction, and fonts.
● If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure
that the printouts are clear and legible.
Merging Cells in the Template

To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge
Cells.
Requirements on the Printer

To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up
the page and try printing.
1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper
over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup
conforms to the label layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the
label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing
again until the correct printout is produced.
The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.
1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the
values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.
NOTE
If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-262 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue the printing.
Figure 4-262 Warning prompt before printing
After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Requirements for Feeding the Printer

The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing
procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use,
feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the
auto-feed mode.
Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in
a correct position.
Requirements for the Printed Label

Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:
● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
backing layer of the label page.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move
the text to the next line.
4.18.1.4 Writing Labels
Writing Tools
To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of
ball-point pens to write the labels.
If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not
recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, waterproof markers are better.
When writing with a ball-point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.
NOTE
The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Font
For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in
Table 4-62 (Times New Roman).
Table 4-62 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 A B C D E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q
R S T U V W X Y Z

Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and
ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy.
Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 4-263.
Figure 4-263 Placement of text on a label
4.18.1.5 Attaching Labels

After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for
attaching labels are described in the following sections.
Label for Signal Cables

● Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In
special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables),
other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with
text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 4-264. The
details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.
Figure 4-264 Text area of the label
● Procedure for attaching labels

Figure 4-265 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

Figure 4-265 Label for signal cables
Power Cable Label

Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the
identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. In an
equipment room, all labels should be attached in the same way. The cable ties are
bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in
special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 4-266. The
details are as follows:
● The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
● The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make
sure that the label is facing out.

Figure 4-266 Binding the label for the power cable
4.18.1.6 Contents of Engineering Labels
Contents of Labels for Power Cables

Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
Contents of Labels for Signal Cables

The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 4-267 shows the
information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.
● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Figure 4-267 Printed parts on the label for signal cables
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the

location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location
information of the local end.
In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the
information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.
4.18.1.7 Precautions for Using Engineering Labels

When using labels, pay attention to the following points:
● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and
ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are
pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.
4.18.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers
These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces.
There are two types of labels for optical cables:
● One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.
4.18.2.1 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices
Meaning of the Label

Table 4-63 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers
that connect two devices.
Table 4-63 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
R/T number numbered from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and
column 01.
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,

number for example, 01.

C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order

slot number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot
at the top left of the chassis.
D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,

interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.
R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface
Example of the Label

Figure 4-268 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.
Figure 4-268 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices
The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 4-268.

● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row
A, column 01 in the machine room.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
4.18.2.2 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF
Meaning of the Labels

Table 4-64 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber
between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

Table 4-64 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF
MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.

R/T number
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,

number for example, 01.
C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order

number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first
slot at the top left of the chassis.
D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,

interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.
R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface
ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
C-R/T number and numbered from A to Z.
column N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
number of an numbered from 01 to 99.
ODF
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and
column 01.
B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

of the terminal
device
C: column
number of the
terminal
device
R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

Figure 4-269 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

Figure 4-269 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF
Meaning of the label in Figure 4-269

● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF
in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet
in row A, column 01 in the machine room.
4.18.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables
Applicable Ranges
The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.
Label Content
Table 4-65 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet
cables.
You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the
device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet
number.
Table 4-65 Information on the Ethernet cables
MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two

number digits, for example, 01.
C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and

number left-right order. For example, 01.
D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders.

number For example, 01.
MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in

number row B.

Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal

number device on site. If the cable is connected to a
device in a cabinet, specify the serial
numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the
Ethernet interface of the device. For example,
B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the
Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.
The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the
device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.
● For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on
the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 4-65.
● If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should
contain specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according
to actual connections.
Label Example
Figure 4-270 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.
Figure 4-270 Sample label on an Ethernet cable
Meaning of the label in Figure 4-270.

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01
in the equipment room.

● "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to

network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the
equipment room. No slot number is given.
4.18.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables

Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on
the device and main distribution frame (MDF).
Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables

Table 4-66 shows the contents of the labels.
Table 4-66 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row
number A.
B: frame Numbered in the bottom-up order with two

number digits, for example, 03.
C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and

number left-right order. For example, 01.
D: cable number Numbered with two digits in top-down and

left-right order. For example, 01.
MDF-MN-B-C MN: row M: The rows of cabinets from front to back

number and are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns
column number of cabinets from left to right are numbered
of the MDF from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF
of Row G and Column 01.
B: row number Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

of the terminal
device
C: column
number of the
terminal device

Figure 4-271 shows a sample label on a user cable.
Figure 4-271 Sample label on a user cable

The meaning of the label in Figure 4-271 is as follows:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the
equipment room.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is
connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column
01 in the equipment room.
4.18.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables
4.18.5.1 Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables
also include power cables and PGND cables.
The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 4-67.
Table 4-67 Contents of the label

Content Meaning
MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.

B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND N: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-
up and left-to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
PGND cabinet.
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like a control
cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row
number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify
the row and column number for BGND and PGND.
The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the
power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the
label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 4-67 lists the information on two -48 V
power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V
and 60 V should be given in similar methods.
Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should

face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction. For details, see Figure 4-272.
Figure 4-272 Example of the labels for DC power cables
The meaning of the label in Figure 4-272 is as follows:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B
of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment
room.
● On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is
-48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the
equipment room.
NOTE
In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission
equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8")
is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-
circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It
is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box,
instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper
bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means
that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power
distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the
labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.
4.18.5.2 Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to both ends of an AC power cable that provides AC
power supply to cabinets, including 110/220 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The
110/220 V AC cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with an
insulating sheath, so the labels need to contain only the word "AC" and the
cabinet numbers.
The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details, see Table 4-68.

Table 4-68 Label content

Content Meaning
MN-(B)-ACn MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the
power is led in
B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
n: power port number, numbered as 1 to 3 in bottom-up and
left-to-right order.
Serial number of the socket where the power is led in: the
location of the socket is marked according to the actual
situation. If the sockets can be identified by row numbers and
column numbers, they can be numbered following the same
rule for the cabinets. If the sockets cannot be identified by
rows and columns, specify the detailed locations to avoid
confusion with other sockets.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment and the
power socket; information about the local end is unnecessary.
Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction, as shown in Figure 4-273.
Figure 4-273 Labels for AC power cables
Meaning of the label in Figure 4-273.

● On the equipment cabinet side, the label marked "A01-AC1" indicates that
the power cable is connected to the first AC power socket of row A and
column 01 in the equipment room.
● On the power socket side, the label marked "B01-AC1" indicates that the
power cable is connected to the first AC power socket in the cabinet of row B
and column 01 in the equipment room.

4.19 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules
Common Faults of an Optical Module

1. An optical module is not completely installed in position.
If the optical module is not completely installed in position and the latch boss
is not secured, the device cannot identify the optical module. After the optical
module works for a long time, it will be ejected under external stress.
2. The optical receptacle on an optical module is contaminated.
If an optical module is not cleaned or protected properly, contaminants may
accumulate on the fiber pin in the optical module. As a result, the coupling
efficiency is reduced, optical signals are cut off, or even worse, the surface of
the fiber pin is damaged permanently.
3. An optical module is burnt.
If high-power optical signals are transmitted through an optical module that
is used for long-distance transmission but no optical attenuator is used, the
optical power will exceed the overload power of the avalanche photodiode
(APD). Then the optical module is burnt.
The preceding faults lead to temporary or long-term cut-off of optical signals; or
even cause permanent damages to the optical module, affecting communication
services.
Measures to Prevent a Loosened Optical Module

1. When installing an optical module, insert it in position. If you hear a click or
feel a slight shake, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
If the latch boss is not secured, the gold finger of the optical module is not in
good contact with the connector on the board. In this case, the link may be
connected but optical signals will be cut off or the optical module will be
loosened when the optical module is shaken or hit.
2. Figure 4-274 shows the release handle on an optical module when it is open
and closed. When inserting the optical module, make sure that the release
handle is closed. At this time, the latch boss locks the optical module. After
the optical module is inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in
position. If the optical module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.

Figure 4-274 State of the release handle
Measures to Prevent Receptacle Contamination

1. Cleaning tissues must be prepared on site. You need to clean the optical
connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the receptacle
against contamination on the surface of the optical connector.
Figure 4-275 Cleaning optical fibers with special cleaning tissues
NOTE
Place at least three cleaning tissues on the work bench. As shown in Figure Cleaning
optical fibers with special cleaning tissues, wipe the end of an optical connector
from left to right or from right to left on a cleaning tissue, and then move the
connector end to the unused part of the cleaning tissue to continue.
2. Cover an unused optical module with a protective cap to prevent dust, as
Figure 4-276 Installing a protective cap
If no protective cap is available, use fibers to protect the optical module, as


Figure 4-277 Using fibers to protect an optical module
3. Cover unused optical connectors with protective caps, as shown in Figure

4-278, and then lay out fibers on the fiber rack or coil them in a fiber
management tray to prevent fibers from being squeezed.
Figure 4-278 Installing a protective cap on a fiber
4. If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
is not covered with a protective cap, you need to clean it before using it. Clean
a receptacle with a cotton swab, as shown in Figure 4-279. Clean an optical
connector with cleaning tissues.
Figure 4-279 Cleaning a receptacle with a cotton swab
NOTICE
When cleaning a receptacle, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much strength because the receptacle may be
damaged.
5. If optical signals are lost during the operation of a device, use the preceding
method to clean the receptacle or the optical connector. In this manner, the
possibility of contamination can be excluded.

Measures to Prevent an Optical Module from Being Burnt

1. Before using an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR) to test the
connectivity or the attenuation of optical signals, disconnect an optical fiber
from an optical module, and connect both ends of the optical fiber to the
OTDR. Otherwise, the optical module will be burnt.
2. When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector instead of the optical attenuator.
Precautions
1. The optical connector should be vertically inserted in the receptacle to avoid
damages to the receptacle.
2. Fibers must be inserted into optical modules of the corresponding type. That
is, multimode fibers must be inserted into multimode optical modules, and
single mode fibers must be inserted into single mode optical modules. If a
fiber is inserted into an optical module of a different mode, faults may occur.
For example, optical signals will be lost.
4.20 Appendix G Fault Tag

*Customer name:
Address:
Contact person:
Tel.: Fax:
Category*: □ RMA □ Return □ Analysis
Description
Fault of the Fault
BOM Product Bar Occurring Phenomen Categor Software
Code Description Code* Date* a* y No.* Version*
Reasons for Repairing (Category No.):

Category No. includes the following eight types:

F001 - Wear out damaged (◊ In warranty Period ◊ Out of warranty period)
F002 - Deployment damaged
F003 - Intransit damaged
F004 - Version upgrade
F005 - Batch replace
F007 - Overdue spare parts inspecting
F008 - Others
F011 - Running circumstance change
Note:
● For optical interface cards returned, the optical interfaces should be covered
with protection caps.
● In general, the analysis card will not be returned to you. If you have any
special requirements, please contact Huawei.
● One Fault Tag should be adapted in one return category, such as RMA/
Return/Analysis.
● The items marked with "*" are the mandatory fields that you must fill in.

NetEngine 8000 X Hardware Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NetEngine 8000 X Hardware Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NetEngine 8000 X Hardware Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 X Series

V800R012C10 and Later Versions

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

3.4.1 X4 Noise Reduction Module........................................................................................................................................ 159

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

3.5.6.2 CR8DEANEJXD9 (10-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 + 36-Port 10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

3.5.8.20 CR8D00LRXFC6 (03050DMG-003: 72-Port 25GE(SFP28)/10GE(SFP+)/GE(SFP) Integrated Line

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

3.5.9.1 CR8D00EKNBC1 (40-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated Line Processing Unit CM(LPUI-4T-CM))

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

3.5.9.25 CR8DE8KE8NCU (03050CMD: 8-Port 400GBase-QSFP-DD + 8-Port 100GBase-QSFP28 Integrated

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

3.6.5.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended............................................................................................... 1019

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

3.6.11.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial........................................................................................... 1120

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

3.6.20.8 100Gbps-QSFP28-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................. 1170

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

3.9.1 Breakout Fibers..............................................................................................................................................................1242

4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement......................................................... 1268

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

4.4.6.2.2 Connecting the X4 device to a PDF Directly (DC)...................................................................................... 1396

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

4.15.3.4 Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables............................................................................................... 1573

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

4.18.1.4 Writing Labels.......................................................................................................................................................... 1614

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Product Name Version

HUAWEI NetEngine 8000 X Applicable to:

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

● Network planning engineers

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

Supplements the important information in the main

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

2 Using the Hardware Tool

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

3.1.1 NetEngine 8000 X4

Table 3-1 Basic information about the NetEngine 8000 X4

NetEngine 8000 02353CVY CR8PBKP04AC0 V800R012C00

NetEngine 8000 02353CVY-001 CR8PBKP04AC0 V800R023C00SPC

NetEngine 8000 02353CWA CR8PBKP04DC0 V800R012C00

NetEngine 8000 02353CWA-001 CR8PBKP04DC0 V800R023C00SPC

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

Description Part Number Model First supported

NetEngine 8800 02355WGA CR8P8BP04AC2 V800R023C10

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NetEngine 8000 X4 1

Issue 06 (2023-10-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6